Request for vote to move forward with recovery.conf overhaul

diff --git a/contrib/pg_archivecleanup/pg_archivecleanup.c b/contrib/pg_archivecleanup/pg_archivecleanup.c
index e97a11c..fb01da9 100644
--- a/contrib/pg_archivecleanup/pg_archivecleanup.c
+++ b/contrib/pg_archivecleanup/pg_archivecleanup.c
@@ -255,7 +255,7 @@ usage(void)
 	printf("  -x EXT         clean up files if they have this extension\n");
 	printf("  -?, --help     show this help, then exit\n");
 	printf("\n"
-		   "For use as archive_cleanup_command in recovery.conf when standby_mode = on:\n"
+		   "For use as archive_cleanup_command in postgresql.conf when standby_mode = on:\n"
 		   "  archive_cleanup_command = 'pg_archivecleanup [OPTION]... ARCHIVELOCATION %%r'\n"
 		   "e.g.\n"
 		   "  archive_cleanup_command = 'pg_archivecleanup /mnt/server/archiverdir %%r'\n");
diff --git a/contrib/pg_standby/pg_standby.c b/contrib/pg_standby/pg_standby.c
index 659bd50..115c25e 100644
--- a/contrib/pg_standby/pg_standby.c
+++ b/contrib/pg_standby/pg_standby.c
@@ -531,7 +531,7 @@ usage(void)
 	printf("  -w MAXWAITTIME     max seconds to wait for a file (0=no limit) (default=0)\n");
 	printf("  -?, --help         show this help, then exit\n");
 	printf("\n"
-		   "Main intended use as restore_command in recovery.conf:\n"
+		   "Main intended use as restore_command in postgresql.conf:\n"
 		   "  restore_command = 'pg_standby [OPTION]... ARCHIVELOCATION %%f %%p %%r'\n"
 		   "e.g.\n"
 	"  restore_command = 'pg_standby /mnt/server/archiverdir %%f %%p %%r'\n");
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/backup.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/backup.sgml
index c4215be..7ed5337 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/backup.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/backup.sgml
@@ -1002,8 +1002,15 @@ SELECT pg_stop_backup();
    </listitem>
    <listitem>
     <para>
-     Create a recovery command file <filename>recovery.conf</> in the cluster
-     data directory (see <xref linkend="recovery-config">). You might
+     Set up recovery parameters in <filename>postgresql.conf</> (see
+     <xref linkend="runtime-config-wal-archive-recovery"> and
+     <xref linkend="runtime-config-wal-recovery-target">).
+    </para>
+   </listitem>
+   <listitem>
+    <para>
+     Create a recovery trigger file <filename>recovery.trigger</>
+     in the cluster data directory. You might
      also want to temporarily modify <filename>pg_hba.conf</> to prevent
      ordinary users from connecting until you are sure the recovery was successful.
     </para>
@@ -1015,7 +1022,7 @@ SELECT pg_stop_backup();
      recovery be terminated because of an external error, the server can
      simply be restarted and it will continue recovery.  Upon completion
      of the recovery process, the server will rename
-     <filename>recovery.conf</> to <filename>recovery.done</> (to prevent
+     <filename>recovery.trigger</> to <filename>recovery.done</> (to prevent
      accidentally re-entering recovery mode later) and then
      commence normal database operations.
     </para>
@@ -1031,12 +1038,11 @@ SELECT pg_stop_backup();
    </para>
 
    <para>
-    The key part of all this is to set up a recovery configuration file that
-    describes how you want to recover and how far the recovery should
-    run.  You can use <filename>recovery.conf.sample</> (normally
-    located in the installation's <filename>share/</> directory) as a
-    prototype.  The one thing that you absolutely must specify in
-    <filename>recovery.conf</> is the <varname>restore_command</>,
+    The key part of all this is to set up recovery parameters that
+    specify how you want to recover and how far the recovery should
+    run. The one thing that you absolutely must specify in
+    <filename>postgresql.conf</> to recover from the backup is
+    the <varname>restore_command</>,
     which tells <productname>PostgreSQL</> how to retrieve archived
     WAL file segments.  Like the <varname>archive_command</>, this is
     a shell command string.  It can contain <literal>%f</>, which is
@@ -1090,7 +1096,7 @@ restore_command = 'cp /mnt/server/archivedir/%f %p'
    <para>
     If you want to recover to some previous point in time (say, right before
     the junior DBA dropped your main transaction table), just specify the
-    required stopping point in <filename>recovery.conf</>.  You can specify
+    required stopping point in <filename>postgresql.conf</>.  You can specify
     the stop point, known as the <quote>recovery target</>, either by
     date/time, named restore point or by completion of a specific transaction
     ID.  As of this writing only the date/time and named restore point options
@@ -1187,8 +1193,9 @@ restore_command = 'cp /mnt/server/archivedir/%f %p'
     The default behavior of recovery is to recover along the same timeline
     that was current when the base backup was taken.  If you wish to recover
     into some child timeline (that is, you want to return to some state that
-    was itself generated after a recovery attempt), you need to specify the
-    target timeline ID in <filename>recovery.conf</>.  You cannot recover into
+    was itself generated after a recovery attempt), you need to set
+    <xref linkend="guc-recovery-target-timeline"> to the
+    target timeline ID in <filename>postgresql.conf</>.  You cannot recover into
     timelines that branched off earlier than the base backup.
    </para>
   </sect2>
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/config.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/config.sgml
index b7df8ce..3b26bb7 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/config.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/config.sgml
@@ -2161,6 +2161,278 @@ include 'filename'
      </variablelist>
     </sect2>
 
+    <sect2 id="runtime-config-wal-archive-recovery">
+     <title>Archive Recovery</title>
+
+     <variablelist>
+      <varlistentry id="guc-restore-command" xreflabel="restore_command">
+       <term><varname>restore_command</varname> (<type>string</type>)</term>
+       <indexterm>
+        <primary><varname>restore_command</> configuration parameter</primary>
+       </indexterm>
+       <listitem>
+        <para>
+         The shell command to execute to retrieve an archived segment of
+         the WAL file series. This parameter is required for archive recovery,
+         but optional for streaming replication.
+         Any <literal>%f</> in the string is
+         replaced by the name of the file to retrieve from the archive,
+         and any <literal>%p</> is replaced by the copy destination path name
+         on the server.
+         (The path name is relative to the current working directory,
+         i.e., the cluster's data directory.)
+         Any <literal>%r</> is replaced by the name of the file containing the
+         last valid restart point. That is the earliest file that must be kept
+         to allow a restore to be restartable, so this information can be used
+         to truncate the archive to just the minimum required to support
+         restarting from the current restore. <literal>%r</> is typically only
+         used by warm-standby configurations
+         (see <xref linkend="warm-standby">).
+         Write <literal>%%</> to embed an actual <literal>%</> character.
+        </para>
+        <para>
+         It is important for the command to return a zero exit status
+         only if it succeeds.  The command <emphasis>will</> be asked for file
+         names that are not present in the archive; it must return nonzero
+         when so asked.  Examples:
+<programlisting>
+restore_command = 'cp /mnt/server/archivedir/%f "%p"'
+restore_command = 'copy "C:\\server\\archivedir\\%f" "%p"'  # Windows
+</programlisting>
+        </para>
+        <para>
+         This parameter can only be set in the <filename>postgresql.conf</>
+         file or on the server command line. It only has effect during archive
+         recovery or in standby mode.
+        </para>
+       </listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+
+      <varlistentry id="guc-archive-cleanup-command" xreflabel="archive_cleanup_command">
+       <term><varname>archive_cleanup_command</varname> (<type>string</type>)</term>
+       <indexterm>
+         <primary><varname>archive_cleanup_command</> configuration parameter</primary>
+       </indexterm>
+       <listitem>
+        <para>
+         The shell command that will be executed at every restartpoint.
+         The purpose of <varname>archive_cleanup_command</> is to
+         provide a mechanism for cleaning up old archived WAL files that
+         are no longer needed by the standby server.
+         Any <literal>%r</> is replaced by the name of the file containing the
+         last valid restart point.
+         That is the earliest file that must be <emphasis>kept</> to allow a
+         restore to be restartable, and so all files earlier than <literal>%r</>
+         may be safely removed.
+         This information can be used to truncate the archive to just the
+         minimum required to support restart from the current restore.
+         The <xref linkend="pgarchivecleanup"> module
+         is often used in <varname>archive_cleanup_command</> for
+         single-standby configurations, for example:
+<programlisting>archive_cleanup_command = 'pg_archivecleanup /mnt/server/archivedir %r'</programlisting>
+         Note however that if multiple standby servers are restoring from the
+         same archive directory, you will need to ensure that you do not delete
+         WAL files until they are no longer needed by any of the servers.
+         <varname>archive_cleanup_command</> would typically be used in a
+         warm-standby configuration (see <xref linkend="warm-standby">).
+         Write <literal>%%</> to embed an actual <literal>%</> character in the
+         command.
+        </para>
+        <para>
+         If the command returns a non-zero exit status then a WARNING log
+         message will be written.
+        </para>
+        <para>
+         This parameter can only be set in the <filename>postgresql.conf</>
+         file or on the server command line. It only has effect during archive
+         recovery or in standby mode.
+        </para>
+       </listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+
+      <varlistentry id="guc-recovery-end-command" xreflabel="recovery_end_command">
+       <term><varname>recovery_end_command</varname> (<type>string</type>)</term>
+       <indexterm>
+         <primary><varname>recovery_end_command</> configuration parameter</primary>
+       </indexterm>
+       <listitem>
+        <para>
+         The shell command that will be executed once only
+         at the end of recovery. This parameter is optional. The purpose of the
+         <varname>recovery_end_command</> is to provide a mechanism for cleanup
+         following replication or recovery.
+         Any <literal>%r</> is replaced by the name of the file containing the
+         last valid restart point, like in <varname>archive_cleanup_command</>.
+        </para>
+        <para>
+         If the command returns a non-zero exit status then a WARNING log
+         message will be written and the database will proceed to start up
+         anyway.  An exception is that if the command was terminated by a
+         signal, the database will not proceed with startup.
+        </para>
+        <para>
+         This parameter can only be set in the <filename>postgresql.conf</>
+         file or on the server command line. It only has effect during archive
+         recovery or in standby mode.
+        </para>
+       </listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+     </variablelist>
+    </sect2>
+
+    <sect2 id="runtime-config-wal-recovery-target">
+     <title>Recovery Target</title>
+
+     <variablelist>
+      <varlistentry id="guc-recovery-target-name" xreflabel="recovery_target_name">
+       <term><varname>recovery_target_name</varname> (<type>string</type>)</term>
+       <indexterm>
+        <primary><varname>recovery_target_name</> configuration parameter</primary>
+       </indexterm>
+       <listitem>
+        <para>
+         Specifies the named restore point, created with
+         <function>pg_create_restore_point()</> to which recovery will proceed.
+         At most one of <varname>recovery_target_name</>,
+         <varname>recovery_target_time</> or
+         <varname>recovery_target_xid</> can be specified.  The default
+         value is an empty string, which will recover to the end of the WAL log.
+        </para>
+        <para>
+         This parameter can only be set in the <filename>postgresql.conf</>
+         file or on the server command line. It only has effect during archive
+         recovery or in standby mode.
+        </para>
+       </listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+
+      <varlistentry id="guc-recovery-target-time" xreflabel="recovery_target_time">
+       <term><varname>recovery_target_time</varname> (<type>string</type>)</term>
+       <indexterm>
+        <primary><varname>recovery_target_time</> configuration parameter</primary>
+       </indexterm>
+       <listitem>
+        <para>
+         Specifies the time stamp up to which recovery will proceed.
+         This parameter must be specified in the date/time format
+         (see <xref linkend="datatype-datetime-input"> for details).
+         At most one of <varname>recovery_target_time</>,
+         <varname>recovery_target_name</> or
+         <varname>recovery_target_xid</> can be specified.
+         The default value is an empty string, which will recover to
+         the end of the WAL log. The precise stopping point is also
+         influenced by <varname>recovery_target_inclusive</>.
+        </para>
+        <para>
+         This parameter can only be set in the <filename>postgresql.conf</>
+         file or on the server command line. It only has effect during archive
+         recovery or in standby mode.
+        </para>
+       </listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+
+      <varlistentry id="guc-recovery-target-xid" xreflabel="recovery_target_xid">
+       <term><varname>recovery_target_xid</varname> (<type>string</type>)</term>
+       <indexterm>
+        <primary><varname>recovery_target_xid</> configuration parameter</primary>
+       </indexterm>
+       <listitem>
+        <para>
+         Specifies the transaction ID up to which recovery will proceed.
+         Keep in mind that while transaction IDs are assigned sequentially
+         at transaction start, transactions can complete in a different
+         numeric order. The transactions that will be recovered are
+         those that committed before (and optionally including)
+         the specified one. At most one of <varname>recovery_target_xid</>,
+         <varname>recovery_target_name</> or
+         <varname>recovery_target_time</> can be specified.
+         The default value is an empty string, which will recover to the end of
+         the WAL log. The precise stopping point is also influenced by
+         <varname>recovery_target_inclusive</>.
+        </para>
+        <para>
+         This parameter can only be set in the <filename>postgresql.conf</>
+         file or on the server command line. It only has effect during archive
+         recovery or in standby mode.
+        </para>
+       </listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+
+      <varlistentry id="guc-recovery-target-inclusive" xreflabel="recovery_target_inclusive">
+       <term><varname>recovery_target_inclusive</varname> (<type>boolean</type>)</term>
+       <indexterm>
+        <primary><varname>recovery_target_inclusive</> configuration parameter</primary>
+       </indexterm>
+       <listitem>
+        <para>
+         Specifies whether we stop just after the specified recovery target
+         (<literal>on</>), or just before the recovery target (<literal>off</>).
+         Applies to both <varname>recovery_target_time</>
+         and <varname>recovery_target_xid</>, whichever one is
+         specified for this recovery.  This indicates whether transactions
+         having exactly the target commit time or ID, respectively, will
+         be included in the recovery.  Default is <literal>on</>.
+        </para>
+        <para>
+         This parameter can only be set in the <filename>postgresql.conf</>
+         file or on the server command line. It only has effect during archive
+         recovery or in standby mode.
+        </para>
+       </listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+
+      <varlistentry id="guc-recovery-target-timeline" xreflabel="recovery_target_timeline">
+       <term><varname>recovery_target_timeline</varname> (<type>string</type>)</term>
+       <indexterm>
+        <primary><varname>recovery_target_timeline</> configuration parameter</primary>
+       </indexterm>
+       <listitem>
+        <para>
+         Specifies recovering into a particular timeline.  The default value is
+         an empty string, which will recover along the same timeline that was
+         current when the base backup was taken. Setting this to
+         <literal>latest</> recovers to the latest timeline found in the archive,
+         which is useful in a standby server. Other than that you only need to
+         set this parameter in complex re-recovery situations, where you need
+         to return to a state that itself was reached after a point-in-time
+         recovery. See <xref linkend="backup-timelines"> for discussion.
+        </para>
+        <para>
+         This parameter can only be set at server start. It only has effect
+         during archive recovery or in standby mode.
+        </para>
+       </listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+
+      <varlistentry id="guc-pause-at-recovery-target" xreflabel="pause_at_recovery_target">
+       <term><varname>pause_at_recovery_target</varname> (<type>boolean</type>)</term>
+       <indexterm>
+        <primary><varname>pause_at_recovery_target</> configuration parameter</primary>
+       </indexterm>
+       <listitem>
+        <para>
+         Specifies whether recovery should pause when the recovery target
+         is reached. The default is <literal>on</>.
+         This is intended to allow queries to be executed against the
+         database to check if this recovery target is the most desirable
+         point for recovery. The paused state can be resumed by using
+         <function>pg_xlog_replay_resume()</> (See
+         <xref linkend="functions-recovery-control-table">), which then
+         causes recovery to end. If this recovery target is not the
+         desired stopping point, then shutdown the server, change the
+         recovery target settings to a later target and restart to
+         continue recovery.
+        </para>
+        <para>
+         This parameter can only be set in the <filename>postgresql.conf</>
+         file or on the server command line. It only has effect during archive
+         recovery or in standby mode if recovery target is set.
+        </para>
+       </listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+     </variablelist>
+     </sect2>
+
    </sect1>
 
    <sect1 id="runtime-config-replication">
@@ -2380,6 +2652,93 @@ include 'filename'
 
     <variablelist>
 
+     <varlistentry id="guc-standby-mode" xreflabel="standby_mode">
+      <term><varname>standby_mode</varname> (<type>boolean</type>)</term>
+      <indexterm>
+       <primary><varname>standby_mode</> configuration parameter</primary>
+      </indexterm>
+      <listitem>
+       <para>
+        Specifies whether to start the <productname>PostgreSQL</> server as
+        a standby when recovery trigger file <filename>recovery.trigger</> exists.
+        The default value is <literal>off</>.
+        If this parameter is <literal>on</>, the server will not
+        stop recovery when the end of archived WAL is reached,
+        but will keep trying to continue recovery by fetching new WAL segments
+        using <varname>restore_command</> and/or by connecting to
+        the primary server as specified by the <varname>primary_conninfo</>
+        setting.
+       </para>
+       <para>
+        This parameter can only be set at server start. It only has effect
+        if recovery trigger file <filename>recovery.trigger</> exists.
+       </para>
+      </listitem>
+     </varlistentry>
+
+     <varlistentry id="guc-primary-conninfo" xreflabel="primary_conninfo">
+      <term><varname>primary_conninfo</varname> (<type>string</type>)</term>
+      <indexterm>
+        <primary><varname>primary_conninfo</> configuration parameter</primary>
+      </indexterm>
+      <listitem>
+       <para>
+        Specifies a connection string to be used for the standby server
+        to connect with the primary. This string is in the format
+        accepted by the libpq <function>PQconnectdb</function> function,
+        described in <xref linkend="libpq-connect">. If any option is
+        unspecified in this string, then the corresponding environment
+        variable (see <xref linkend="libpq-envars">) is checked. If the
+        environment variable is not set either, then defaults are used.
+        If this parameter is an empty string (the default), no attempt is
+        made to connect to the master.
+       </para>
+       <para>
+        The connection string should specify the host name (or address)
+        of the primary server, as well as the port number if it is not
+        the same as the standby server's default.
+        Also specify a user name corresponding to a role that has the
+        <literal>REPLICATION</> and <literal>LOGIN</> privileges on the
+        primary (see
+        <xref linkend="streaming-replication-authentication">).
+        A password needs to be provided too, if the primary demands password
+        authentication.  It can be provided in the
+        <varname>primary_conninfo</varname> string, or in a separate
+        <filename>~/.pgpass</> file on the standby server (use
+        <literal>replication</> as the database name).
+        Do not specify a database name in the
+        <varname>primary_conninfo</varname> string.
+       </para>
+       <para>
+        This parameter can only be set in the <filename>postgresql.conf</>
+        file or on the server command line. It only has effect in standby mode.
+       </para>
+       <para>
+        If this parameter is changed while replication is in progress,
+        the standby terminates replication, and then tries to restart
+        replication with new setting.
+       </para>
+      </listitem>
+     </varlistentry>
+
+     <varlistentry id="guc-trigger-file" xreflabel="trigger_file">
+      <term><varname>trigger_file</varname> (<type>string</type>)</term>
+      <indexterm>
+        <primary><varname>trigger_file</> configuration parameter</primary>
+      </indexterm>
+      <listitem>
+       <para>
+        Specifies a trigger file whose presence ends recovery in the
+        standby.  Even if this value is not set, you can still promote
+        the standby using <command>pg_ctl promote</>.
+       </para>
+       <para>
+        This parameter can only be set in the <filename>postgresql.conf</>
+        file or on the server command line. It only has effect in standby mode.
+       </para>
+      </listitem>
+    </varlistentry>
+
      <varlistentry id="guc-hot-standby" xreflabel="hot_standby">
       <term><varname>hot_standby</varname> (<type>boolean</type>)</term>
       <indexterm>
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/filelist.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/filelist.sgml
index 368f932..e701ca3 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/filelist.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/filelist.sgml
@@ -43,7 +43,6 @@
 <!ENTITY manage-ag     SYSTEM "manage-ag.sgml">
 <!ENTITY monitoring    SYSTEM "monitoring.sgml">
 <!ENTITY regress       SYSTEM "regress.sgml">
-<!ENTITY recovery-config SYSTEM "recovery-config.sgml">
 <!ENTITY runtime       SYSTEM "runtime.sgml">
 <!ENTITY config        SYSTEM "config.sgml">
 <!ENTITY user-manag    SYSTEM "user-manag.sgml">
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/func.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/func.sgml
index 35c7f75..48cfe9e 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/func.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/func.sgml
@@ -14670,7 +14670,7 @@ postgres=# select pg_start_backup('label_goes_here');
     <function>pg_create_restore_point</> creates a named transaction log
     record that can be used as recovery target, and returns the corresponding
     transaction log location.  The given name can then be used with
-    <xref linkend="recovery-target-name"> to specify the point up to which
+    <xref linkend="guc-recovery-target-name"> to specify the point up to which
     recovery will proceed.  Avoid creating multiple restore points with the
     same name, since recovery will stop at the first one whose name matches
     the recovery target.
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/high-availability.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/high-availability.sgml
index c8f6fa8..18be3a3 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/high-availability.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/high-availability.sgml
@@ -591,7 +591,7 @@ protocol to make nodes agree on a serializable transactional order.
    <para>
     In standby mode, the server continuously applies WAL received from the
     master server. The standby server can read WAL from a WAL archive
-    (see <xref linkend="restore-command">) or directly from the master
+    (see <xref linkend="guc-restore-command">) or directly from the master
     over a TCP connection (streaming replication). The standby server will
     also attempt to restore any WAL found in the standby cluster's
     <filename>pg_xlog</> directory. That typically happens after a server
@@ -658,8 +658,8 @@ protocol to make nodes agree on a serializable transactional order.
    <para>
     To set up the standby server, restore the base backup taken from primary
     server (see <xref linkend="backup-pitr-recovery">). Create a recovery
-    command file <filename>recovery.conf</> in the standby's cluster data
-    directory, and turn on <varname>standby_mode</>. Set
+    trigger file <filename>recovery.trigger</> in the standby's cluster data
+    directory. Turn on <varname>standby_mode</> and set
     <varname>restore_command</> to a simple command to copy files from
     the WAL archive. If you plan to have multiple standby servers for high
     availability purposes, set <varname>recovery_target_timeline</> to
@@ -695,7 +695,7 @@ protocol to make nodes agree on a serializable transactional order.
 
    <para>
     If you're using a WAL archive, its size can be minimized using the <xref
-    linkend="archive-cleanup-command"> parameter to remove files that are no
+    linkend="guc-archive-cleanup-command"> parameter to remove files that are no
     longer required by the standby server.
     The <application>pg_archivecleanup</> utility is designed specifically to
     be used with <varname>archive_cleanup_command</> in typical single-standby
@@ -706,7 +706,7 @@ protocol to make nodes agree on a serializable transactional order.
    </para>
 
    <para>
-    A simple example of a <filename>recovery.conf</> is:
+    A simple example of standby settings is:
 <programlisting>
 standby_mode = 'on'
 primary_conninfo = 'host=192.168.1.50 port=5432 user=foo password=foopass'
@@ -763,8 +763,8 @@ archive_cleanup_command = 'pg_archivecleanup /path/to/archive %r'
     To use streaming replication, set up a file-based log-shipping standby
     server as described in <xref linkend="warm-standby">. The step that
     turns a file-based log-shipping standby into streaming replication
-    standby is setting <varname>primary_conninfo</> setting in the
-    <filename>recovery.conf</> file to point to the primary server. Set
+    standby is setting <varname>primary_conninfo</> to
+    point to the primary server. Set
     <xref linkend="guc-listen-addresses"> and authentication options
     (see <filename>pg_hba.conf</>) on the primary so that the standby server
     can connect to the <literal>replication</> pseudo-database on the primary
@@ -824,15 +824,14 @@ host    replication     foo             192.168.1.100/32        md5
     </para>
     <para>
      The host name and port number of the primary, connection user name,
-     and password are specified in the <filename>recovery.conf</> file.
+     and password are specified in <varname>primary_conninfo</>.
      The password can also be set in the <filename>~/.pgpass</> file on the
      standby (specify <literal>replication</> in the <replaceable>database</>
      field).
      For example, if the primary is running on host IP <literal>192.168.1.50</>,
      port <literal>5432</literal>, the account name for replication is
      <literal>foo</>, and the password is <literal>foopass</>, the administrator
-     can add the following line to the <filename>recovery.conf</> file on the
-     standby:
+     can set <varname>primary_conninfo</> on the standby like this:
 
 <programlisting>
 # The standby connects to the primary that is running on host 192.168.1.50
@@ -1212,8 +1211,8 @@ primary_conninfo = 'host=192.168.1.50 port=5432 user=foo password=foopass'
    <para>
     To trigger failover of a log-shipping standby server,
     run <command>pg_ctl promote</> or create a trigger
-    file with the file name and path specified by the <varname>trigger_file</>
-    setting in <filename>recovery.conf</>. If you're planning to use
+    file with the file name and path specified by the <varname>trigger_file</>.
+    If you're planning to use
     <command>pg_ctl promote</> to fail over, <varname>trigger_file</> is
     not required. If you're setting up the reporting servers that are
     only used to offload read-only queries from the primary, not for high
@@ -1258,8 +1257,7 @@ primary_conninfo = 'host=192.168.1.50 port=5432 user=foo password=foopass'
     The magic that makes the two loosely coupled servers work together is
     simply a <varname>restore_command</> used on the standby that,
     when asked for the next WAL file, waits for it to become available from
-    the primary. The <varname>restore_command</> is specified in the
-    <filename>recovery.conf</> file on the standby server. Normal recovery
+    the primary. Normal recovery
     processing would request a file from the WAL archive, reporting failure
     if the file was unavailable.  For standby processing it is normal for
     the next WAL file to be unavailable, so the standby must wait for
@@ -1346,8 +1344,14 @@ if (!triggered)
      </listitem>
      <listitem>
       <para>
+       Create a recovery trigger file <filename>recovery.trigger</>
+       in the standby's cluster data directory.
+      </para>
+     </listitem>
+     <listitem>
+      <para>
        Begin recovery on the standby server from the local WAL
-       archive, using a <filename>recovery.conf</> that specifies a
+       archive, specifying a
        <varname>restore_command</> that waits as described
        previously (see <xref linkend="backup-pitr-recovery">).
       </para>
@@ -1838,9 +1842,9 @@ if (!triggered)
    <title>Administrator's Overview</title>
 
    <para>
-    If <varname>hot_standby</> is turned <literal>on</> in
-    <filename>postgresql.conf</> and there is a <filename>recovery.conf</>
-    file present, the server will run in Hot Standby mode.
+    If <varname>hot_standby</> is turned <literal>on</>
+    and there is a recovery trigger file
+    <filename>recovery.trigger</> present, the server will run in Hot Standby mode.
     However, it may take some time for Hot Standby connections to be allowed,
     because the server will not accept connections until it has completed
     sufficient recovery to provide a consistent state against which queries
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/pgarchivecleanup.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/pgarchivecleanup.sgml
index 932914b..2984da4 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/pgarchivecleanup.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/pgarchivecleanup.sgml
@@ -38,8 +38,8 @@
 
   <para>
    To configure a standby
-   server to use <application>pg_archivecleanup</>, put this into its
-   <filename>recovery.conf</filename> configuration file:
+   server to use <application>pg_archivecleanup</>, specify
+   <xref linkend="guc-archive-cleanup-command"> like this:
 <programlisting>
 archive_cleanup_command = 'pg_archivecleanup <replaceable>archivelocation</> %r'
 </programlisting>
@@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ archive_cleanup_command = 'pg_archivecleanup <replaceable>archivelocation</> %r'
    files should be removed.
   </para>
   <para>
-   When used within <xref linkend="archive-cleanup-command">, all WAL files
+   When used within <varname>archive_cleanup_command</>, all WAL files
    logically preceding the value of the <literal>%r</> argument will be removed
    from <replaceable>archivelocation</>. This minimizes the number of files
    that need to be retained, while preserving crash-restart capability.  Use of
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/pgstandby.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/pgstandby.sgml
index ca2b5c0..15097ca 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/pgstandby.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/pgstandby.sgml
@@ -46,8 +46,8 @@
 
   <para>
    To configure a standby
-   server to use <application>pg_standby</>, put this into its
-   <filename>recovery.conf</filename> configuration file:
+   server to use <application>pg_standby</>, specify
+   <xref linkend="guc-restore-command"> like this:
 <programlisting>
 restore_command = 'pg_standby <replaceable>archiveDir</> %f %p %r'
 </programlisting>
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/postgres.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/postgres.sgml
index 15e4ef6..26e8dc2 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/postgres.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/postgres.sgml
@@ -155,7 +155,6 @@
   &maintenance;
   &backup;
   &high-availability;
-  &recovery-config;
   &monitoring;
   &diskusage;
   &wal;
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/release-9.1.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/release-9.1.sgml
index 1143fdf..36546bb 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/release-9.1.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/release-9.1.sgml
@@ -3957,7 +3957,7 @@
       <listitem>
        <para>
         Add <filename>recovery.conf</> setting <link
-        linkend="pause-at-recovery-target"><varname>pause_at_recovery_target</></link>
+        linkend="guc-pause-at-recovery-target"><varname>pause_at_recovery_target</></link>
         to pause recovery at target (Simon Riggs)
        </para>
 
@@ -3977,7 +3977,7 @@
        <para>
         These named restore points can be specified as recovery
         targets using the new <filename>recovery.conf</> setting
-        <link linkend="recovery-target-name"><varname>recovery_target_name</></link>.
+        <link linkend="guc-recovery-target-name"><varname>recovery_target_name</></link>.
        </para>
       </listitem>
 
@@ -4009,8 +4009,7 @@
 
       <listitem>
        <para>
-        Allow <link
-        linkend="recovery-config"><filename>recovery.conf</></link>
+        Allow <filename>recovery.conf</>
         to use the same quoting behavior as <filename>postgresql.conf</>
         (Dimitri Fontaine)
        </para>
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/release.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/release.sgml
index 2515329..fb70d4e 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/release.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/release.sgml
@@ -5,8 +5,8 @@ Typical markup:
 
 &<>                             use & escapes
 PostgreSQL                      <productname>
-postgresql.conf, pg_hba.conf,
-        recovery.conf           <filename>
+postgresql.conf, pg_hba.conf
+        recovery.trigger           <filename>
 [A-Z][A-Z_ ]+[A-Z_]             <command>, <literal>, <envar>
 [A-Za-z_][A-Za-z0-9_]+()        <function>
 -[-A-Za-z_]+                    <option>
diff --git a/src/backend/Makefile b/src/backend/Makefile
index 323b417..06d5f59 100644
--- a/src/backend/Makefile
+++ b/src/backend/Makefile
@@ -223,7 +223,6 @@ endif
 	$(INSTALL_DATA) $(srcdir)/libpq/pg_hba.conf.sample '$(DESTDIR)$(datadir)/pg_hba.conf.sample'
 	$(INSTALL_DATA) $(srcdir)/libpq/pg_ident.conf.sample '$(DESTDIR)$(datadir)/pg_ident.conf.sample'
 	$(INSTALL_DATA) $(srcdir)/utils/misc/postgresql.conf.sample '$(DESTDIR)$(datadir)/postgresql.conf.sample'
-	$(INSTALL_DATA) $(srcdir)/access/transam/recovery.conf.sample '$(DESTDIR)$(datadir)/recovery.conf.sample'
 
 install-bin: postgres $(POSTGRES_IMP) installdirs
 	$(INSTALL_PROGRAM) postgres$(X) '$(DESTDIR)$(bindir)/postgres$(X)'
@@ -280,8 +279,7 @@ endif
 	$(MAKE) -C tsearch uninstall-data
 	rm -f '$(DESTDIR)$(datadir)/pg_hba.conf.sample' \
 	      '$(DESTDIR)$(datadir)/pg_ident.conf.sample' \
-              '$(DESTDIR)$(datadir)/postgresql.conf.sample' \
-	      '$(DESTDIR)$(datadir)/recovery.conf.sample'
+              '$(DESTDIR)$(datadir)/postgresql.conf.sample'
 
 
 ##########################################################################
diff --git a/src/backend/access/transam/recovery.conf.sample b/src/backend/access/transam/recovery.conf.sample
deleted file mode 100644
index 5acfa57..0000000
--- a/src/backend/access/transam/recovery.conf.sample
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,132 +0,0 @@
-# -------------------------------
-# PostgreSQL recovery config file
-# -------------------------------
-#
-# Edit this file to provide the parameters that PostgreSQL needs to
-# perform an archive recovery of a database, or to act as a replication
-# standby.
-#
-# If "recovery.conf" is present in the PostgreSQL data directory, it is
-# read on postmaster startup.  After successful recovery, it is renamed
-# to "recovery.done" to ensure that we do not accidentally re-enter
-# archive recovery or standby mode.
-#
-# This file consists of lines of the form:
-#
-#   name = value
-#
-# Comments are introduced with '#'.
-#
-# The complete list of option names and allowed values can be found
-# in the PostgreSQL documentation.
-#
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# ARCHIVE RECOVERY PARAMETERS
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-#
-# restore_command
-#
-# specifies the shell command that is executed to copy log files
-# back from archival storage.  The command string may contain %f,
-# which is replaced by the name of the desired log file, and %p,
-# which is replaced by the absolute path to copy the log file to.
-#
-# This parameter is *required* for an archive recovery, but optional
-# for streaming replication.
-#
-# It is important that the command return nonzero exit status on failure.
-# The command *will* be asked for log files that are not present in the
-# archive; it must return nonzero when so asked.
-#
-# NOTE that the basename of %p will be different from %f; do not
-# expect them to be interchangeable.
-#
-#restore_command = ''		# e.g. 'cp /mnt/server/archivedir/%f %p'
-#
-#
-# archive_cleanup_command
-#
-# specifies an optional shell command to execute at every restartpoint.
-# This can be useful for cleaning up the archive of a standby server.
-#
-#archive_cleanup_command = ''
-#
-# recovery_end_command
-#
-# specifies an optional shell command to execute at completion of recovery.
-# This can be useful for cleaning up after the restore_command.
-#
-#recovery_end_command = ''
-#
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# RECOVERY TARGET PARAMETERS
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-#
-# By default, recovery will rollforward to the end of the WAL log.
-# If you want to stop rollforward at a specific point, you
-# must set a recovery target.
-#
-# You may set a recovery target either by transactionId, by name,
-# or by timestamp. Recovery may either include or exclude the
-# transaction(s) with the recovery target value (ie, stop either
-# just after or just before the given target, respectively).
-#
-#
-#recovery_target_name = ''	# e.g. 'daily backup 2011-01-26'
-#
-#recovery_target_time = ''	# e.g. '2004-07-14 22:39:00 EST'
-#
-#recovery_target_xid = ''
-#
-#recovery_target_inclusive = true
-#
-#
-# If you want to recover into a timeline other than the "main line" shown in
-# pg_control, specify the timeline number here, or write 'latest' to get
-# the latest branch for which there's a history file.
-#
-#recovery_target_timeline = 'latest'
-#
-#
-# If pause_at_recovery_target is enabled, recovery will pause when
-# the recovery target is reached. The pause state will continue until
-# pg_xlog_replay_resume() is called. This setting has no effect if
-# hot standby is not enabled, or if no recovery target is set.
-#
-#pause_at_recovery_target = true
-#
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# STANDBY SERVER PARAMETERS
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-#
-# standby_mode
-#
-# When standby_mode is enabled, the PostgreSQL server will work as a
-# standby. It will continuously wait for the additional XLOG records, using
-# restore_command and/or primary_conninfo.
-#
-#standby_mode = off
-#
-# primary_conninfo
-#
-# If set, the PostgreSQL server will try to connect to the primary using this
-# connection string and receive XLOG records continuously.
-#
-#primary_conninfo = ''		# e.g. 'host=localhost port=5432'
-#
-#
-# By default, a standby server keeps restoring XLOG records from the
-# primary indefinitely. If you want to stop the standby mode, finish recovery
-# and open the system in read/write mode, specify path to a trigger file.
-# The server will poll the trigger file path periodically and start as a
-# primary server when it's found.
-#
-#trigger_file = ''
-#
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# HOT STANDBY PARAMETERS
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-#
-# Hot Standby related parameters are listed in postgresql.conf
-#
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
diff --git a/src/backend/access/transam/xlog.c b/src/backend/access/transam/xlog.c
index 9ad9227..9dd6227 100644
--- a/src/backend/access/transam/xlog.c
+++ b/src/backend/access/transam/xlog.c
@@ -63,7 +63,7 @@
 
 
 /* File path names (all relative to $PGDATA) */
-#define RECOVERY_COMMAND_FILE	"recovery.conf"
+#define RECOVERY_COMMAND_READY	"recovery.trigger"
 #define RECOVERY_COMMAND_DONE	"recovery.done"
 #define PROMOTE_SIGNAL_FILE "promote"
 
@@ -82,6 +82,20 @@ int			sync_method = DEFAULT_SYNC_METHOD;
 int			wal_level = WAL_LEVEL_MINIMAL;
 int			CommitDelay = 0;	/* precommit delay in microseconds */
 int			CommitSiblings = 5; /* # concurrent xacts needed to sleep */
+char	   *restore_command = NULL;
+char	   *archive_cleanup_command = NULL;
+char	   *recovery_end_command = NULL;
+bool		standby_mode = false;
+char	   *primary_conninfo = NULL;
+char	   *trigger_file = NULL;
+RecoveryTargetType	recovery_target = RECOVERY_TARGET_UNSET;
+TransactionId		recovery_target_xid = InvalidTransactionId;
+TimestampTz			recovery_target_time = 0;
+char	   *recovery_target_name = NULL;
+bool		recovery_target_inclusive = true;
+bool		pause_at_recovery_target = true;
+char	   *recovery_target_timeline_string = NULL;
+TimeLineID	recovery_target_timeline = 0;
 
 #ifdef WAL_DEBUG
 bool		XLOG_DEBUG = false;
@@ -194,23 +208,8 @@ bool InArchiveRecovery = false;
 /* Was the last xlog file restored from archive, or local? */
 static bool restoredFromArchive = false;
 
-/* options taken from recovery.conf for archive recovery */
-char *recoveryRestoreCommand = NULL;
-static char *recoveryEndCommand = NULL;
-static char *archiveCleanupCommand = NULL;
-static RecoveryTargetType recoveryTarget = RECOVERY_TARGET_UNSET;
-static bool recoveryTargetInclusive = true;
-static bool recoveryPauseAtTarget = true;
-static TransactionId recoveryTargetXid;
-static TimestampTz recoveryTargetTime;
-static char *recoveryTargetName;
-
-/* options taken from recovery.conf for XLOG streaming */
-bool StandbyMode = false;
-static char *PrimaryConnInfo = NULL;
-static char *TriggerFile = NULL;
-
 /* if recoveryStopsHere returns true, it saves actual stop xid/time/name here */
+static RecoveryTargetType recoveryStopTarget;
 static TransactionId recoveryStopXid;
 static TimestampTz recoveryStopTime;
 static char recoveryStopName[MAXFNAMELEN];
@@ -407,12 +406,6 @@ typedef struct XLogCtlData
 	TimeLineID	ThisTimeLineID;
 
 	/*
-	 * archiveCleanupCommand is read from recovery.conf but needs to be in
-	 * shared memory so that the checkpointer process can access it.
-	 */
-	char		archiveCleanupCommand[MAXPGPATH];
-
-	/*
 	 * SharedRecoveryInProgress indicates if we're still in crash or archive
 	 * recovery.  Protected by info_lck.
 	 */
@@ -601,7 +594,7 @@ static bool InRedo = false;
 static bool bgwriterLaunched = false;
 
 
-static void readRecoveryCommandFile(void);
+static void CheckRecoveryReadyFile(void);
 static void exitArchiveRecovery(TimeLineID endTLI, XLogSegNo endLogSegNo);
 static bool recoveryStopsHere(XLogRecord *record, bool *includeThis);
 static void recoveryPausesHere(void);
@@ -3222,7 +3215,7 @@ ReadRecord(XLogReaderState *xlogreader, XLogRecPtr RecPtr, int emode,
 			/*
 			 * We only end up here without a message when XLogPageRead() failed
 			 * - in that case we already logged something.
-			 * In StandbyMode that only happens if we have been triggered, so
+			 * In standby_mode that only happens if we have been triggered, so
 			 * we shouldn't loop anymore in that case.
 			 */
 			if (errormsg)
@@ -3257,7 +3250,7 @@ ReadRecord(XLogReaderState *xlogreader, XLogRecPtr RecPtr, int emode,
 			record = NULL;
 			continue;
 		}
-	} while (StandbyMode && record == NULL && !CheckForStandbyTrigger());
+	} while (standby_mode && record == NULL && !CheckForStandbyTrigger());
 
 	return record;
 }
@@ -3997,212 +3990,40 @@ str_time(pg_time_t tnow)
 }
 
 /*
- * See if there is a recovery command file (recovery.conf), and if so
- * read in parameters for archive recovery and XLOG streaming.
- *
- * The file is parsed using the main configuration parser.
+ * Check to see if there is a recovery trigger file (recovery.trigger).
+ * If so, validate recovery parameters and determine recovery target timeline.
  */
 static void
-readRecoveryCommandFile(void)
+CheckRecoveryReadyFile(void)
 {
-	FILE	   *fd;
-	TimeLineID	rtli = 0;
-	bool		rtliGiven = false;
-	ConfigVariable *item,
-			   *head = NULL,
-			   *tail = NULL;
-
-	fd = AllocateFile(RECOVERY_COMMAND_FILE, "r");
+	FILE *fd;
+
+	/* Check the presence of recovery trigger file */
+	fd = AllocateFile(RECOVERY_COMMAND_READY, "r");
 	if (fd == NULL)
 	{
 		if (errno == ENOENT)
-			return;				/* not there, so no archive recovery */
+			return;		/* not there, so no archive recovery */
 		ereport(FATAL,
 				(errcode_for_file_access(),
-				 errmsg("could not open recovery command file \"%s\": %m",
-						RECOVERY_COMMAND_FILE)));
+				 errmsg("could not open recovery file trigger \"%s\": %m",
+						RECOVERY_COMMAND_READY)));
 	}
 
-	/*
-	 * Since we're asking ParseConfigFp() to report errors as FATAL, there's
-	 * no need to check the return value.
-	 */
-	(void) ParseConfigFp(fd, RECOVERY_COMMAND_FILE, 0, FATAL, &head, &tail);
-
-	FreeFile(fd);
-
-	for (item = head; item; item = item->next)
+	/* Check for compulsory parameters */
+	if (standby_mode)
 	{
-		if (strcmp(item->name, "restore_command") == 0)
-		{
-			recoveryRestoreCommand = pstrdup(item->value);
-			ereport(DEBUG2,
-					(errmsg_internal("restore_command = '%s'",
-									 recoveryRestoreCommand)));
-		}
-		else if (strcmp(item->name, "recovery_end_command") == 0)
-		{
-			recoveryEndCommand = pstrdup(item->value);
-			ereport(DEBUG2,
-					(errmsg_internal("recovery_end_command = '%s'",
-									 recoveryEndCommand)));
-		}
-		else if (strcmp(item->name, "archive_cleanup_command") == 0)
-		{
-			archiveCleanupCommand = pstrdup(item->value);
-			ereport(DEBUG2,
-					(errmsg_internal("archive_cleanup_command = '%s'",
-									 archiveCleanupCommand)));
-		}
-		else if (strcmp(item->name, "pause_at_recovery_target") == 0)
-		{
-			if (!parse_bool(item->value, &recoveryPauseAtTarget))
-				ereport(ERROR,
-						(errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_PARAMETER_VALUE),
-						 errmsg("parameter \"%s\" requires a Boolean value", "pause_at_recovery_target")));
-			ereport(DEBUG2,
-					(errmsg_internal("pause_at_recovery_target = '%s'",
-									 item->value)));
-		}
-		else if (strcmp(item->name, "recovery_target_timeline") == 0)
-		{
-			rtliGiven = true;
-			if (strcmp(item->value, "latest") == 0)
-				rtli = 0;
-			else
-			{
-				errno = 0;
-				rtli = (TimeLineID) strtoul(item->value, NULL, 0);
-				if (errno == EINVAL || errno == ERANGE)
-					ereport(FATAL,
-							(errmsg("recovery_target_timeline is not a valid number: \"%s\"",
-									item->value)));
-			}
-			if (rtli)
-				ereport(DEBUG2,
-				   (errmsg_internal("recovery_target_timeline = %u", rtli)));
-			else
-				ereport(DEBUG2,
-					 (errmsg_internal("recovery_target_timeline = latest")));
-		}
-		else if (strcmp(item->name, "recovery_target_xid") == 0)
-		{
-			errno = 0;
-			recoveryTargetXid = (TransactionId) strtoul(item->value, NULL, 0);
-			if (errno == EINVAL || errno == ERANGE)
-				ereport(FATAL,
-				 (errmsg("recovery_target_xid is not a valid number: \"%s\"",
-						 item->value)));
-			ereport(DEBUG2,
-					(errmsg_internal("recovery_target_xid = %u",
-									 recoveryTargetXid)));
-			recoveryTarget = RECOVERY_TARGET_XID;
-		}
-		else if (strcmp(item->name, "recovery_target_time") == 0)
-		{
-			/*
-			 * if recovery_target_xid or recovery_target_name specified, then
-			 * this overrides recovery_target_time
-			 */
-			if (recoveryTarget == RECOVERY_TARGET_XID ||
-				recoveryTarget == RECOVERY_TARGET_NAME)
-				continue;
-			recoveryTarget = RECOVERY_TARGET_TIME;
-
-			/*
-			 * Convert the time string given by the user to TimestampTz form.
-			 */
-			recoveryTargetTime =
-				DatumGetTimestampTz(DirectFunctionCall3(timestamptz_in,
-												CStringGetDatum(item->value),
-												ObjectIdGetDatum(InvalidOid),
-														Int32GetDatum(-1)));
-			ereport(DEBUG2,
-					(errmsg_internal("recovery_target_time = '%s'",
-								   timestamptz_to_str(recoveryTargetTime))));
-		}
-		else if (strcmp(item->name, "recovery_target_name") == 0)
-		{
-			/*
-			 * if recovery_target_xid specified, then this overrides
-			 * recovery_target_name
-			 */
-			if (recoveryTarget == RECOVERY_TARGET_XID)
-				continue;
-			recoveryTarget = RECOVERY_TARGET_NAME;
-
-			recoveryTargetName = pstrdup(item->value);
-			if (strlen(recoveryTargetName) >= MAXFNAMELEN)
-				ereport(FATAL,
-						(errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_PARAMETER_VALUE),
-						 errmsg("recovery_target_name is too long (maximum %d characters)",
-								MAXFNAMELEN - 1)));
-
-			ereport(DEBUG2,
-					(errmsg_internal("recovery_target_name = '%s'",
-									 recoveryTargetName)));
-		}
-		else if (strcmp(item->name, "recovery_target_inclusive") == 0)
-		{
-			/*
-			 * does nothing if a recovery_target is not also set
-			 */
-			if (!parse_bool(item->value, &recoveryTargetInclusive))
-				ereport(ERROR,
-						(errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_PARAMETER_VALUE),
-						 errmsg("parameter \"%s\" requires a Boolean value",
-								"recovery_target_inclusive")));
-			ereport(DEBUG2,
-					(errmsg_internal("recovery_target_inclusive = %s",
-									 item->value)));
-		}
-		else if (strcmp(item->name, "standby_mode") == 0)
-		{
-			if (!parse_bool(item->value, &StandbyMode))
-				ereport(ERROR,
-						(errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_PARAMETER_VALUE),
-						 errmsg("parameter \"%s\" requires a Boolean value",
-								"standby_mode")));
-			ereport(DEBUG2,
-					(errmsg_internal("standby_mode = '%s'", item->value)));
-		}
-		else if (strcmp(item->name, "primary_conninfo") == 0)
-		{
-			PrimaryConnInfo = pstrdup(item->value);
-			ereport(DEBUG2,
-					(errmsg_internal("primary_conninfo = '%s'",
-									 PrimaryConnInfo)));
-		}
-		else if (strcmp(item->name, "trigger_file") == 0)
-		{
-			TriggerFile = pstrdup(item->value);
-			ereport(DEBUG2,
-					(errmsg_internal("trigger_file = '%s'",
-									 TriggerFile)));
-		}
-		else
-			ereport(FATAL,
-					(errmsg("unrecognized recovery parameter \"%s\"",
-							item->name)));
-	}
-
-	/*
-	 * Check for compulsory parameters
-	 */
-	if (StandbyMode)
-	{
-		if (PrimaryConnInfo == NULL && recoveryRestoreCommand == NULL)
+		if (!restore_command[0] && !primary_conninfo[0])
 			ereport(WARNING,
-					(errmsg("recovery command file \"%s\" specified neither primary_conninfo nor restore_command",
-							RECOVERY_COMMAND_FILE),
+					(errmsg("Neither primary_conninfo nor restore_command specified"),
 					 errhint("The database server will regularly poll the pg_xlog subdirectory to check for files placed there.")));
 	}
 	else
 	{
-		if (recoveryRestoreCommand == NULL)
+		if (!restore_command[0])
 			ereport(FATAL,
-					(errmsg("recovery command file \"%s\" must specify restore_command when standby mode is not enabled",
-							RECOVERY_COMMAND_FILE)));
+					(errmsg("restore_command must be specified when "
+							"standby_mode is not enabled")));
 	}
 
 	/* Enable fetching from archive recovery area */
@@ -4214,16 +4035,17 @@ readRecoveryCommandFile(void)
 	 * command and set InArchiveRecovery, because we need to fetch timeline
 	 * history files from the archive.
 	 */
-	if (rtliGiven)
+	if (strcmp(recovery_target_timeline_string, "") != 0)
 	{
-		if (rtli)
+		if (recovery_target_timeline)
 		{
 			/* Timeline 1 does not have a history file, all else should */
-			if (rtli != 1 && !existsTimeLineHistory(rtli))
+			if (recovery_target_timeline != 1 &&
+				!existsTimeLineHistory(recovery_target_timeline))
 				ereport(FATAL,
 						(errmsg("recovery target timeline %u does not exist",
-								rtli)));
-			recoveryTargetTLI = rtli;
+								recovery_target_timeline)));
+			recoveryTargetTLI = recovery_target_timeline;
 			recoveryTargetIsLatest = false;
 		}
 		else
@@ -4233,8 +4055,6 @@ readRecoveryCommandFile(void)
 			recoveryTargetIsLatest = true;
 		}
 	}
-
-	FreeConfigVariables(head);
 }
 
 /*
@@ -4309,11 +4129,11 @@ exitArchiveRecovery(TimeLineID endTLI, XLogSegNo endLogSegNo)
 	 * re-enter archive recovery mode in a subsequent crash.
 	 */
 	unlink(RECOVERY_COMMAND_DONE);
-	if (rename(RECOVERY_COMMAND_FILE, RECOVERY_COMMAND_DONE) != 0)
+	if (rename(RECOVERY_COMMAND_READY, RECOVERY_COMMAND_DONE) != 0)
 		ereport(FATAL,
 				(errcode_for_file_access(),
 				 errmsg("could not rename file \"%s\" to \"%s\": %m",
-						RECOVERY_COMMAND_FILE, RECOVERY_COMMAND_DONE)));
+						RECOVERY_COMMAND_READY, RECOVERY_COMMAND_DONE)));
 
 	ereport(LOG,
 			(errmsg("archive recovery complete")));
@@ -4376,7 +4196,7 @@ recoveryStopsHere(XLogRecord *record, bool *includeThis)
 		return false;
 
 	/* Do we have a PITR target at all? */
-	if (recoveryTarget == RECOVERY_TARGET_UNSET)
+	if (recovery_target == RECOVERY_TARGET_UNSET)
 	{
 		/*
 		 * Save timestamp of latest transaction commit/abort if this is a
@@ -4387,7 +4207,7 @@ recoveryStopsHere(XLogRecord *record, bool *includeThis)
 		return false;
 	}
 
-	if (recoveryTarget == RECOVERY_TARGET_XID)
+	if (recovery_target == RECOVERY_TARGET_XID)
 	{
 		/*
 		 * There can be only one transaction end record with this exact
@@ -4398,17 +4218,17 @@ recoveryStopsHere(XLogRecord *record, bool *includeThis)
 		 * they complete. A higher numbered xid will complete before you about
 		 * 50% of the time...
 		 */
-		stopsHere = (record->xl_xid == recoveryTargetXid);
+		stopsHere = (record->xl_xid == recovery_target_xid);
 		if (stopsHere)
-			*includeThis = recoveryTargetInclusive;
+			*includeThis = recovery_target_inclusive;
 	}
-	else if (recoveryTarget == RECOVERY_TARGET_NAME)
+	else if (recovery_target == RECOVERY_TARGET_NAME)
 	{
 		/*
 		 * There can be many restore points that share the same name, so we
 		 * stop at the first one
 		 */
-		stopsHere = (strcmp(recordRPName, recoveryTargetName) == 0);
+		stopsHere = (strcmp(recordRPName, recovery_target_name) == 0);
 
 		/*
 		 * Ignore recoveryTargetInclusive because this is not a transaction
@@ -4423,16 +4243,17 @@ recoveryStopsHere(XLogRecord *record, bool *includeThis)
 		 * we stop after the last one, if we are inclusive, or stop at the
 		 * first one if we are exclusive
 		 */
-		if (recoveryTargetInclusive)
-			stopsHere = (recordXtime > recoveryTargetTime);
+		if (recovery_target_inclusive)
+			stopsHere = (recordXtime > recovery_target_time);
 		else
-			stopsHere = (recordXtime >= recoveryTargetTime);
+			stopsHere = (recordXtime >= recovery_target_time);
 		if (stopsHere)
 			*includeThis = false;
 	}
 
 	if (stopsHere)
 	{
+		recoveryStopTarget = recovery_target;
 		recoveryStopXid = record->xl_xid;
 		recoveryStopTime = recordXtime;
 		recoveryStopAfter = *includeThis;
@@ -4780,36 +4601,28 @@ StartupXLOG(void)
 	recoveryTargetTLI = ControlFile->checkPointCopy.ThisTimeLineID;
 
 	/*
-	 * Check for recovery control file, and if so set up state for offline
-	 * recovery
-	 */
-	readRecoveryCommandFile();
-
-	/*
-	 * Save archive_cleanup_command in shared memory so that other processes
-	 * can see it.
+	 * Check for recovery trigger file, and if so set up state for offline
+	 * recovery.
 	 */
-	strncpy(XLogCtl->archiveCleanupCommand,
-			archiveCleanupCommand ? archiveCleanupCommand : "",
-			sizeof(XLogCtl->archiveCleanupCommand));
+	CheckRecoveryReadyFile();
 
 	if (InArchiveRecovery)
 	{
-		if (StandbyMode)
+		if (standby_mode)
 			ereport(LOG,
 					(errmsg("entering standby mode")));
-		else if (recoveryTarget == RECOVERY_TARGET_XID)
+		else if (recovery_target == RECOVERY_TARGET_XID)
 			ereport(LOG,
 					(errmsg("starting point-in-time recovery to XID %u",
-							recoveryTargetXid)));
-		else if (recoveryTarget == RECOVERY_TARGET_TIME)
+							recovery_target_xid)));
+		else if (recovery_target == RECOVERY_TARGET_TIME)
 			ereport(LOG,
 					(errmsg("starting point-in-time recovery to %s",
-							timestamptz_to_str(recoveryTargetTime))));
-		else if (recoveryTarget == RECOVERY_TARGET_NAME)
+							timestamptz_to_str(recovery_target_time))));
+		else if (recovery_target == RECOVERY_TARGET_NAME)
 			ereport(LOG,
 					(errmsg("starting point-in-time recovery to \"%s\"",
-							recoveryTargetName)));
+							recovery_target_name)));
 		else
 			ereport(LOG,
 					(errmsg("starting archive recovery")));
@@ -4819,7 +4632,7 @@ StartupXLOG(void)
 	 * Take ownership of the wakeup latch if we're going to sleep during
 	 * recovery.
 	 */
-	if (StandbyMode)
+	if (standby_mode)
 		OwnLatch(&XLogCtl->recoveryWakeupLatch);
 
 	/* Set up XLOG reader facility */
@@ -4888,7 +4701,7 @@ StartupXLOG(void)
 					(errmsg("checkpoint record is at %X/%X",
 							(uint32) (checkPointLoc >> 32), (uint32) checkPointLoc)));
 		}
-		else if (StandbyMode)
+		else if (standby_mode)
 		{
 			/*
 			 * The last valid checkpoint record required for a streaming
@@ -5003,7 +4816,7 @@ StartupXLOG(void)
 
 	/*
 	 * Check whether we need to force recovery from WAL.  If it appears to
-	 * have been a clean shutdown and we did not have a recovery.conf file,
+	 * have been a clean shutdown and we did not have a recovery.trigger file,
 	 * then assume no recovery needed.
 	 */
 	if (checkPoint.redo < RecPtr)
@@ -5017,7 +4830,7 @@ StartupXLOG(void)
 		InRecovery = true;
 	else if (InArchiveRecovery)
 	{
-		/* force recovery due to presence of recovery.conf */
+		/* force recovery due to presence of recovery.trigger */
 		InRecovery = true;
 	}
 
@@ -5330,7 +5143,7 @@ StartupXLOG(void)
 				 */
 				if (recoveryStopsHere(record, &recoveryApply))
 				{
-					if (recoveryPauseAtTarget)
+					if (pause_at_recovery_target)
 					{
 						SetRecoveryPause(true);
 						recoveryPausesHere();
@@ -5480,7 +5293,7 @@ StartupXLOG(void)
 	 * We don't need the latch anymore. It's not strictly necessary to disown
 	 * it, but let's do it for the sake of tidiness.
 	 */
-	if (StandbyMode)
+	if (standby_mode)
 		DisownLatch(&XLogCtl->recoveryWakeupLatch);
 
 	/*
@@ -5488,7 +5301,7 @@ StartupXLOG(void)
 	 * recovery to force fetching the files (which would be required at end of
 	 * recovery, e.g., timeline history file) from archive or pg_xlog.
 	 */
-	StandbyMode = false;
+	SetConfigOption("standby_mode", "false", PGC_POSTMASTER, PGC_S_OVERRIDE);
 
 	/*
 	 * Re-fetch the last valid or last applied record, so we can identify the
@@ -5567,17 +5380,17 @@ StartupXLOG(void)
 		 * Create a comment for the history file to explain why and where
 		 * timeline changed.
 		 */
-		if (recoveryTarget == RECOVERY_TARGET_XID)
+		if (recovery_target == RECOVERY_TARGET_XID)
 			snprintf(reason, sizeof(reason),
 					 "%s transaction %u",
 					 recoveryStopAfter ? "after" : "before",
 					 recoveryStopXid);
-		else if (recoveryTarget == RECOVERY_TARGET_TIME)
+		else if (recovery_target == RECOVERY_TARGET_TIME)
 			snprintf(reason, sizeof(reason),
 					 "%s %s\n",
 					 recoveryStopAfter ? "after" : "before",
 					 timestamptz_to_str(recoveryStopTime));
-		else if (recoveryTarget == RECOVERY_TARGET_NAME)
+		else if (recovery_target == RECOVERY_TARGET_NAME)
 			snprintf(reason, sizeof(reason),
 					 "at restore point \"%s\"",
 					 recoveryStopName);
@@ -5711,8 +5524,8 @@ StartupXLOG(void)
 		/*
 		 * And finally, execute the recovery_end_command, if any.
 		 */
-		if (recoveryEndCommand)
-			ExecuteRecoveryCommand(recoveryEndCommand,
+		if (recovery_end_command[0])
+			ExecuteRecoveryCommand(recovery_end_command,
 								   "recovery_end_command",
 								   true);
 	}
@@ -6565,7 +6378,7 @@ CreateCheckPoint(int flags)
 		XLogRecPtr	curInsert;
 
 		INSERT_RECPTR(curInsert, Insert, Insert->curridx);
-		if (curInsert == ControlFile->checkPoint + 
+		if (curInsert == ControlFile->checkPoint +
 			MAXALIGN(SizeOfXLogRecord + sizeof(CheckPoint)) &&
 			ControlFile->checkPoint == ControlFile->checkPointCopy.redo)
 		{
@@ -7140,8 +6953,8 @@ CreateRestartPoint(int flags)
 	/*
 	 * Finally, execute archive_cleanup_command, if any.
 	 */
-	if (XLogCtl->archiveCleanupCommand[0])
-		ExecuteRecoveryCommand(XLogCtl->archiveCleanupCommand,
+	if (archive_cleanup_command[0])
+		ExecuteRecoveryCommand(archive_cleanup_command,
 							   "archive_cleanup_command",
 							   false);
 
@@ -8854,7 +8667,7 @@ XLogPageRead(XLogReaderState *xlogreader, XLogRecPtr targetPagePtr, int reqLen,
 		 * Request a restartpoint if we've replayed too much xlog since the
 		 * last one.
 		 */
-		if (StandbyMode && bgwriterLaunched)
+		if (standby_mode && bgwriterLaunched)
 		{
 			if (XLogCheckpointNeeded(readSegNo))
 			{
@@ -8877,7 +8690,7 @@ retry:
 		(readSource == XLOG_FROM_STREAM &&
 		 receivedUpto < targetPagePtr + reqLen))
 	{
-		if (StandbyMode)
+		if (standby_mode)
 		{
 			if (!WaitForWALToBecomeAvailable(targetPagePtr + reqLen,
 											 private->randAccess,
@@ -8966,7 +8779,7 @@ next_record_is_invalid:
 	readSource = 0;
 
 	/* In standby-mode, keep trying */
-	if (StandbyMode)
+	if (standby_mode)
 		goto retry;
 	else
 		return -1;
@@ -9073,7 +8886,7 @@ WaitForWALToBecomeAvailable(XLogRecPtr RecPtr, bool randAccess,
 					 * that when we later jump backwards to start redo at
 					 * RedoStartLSN, we will have the logs streamed already.
 					 */
-					if (PrimaryConnInfo)
+					if (primary_conninfo[0])
 					{
 						XLogRecPtr ptr;
 						TimeLineID tli;
@@ -9094,7 +8907,7 @@ WaitForWALToBecomeAvailable(XLogRecPtr RecPtr, bool randAccess,
 									 tli, curFileTLI);
 						}
 						curFileTLI = tli;
-						RequestXLogStreaming(curFileTLI, ptr, PrimaryConnInfo);
+						RequestXLogStreaming(curFileTLI, ptr);
 					}
 					/*
 					 * Move to XLOG_FROM_STREAM state in either case. We'll get
@@ -9380,14 +9193,14 @@ CheckForStandbyTrigger(void)
 		return true;
 	}
 
-	if (TriggerFile == NULL)
+	if (!trigger_file[0])
 		return false;
 
-	if (stat(TriggerFile, &stat_buf) == 0)
+	if (stat(trigger_file, &stat_buf) == 0)
 	{
 		ereport(LOG,
-				(errmsg("trigger file found: %s", TriggerFile)));
-		unlink(TriggerFile);
+				(errmsg("trigger file found: %s", trigger_file)));
+		unlink(trigger_file);
 		triggered = true;
 		return true;
 	}
diff --git a/src/backend/access/transam/xlogarchive.c b/src/backend/access/transam/xlogarchive.c
index 52922da..20275c8 100644
--- a/src/backend/access/transam/xlogarchive.c
+++ b/src/backend/access/transam/xlogarchive.c
@@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ RestoreArchivedFile(char *path, const char *xlogfname,
 	TimeLineID	restartTli;
 
 	/* In standby mode, restore_command might not be supplied */
-	if (recoveryRestoreCommand == NULL)
+	if (restore_command == NULL)
 		goto not_available;
 
 	/*
@@ -150,7 +150,7 @@ RestoreArchivedFile(char *path, const char *xlogfname,
 	endp = xlogRestoreCmd + MAXPGPATH - 1;
 	*endp = '\0';
 
-	for (sp = recoveryRestoreCommand; *sp; sp++)
+	for (sp = restore_command; *sp; sp++)
 	{
 		if (*sp == '%')
 		{
@@ -236,7 +236,7 @@ RestoreArchivedFile(char *path, const char *xlogfname,
 				 * incorrectly conclude we've reached the end of WAL and we're
 				 * done recovering ...
 				 */
-				if (StandbyMode && stat_buf.st_size < expectedSize)
+				if (standby_mode && stat_buf.st_size < expectedSize)
 					elevel = DEBUG1;
 				else
 					elevel = FATAL;
diff --git a/src/backend/commands/extension.c b/src/backend/commands/extension.c
index c02101f..9babd74 100644
--- a/src/backend/commands/extension.c
+++ b/src/backend/commands/extension.c
@@ -9,7 +9,7 @@
  * dependent objects can be associated with it.  An extension is created by
  * populating the pg_extension catalog from a "control" file.
  * The extension control file is parsed with the same parser we use for
- * postgresql.conf and recovery.conf.  An extension also has an installation
+ * postgresql.conf.  An extension also has an installation
  * script file, containing SQL commands to create the extension's objects.
  *
  * Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2013, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
diff --git a/src/backend/replication/walreceiver.c b/src/backend/replication/walreceiver.c
index 7359297..325f6de 100644
--- a/src/backend/replication/walreceiver.c
+++ b/src/backend/replication/walreceiver.c
@@ -185,7 +185,6 @@ DisableWalRcvImmediateExit(void)
 void
 WalReceiverMain(void)
 {
-	char		conninfo[MAXCONNINFO];
 	XLogRecPtr	startpoint;
 	TimeLineID	startpointTLI;
 	TimeLineID	primaryTLI;
@@ -239,7 +238,6 @@ WalReceiverMain(void)
 	walrcv->walRcvState = WALRCV_STREAMING;
 
 	/* Fetch information required to start streaming */
-	strlcpy(conninfo, (char *) walrcv->conninfo, MAXCONNINFO);
 	startpoint = walrcv->receiveStart;
 	startpointTLI = walrcv->receiveStartTLI;
 
@@ -306,7 +304,7 @@ WalReceiverMain(void)
 
 	/* Establish the connection to the primary for XLOG streaming */
 	EnableWalRcvImmediateExit();
-	walrcv_connect(conninfo);
+	walrcv_connect(primary_conninfo);
 	DisableWalRcvImmediateExit();
 
 	first_stream = true;
@@ -404,8 +402,21 @@ WalReceiverMain(void)
 
 				if (got_SIGHUP)
 				{
+					char    *conninfo = pstrdup(primary_conninfo);
+
 					got_SIGHUP = false;
 					ProcessConfigFile(PGC_SIGHUP);
+
+					/*
+					 * If primary_conninfo has been changed while walreceiver is running,
+					 * shut down walreceiver so that new walreceiver is started and
+					 * it initiates replication with new primary_conninfo.
+					 */
+					if (strcmp(conninfo, primary_conninfo) != 0)
+						ereport(FATAL,
+								(errcode(ERRCODE_ADMIN_SHUTDOWN),
+								 errmsg("terminating walreceiver process because primary_conninfo was changed")));
+					pfree(conninfo);
 				}
 
 				/* Wait a while for data to arrive */
diff --git a/src/backend/replication/walreceiverfuncs.c b/src/backend/replication/walreceiverfuncs.c
index d414808..d6a5e06 100644
--- a/src/backend/replication/walreceiverfuncs.c
+++ b/src/backend/replication/walreceiverfuncs.c
@@ -219,11 +219,10 @@ ShutdownWalRcv(void)
 /*
  * Request postmaster to start walreceiver.
  *
- * recptr indicates the position where streaming should begin, and conninfo
- * is a libpq connection string to use.
+ * recptr indicates the position where streaming should begin.
  */
 void
-RequestXLogStreaming(TimeLineID tli, XLogRecPtr recptr, const char *conninfo)
+RequestXLogStreaming(TimeLineID tli, XLogRecPtr recptr)
 {
 	/* use volatile pointer to prevent code rearrangement */
 	volatile WalRcvData *walrcv = WalRcv;
@@ -245,11 +244,6 @@ RequestXLogStreaming(TimeLineID tli, XLogRecPtr recptr, const char *conninfo)
 	Assert(walrcv->walRcvState == WALRCV_STOPPED ||
 		   walrcv->walRcvState == WALRCV_WAITING);
 
-	if (conninfo != NULL)
-		strlcpy((char *) walrcv->conninfo, conninfo, MAXCONNINFO);
-	else
-		walrcv->conninfo[0] = '\0';
-
 	if (walrcv->walRcvState == WALRCV_STOPPED)
 	{
 		launch = true;
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/misc/guc.c b/src/backend/utils/misc/guc.c
index 6128694..f49b8fe 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/misc/guc.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/misc/guc.c
@@ -30,6 +30,7 @@
 #include "access/transam.h"
 #include "access/twophase.h"
 #include "access/xact.h"
+#include "access/xlog_internal.h"
 #include "catalog/namespace.h"
 #include "commands/async.h"
 #include "commands/prepare.h"
@@ -196,6 +197,14 @@ static bool check_application_name(char **newval, void **extra, GucSource source
 static void assign_application_name(const char *newval, void *extra);
 static const char *show_unix_socket_permissions(void);
 static const char *show_log_file_mode(void);
+static bool check_recovery_target_xid(char **newval, void **extra, GucSource source);
+static void assign_recovery_target_xid(const char *newval, void *extra);
+static bool check_recovery_target_name(char **newval, void **extra, GucSource source);
+static void assign_recovery_target_name(const char *newval, void *extra);
+static bool check_recovery_target_time(char **newval, void **extra, GucSource source);
+static void assign_recovery_target_time(const char *newval, void *extra);
+static bool check_recovery_target_timeline(char **newval, void **extra, GucSource source);
+static void assign_recovery_target_timeline(const char *newval, void *extra);
 
 static char *config_enum_get_options(struct config_enum * record,
 						const char *prefix, const char *suffix,
@@ -468,6 +477,8 @@ static int	wal_block_size;
 static int	wal_segment_size;
 static bool integer_datetimes;
 static int	effective_io_concurrency;
+static char *recovery_target_xid_string;
+static char *recovery_target_time_string;
 
 /* should be static, but commands/variable.c needs to get at this */
 char	   *role_string;
@@ -547,6 +558,10 @@ const char *const config_group_names[] =
 	gettext_noop("Write-Ahead Log / Checkpoints"),
 	/* WAL_ARCHIVING */
 	gettext_noop("Write-Ahead Log / Archiving"),
+	/* WAL_ARCHIVE_RECOVERY */
+	gettext_noop("Write-Ahead Log / Archive Recovery"),
+	/* WAL_RECOVERY_TARGET */
+	gettext_noop("Write-Ahead Log / Recovery Target"),
 	/* REPLICATION */
 	gettext_noop("Replication"),
 	/* REPLICATION_SENDING */
@@ -1375,6 +1390,36 @@ static struct config_bool ConfigureNamesBool[] =
 	},
 
 	{
+		{"recovery_target_inclusive", PGC_SIGHUP, WAL_RECOVERY_TARGET,
+			gettext_noop("Sets whether to include or exclude transaction with recovery target."),
+			NULL
+		},
+		&recovery_target_inclusive,
+		true,
+		NULL, NULL, NULL
+	},
+
+	{
+		{"pause_at_recovery_target", PGC_SIGHUP, WAL_RECOVERY_TARGET,
+			gettext_noop("Sets whether recovery should pause when the recovery target is reached."),
+			NULL
+		},
+		&pause_at_recovery_target,
+		true,
+		NULL, NULL, NULL
+	},
+
+	{
+		{"standby_mode", PGC_POSTMASTER, REPLICATION_STANDBY,
+			gettext_noop("Sets whether to start the server as a standby."),
+			NULL
+		},
+		&standby_mode,
+		false,
+		NULL, NULL, NULL
+	},
+
+	{
 		{"hot_standby", PGC_POSTMASTER, REPLICATION_STANDBY,
 			gettext_noop("Allows connections and queries during recovery."),
 			NULL
@@ -2543,6 +2588,97 @@ static struct config_string ConfigureNamesString[] =
 	},
 
 	{
+		{"restore_command", PGC_SIGHUP, WAL_ARCHIVE_RECOVERY,
+			gettext_noop("Sets the shell command that will retrieve an archived WAL file."),
+			NULL
+		},
+		&restore_command,
+		"",
+		NULL, NULL, NULL
+	},
+
+	{
+		{"archive_cleanup_command", PGC_SIGHUP, WAL_ARCHIVE_RECOVERY,
+			gettext_noop("Sets the shell command that will be executed at every restartpoint."),
+			NULL
+		},
+		&archive_cleanup_command,
+		"",
+		NULL, NULL, NULL
+	},
+
+	{
+		{"recovery_end_command", PGC_SIGHUP, WAL_ARCHIVE_RECOVERY,
+			gettext_noop("Sets the shell command that will be executed once only at the end of recovery."),
+			NULL
+		},
+		&recovery_end_command,
+		"",
+		NULL, NULL, NULL
+	},
+
+	{
+		{"recovery_target_xid", PGC_SIGHUP, WAL_RECOVERY_TARGET,
+			gettext_noop("Sets the transaction ID up to which recovery will proceed."),
+			NULL
+		},
+		&recovery_target_xid_string,
+		"",
+		check_recovery_target_xid, assign_recovery_target_xid, NULL
+	},
+
+	{
+		{"recovery_target_name", PGC_SIGHUP, WAL_RECOVERY_TARGET,
+			gettext_noop("Sets the named restore point."),
+			NULL
+		},
+		&recovery_target_name,
+		"",
+		check_recovery_target_name, assign_recovery_target_name, NULL
+	},
+
+	{
+		{"recovery_target_time", PGC_SIGHUP, WAL_RECOVERY_TARGET,
+			gettext_noop("Sets the time stamp up to which recovery will proceed."),
+			NULL
+		},
+		&recovery_target_time_string,
+		"",
+		check_recovery_target_time, assign_recovery_target_time, NULL
+	},
+
+	{
+		{"recovery_target_timeline", PGC_POSTMASTER, WAL_RECOVERY_TARGET,
+			gettext_noop("Sets recoverying into a particular timeline."),
+			NULL
+		},
+		&recovery_target_timeline_string,
+		"",
+		check_recovery_target_timeline, assign_recovery_target_timeline, NULL
+	},
+
+	{
+		{"primary_conninfo", PGC_SIGHUP, REPLICATION_STANDBY,
+			gettext_noop("Sets the connection string to be used to connect with the primary."),
+			NULL,
+			GUC_SUPERUSER_ONLY
+		},
+		&primary_conninfo,
+		"",
+		NULL, NULL, NULL
+	},
+
+	{
+		{"trigger_file", PGC_SIGHUP, REPLICATION_STANDBY,
+			gettext_noop("Sets the trigger file whose presence ends recovery in the standby."),
+			NULL
+		},
+		&trigger_file,
+		"",
+		NULL, NULL, NULL
+	},
+
+	{
 		{"client_encoding", PGC_USERSET, CLIENT_CONN_LOCALE,
 			gettext_noop("Sets the client's character set encoding."),
 			NULL,
@@ -8760,4 +8896,158 @@ show_log_file_mode(void)
 	return buf;
 }
 
+static bool
+check_recovery_target_xid(char **newval, void **extra, GucSource source)
+{
+	TransactionId   xid;
+	TransactionId   *myextra;
+
+	if (strcmp(*newval, "") == 0)
+		xid = InvalidTransactionId;
+	else
+	{
+		errno = 0;
+		xid = (TransactionId) strtoul(*newval, NULL, 0);
+		if (errno == EINVAL || errno == ERANGE)
+		{
+			GUC_check_errdetail("recovery_target_xid is not a valid number: \"%s\"",
+								*newval);
+			return false;
+		}
+	}
+
+	myextra = (TransactionId *) guc_malloc(ERROR, sizeof(TransactionId));
+	*myextra = xid;
+	*extra = (void *) myextra;
+
+	return true;
+}
+
+static void
+assign_recovery_target_xid(const char *newval, void *extra)
+{
+	recovery_target_xid = *((TransactionId *) extra);
+
+	if (recovery_target_xid != InvalidTransactionId)
+		recovery_target = RECOVERY_TARGET_XID;
+	else if (recovery_target_name[0])
+		recovery_target = RECOVERY_TARGET_NAME;
+	else if (recovery_target_time != 0)
+		recovery_target = RECOVERY_TARGET_TIME;
+	else
+		recovery_target = RECOVERY_TARGET_UNSET;
+}
+
+static bool
+check_recovery_target_name(char **newval, void **extra, GucSource source)
+{
+	if (strlen(*newval) >= MAXFNAMELEN)
+	{
+		GUC_check_errdetail("\"recovery_target_name\" is too long (maximum %d characters)",
+							MAXFNAMELEN - 1);
+		return false;
+	}
+	return true;
+}
+
+static void
+assign_recovery_target_name(const char *newval, void *extra)
+{
+	if (recovery_target_xid != InvalidTransactionId)
+		recovery_target = RECOVERY_TARGET_XID;
+	else if (newval[0])
+		recovery_target = RECOVERY_TARGET_NAME;
+	else if (recovery_target_time != 0)
+		recovery_target = RECOVERY_TARGET_TIME;
+	else
+		recovery_target = RECOVERY_TARGET_UNSET;
+}
+
+static bool
+check_recovery_target_time(char **newval, void **extra, GucSource source)
+{
+	TimestampTz     time;
+	TimestampTz     *myextra;
+	MemoryContext oldcontext = CurrentMemoryContext;
+
+	PG_TRY();
+	{
+		time = (strcmp(*newval, "") == 0) ?
+			0 :
+			DatumGetTimestampTz(DirectFunctionCall3(timestamptz_in,
+													CStringGetDatum(*newval),
+													ObjectIdGetDatum(InvalidOid),
+													Int32GetDatum(-1)));
+	}
+	PG_CATCH();
+	{
+		ErrorData  *edata;
+
+		/* Save error info */
+		MemoryContextSwitchTo(oldcontext);
+		edata = CopyErrorData();
+		FlushErrorState();
+
+		/* Pass the error message */
+		GUC_check_errdetail("%s", edata->message);
+		FreeErrorData(edata);
+		return false;
+	}
+	PG_END_TRY();
+
+	myextra = (TimestampTz *) guc_malloc(ERROR, sizeof(TimestampTz));
+	*myextra = time;
+	*extra = (void *) myextra;
+
+	return true;
+}
+
+static void
+assign_recovery_target_time(const char *newval, void *extra)
+{
+	recovery_target_time = *((TimestampTz *) extra);
+
+	if (recovery_target_xid != InvalidTransactionId)
+		recovery_target = RECOVERY_TARGET_XID;
+	else if (recovery_target_name[0])
+		recovery_target = RECOVERY_TARGET_NAME;
+	else if (recovery_target_time != 0)
+		recovery_target = RECOVERY_TARGET_TIME;
+	else
+		recovery_target = RECOVERY_TARGET_UNSET;
+}
+
+static bool
+check_recovery_target_timeline(char **newval, void **extra, GucSource source)
+{
+	TimeLineID	tli = 0;
+	TimeLineID	*myextra;
+
+	if (strcmp(*newval, "") == 0 || strcmp(*newval, "latest") == 0)
+		tli = 0;
+	else
+	{
+		errno = 0;
+		tli = (TimeLineID) strtoul(*newval, NULL, 0);
+		if (errno == EINVAL || errno == ERANGE)
+		{
+			GUC_check_errdetail("recovery_target_timeline is not a valid number: \"%s\"",
+								*newval);
+			return false;
+		}
+	}
+
+	myextra = (TimeLineID *) guc_malloc(ERROR, sizeof(TimeLineID));
+	*myextra = tli;
+	*extra = (void *) myextra;
+
+	return true;
+}
+
+static void
+assign_recovery_target_timeline(const char *newval, void *extra)
+{
+	recovery_target_timeline = *((TimeLineID *) extra);
+}
+
 #include "guc-file.c"
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/misc/postgresql.conf.sample b/src/backend/utils/misc/postgresql.conf.sample
index 62aea2f..52a4e71 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/misc/postgresql.conf.sample
+++ b/src/backend/utils/misc/postgresql.conf.sample
@@ -198,6 +198,23 @@
 #archive_timeout = 0		# force a logfile segment switch after this
 				# number of seconds; 0 disables
 
+# - Archive Recovery -
+#restore_command = ''		# command to use to restore an archived logfile segment
+				# placeholders: %p = path of file to restore
+				#               %f = file name only
+				# e.g. 'cp /mnt/server/archivedir/%f %p'
+#archive_cleanup_command = ''	# command to execute at every restartpoint
+#recovery_end_command = ''	# command to execute at completion of recovery
+
+# - Recovery Target -
+#recovery_target_xid = ''
+#recovery_target_name = ''		# e.g. 'daily backup 2011-01-26'
+#recovery_target_time = ''		# e.g. '2004-07-14 22:39:00 EST'
+#recovery_target_timeline = ''		# timeline ID or 'latest'
+					# (change requires restart)
+#recovery_target_inclusive = on
+#pause_at_recovery_target = on		# Pause recovery once target is reached
+
 
 #------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 # REPLICATION
@@ -240,6 +257,11 @@
 #wal_receiver_timeout = 60s		# time that receiver waits for
 					# communication from master
 					# in milliseconds; 0 disables
+#standby_mode = off			# "on" starts the server as a standby
+					# (change requires restart)
+#primary_conninfo = ''			# connection string to connect to the master
+					# e.g. 'host=localhost port=5432'
+#trigger_file = ''			# trigger file to promote the standby
 
 
 #------------------------------------------------------------------------------
diff --git a/src/bin/pg_ctl/pg_ctl.c b/src/bin/pg_ctl/pg_ctl.c
index e412d71..3a02481 100644
--- a/src/bin/pg_ctl/pg_ctl.c
+++ b/src/bin/pg_ctl/pg_ctl.c
@@ -928,7 +928,7 @@ do_stop(void)
 		/*
 		 * If backup_label exists, an online backup is running. Warn the user
 		 * that smart shutdown will wait for it to finish. However, if
-		 * recovery.conf is also present, we're recovering from an online
+		 * recovery.trigger is also present, we're recovering from an online
 		 * backup instead of performing one.
 		 */
 		if (shutdown_mode == SMART_MODE &&
@@ -1016,7 +1016,7 @@ do_restart(void)
 		/*
 		 * If backup_label exists, an online backup is running. Warn the user
 		 * that smart shutdown will wait for it to finish. However, if
-		 * recovery.conf is also present, we're recovering from an online
+		 * recovery.trigger is also present, we're recovering from an online
 		 * backup instead of performing one.
 		 */
 		if (shutdown_mode == SMART_MODE &&
@@ -1127,7 +1127,7 @@ do_promote(void)
 		exit(1);
 	}
 
-	/* If recovery.conf doesn't exist, the server is not in standby mode */
+	/* If recovery.trigger doesn't exist, the server is not in standby mode */
 	if (stat(recovery_file, &statbuf) != 0)
 	{
 		write_stderr(_("%s: cannot promote server; "
@@ -2270,7 +2270,7 @@ main(int argc, char **argv)
 		snprintf(postopts_file, MAXPGPATH, "%s/postmaster.opts", pg_data);
 		snprintf(pid_file, MAXPGPATH, "%s/postmaster.pid", pg_data);
 		snprintf(backup_file, MAXPGPATH, "%s/backup_label", pg_data);
-		snprintf(recovery_file, MAXPGPATH, "%s/recovery.conf", pg_data);
+		snprintf(recovery_file, MAXPGPATH, "%s/recovery.trigger", pg_data);
 		snprintf(promote_file, MAXPGPATH, "%s/promote", pg_data);
 	}
 
diff --git a/src/include/access/xlog.h b/src/include/access/xlog.h
index 72e3242..c831345 100644
--- a/src/include/access/xlog.h
+++ b/src/include/access/xlog.h
@@ -190,6 +190,20 @@ extern char *XLogArchiveCommand;
 extern bool EnableHotStandby;
 extern bool fullPageWrites;
 extern bool log_checkpoints;
+extern char *restore_command;
+extern char *archive_cleanup_command;
+extern char *recovery_end_command;
+extern bool standby_mode;
+extern char *primary_conninfo;
+extern char *trigger_file;
+extern RecoveryTargetType recovery_target;
+extern TransactionId recovery_target_xid;
+extern TimestampTz recovery_target_time;
+extern char *recovery_target_name;
+extern bool recovery_target_inclusive;
+extern bool pause_at_recovery_target;
+extern char *recovery_target_timeline_string;
+extern TimeLineID recovery_target_timeline;
 
 /* WAL levels */
 typedef enum WalLevel
diff --git a/src/include/replication/walreceiver.h b/src/include/replication/walreceiver.h
index 72878f8..d51d86f 100644
--- a/src/include/replication/walreceiver.h
+++ b/src/include/replication/walreceiver.h
@@ -149,7 +149,7 @@ extern void WalRcvShmemInit(void);
 extern void ShutdownWalRcv(void);
 extern bool WalRcvStreaming(void);
 extern bool WalRcvRunning(void);
-extern void RequestXLogStreaming(TimeLineID tli, XLogRecPtr recptr, const char *conninfo);
+extern void RequestXLogStreaming(TimeLineID tli, XLogRecPtr recptr);
 extern XLogRecPtr GetWalRcvWriteRecPtr(XLogRecPtr *latestChunkStart, TimeLineID *receiveTLI);
 extern int	GetReplicationApplyDelay(void);
 extern int	GetReplicationTransferLatency(void);
diff --git a/src/include/utils/guc_tables.h b/src/include/utils/guc_tables.h
index 7360ce3..a2d3281 100644
--- a/src/include/utils/guc_tables.h
+++ b/src/include/utils/guc_tables.h
@@ -68,6 +68,8 @@ enum config_group
 	WAL_SETTINGS,
 	WAL_CHECKPOINTS,
 	WAL_ARCHIVING,
+	WAL_ARCHIVE_RECOVERY,
+	WAL_RECOVERY_TARGET,
 	REPLICATION,
 	REPLICATION_SENDING,
 	REPLICATION_MASTER,

diff --git a/contrib/pg_archivecleanup/pg_archivecleanup.c b/contrib/pg_archivecleanup/pg_archivecleanup.c
index e97a11c..fb01da9 100644
--- a/contrib/pg_archivecleanup/pg_archivecleanup.c
+++ b/contrib/pg_archivecleanup/pg_archivecleanup.c
@@ -255,7 +255,7 @@ usage(void)
 	printf("  -x EXT         clean up files if they have this extension\n");
 	printf("  -?, --help     show this help, then exit\n");
 	printf("\n"
-		   "For use as archive_cleanup_command in recovery.conf when standby_mode = on:\n"
+		   "For use as archive_cleanup_command in postgresql.conf when standby_mode = on:\n"
 		   "  archive_cleanup_command = 'pg_archivecleanup [OPTION]... ARCHIVELOCATION %%r'\n"
 		   "e.g.\n"
 		   "  archive_cleanup_command = 'pg_archivecleanup /mnt/server/archiverdir %%r'\n");
diff --git a/contrib/pg_standby/pg_standby.c b/contrib/pg_standby/pg_standby.c
index 659bd50..115c25e 100644
--- a/contrib/pg_standby/pg_standby.c
+++ b/contrib/pg_standby/pg_standby.c
@@ -531,7 +531,7 @@ usage(void)
 	printf("  -w MAXWAITTIME     max seconds to wait for a file (0=no limit) (default=0)\n");
 	printf("  -?, --help         show this help, then exit\n");
 	printf("\n"
-		   "Main intended use as restore_command in recovery.conf:\n"
+		   "Main intended use as restore_command in postgresql.conf:\n"
 		   "  restore_command = 'pg_standby [OPTION]... ARCHIVELOCATION %%f %%p %%r'\n"
 		   "e.g.\n"
 	"  restore_command = 'pg_standby /mnt/server/archiverdir %%f %%p %%r'\n");
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/backup.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/backup.sgml
index c4215be..e57d521 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/backup.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/backup.sgml
@@ -1002,8 +1002,16 @@ SELECT pg_stop_backup();
    </listitem>
    <listitem>
     <para>
-     Create a recovery command file <filename>recovery.conf</> in the cluster
-     data directory (see <xref linkend="recovery-config">). You might
+     Set up recovery parameters in <filename>postgresql.conf</> (see
+     <xref linkend="runtime-config-wal-archive-recovery"> and
+     <xref linkend="runtime-config-wal-recovery-target">). You can also
+     use the same parameters in <filename>recovery.conf</>.
+    </para>
+   </listitem>
+   <listitem>
+    <para>
+     Create a recovery command file <filename>recovery.conf</>
+     in the cluster data directory. You might
      also want to temporarily modify <filename>pg_hba.conf</> to prevent
      ordinary users from connecting until you are sure the recovery was successful.
     </para>
@@ -1031,12 +1039,11 @@ SELECT pg_stop_backup();
    </para>
 
    <para>
-    The key part of all this is to set up a recovery configuration file that
-    describes how you want to recover and how far the recovery should
-    run.  You can use <filename>recovery.conf.sample</> (normally
-    located in the installation's <filename>share/</> directory) as a
-    prototype.  The one thing that you absolutely must specify in
-    <filename>recovery.conf</> is the <varname>restore_command</>,
+    The key part of all this is to set up recovery parameters that
+    specify how you want to recover and how far the recovery should
+    run. The one thing that you absolutely must specify in
+    <filename>postgresql.conf</> or <filename>recovery.conf</> to
+    recover from the backup is the <varname>restore_command</>,
     which tells <productname>PostgreSQL</> how to retrieve archived
     WAL file segments.  Like the <varname>archive_command</>, this is
     a shell command string.  It can contain <literal>%f</>, which is
@@ -1090,8 +1097,8 @@ restore_command = 'cp /mnt/server/archivedir/%f %p'
    <para>
     If you want to recover to some previous point in time (say, right before
     the junior DBA dropped your main transaction table), just specify the
-    required stopping point in <filename>recovery.conf</>.  You can specify
-    the stop point, known as the <quote>recovery target</>, either by
+    required stopping point in <filename>postgresql.conf</> or <filename>recovery.conf</>.
+    You can specify the stop point, known as the <quote>recovery target</>, either by
     date/time, named restore point or by completion of a specific transaction
     ID.  As of this writing only the date/time and named restore point options
     are very usable, since there are no tools to help you identify with any
@@ -1187,9 +1194,11 @@ restore_command = 'cp /mnt/server/archivedir/%f %p'
     The default behavior of recovery is to recover along the same timeline
     that was current when the base backup was taken.  If you wish to recover
     into some child timeline (that is, you want to return to some state that
-    was itself generated after a recovery attempt), you need to specify the
-    target timeline ID in <filename>recovery.conf</>.  You cannot recover into
-    timelines that branched off earlier than the base backup.
+    was itself generated after a recovery attempt), you need to set
+    <xref linkend="guc-recovery-target-timeline"> to the
+    target timeline ID in <filename>postgresql.conf</> or <filename>recovery.conf</>.
+    You cannot recover into timelines that branched off earlier than the
+    base backup.
    </para>
   </sect2>
 
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/config.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/config.sgml
index b7df8ce..3b26bb7 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/config.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/config.sgml
@@ -2161,6 +2161,278 @@ include 'filename'
      </variablelist>
     </sect2>
 
+    <sect2 id="runtime-config-wal-archive-recovery">
+     <title>Archive Recovery</title>
+
+     <variablelist>
+      <varlistentry id="guc-restore-command" xreflabel="restore_command">
+       <term><varname>restore_command</varname> (<type>string</type>)</term>
+       <indexterm>
+        <primary><varname>restore_command</> configuration parameter</primary>
+       </indexterm>
+       <listitem>
+        <para>
+         The shell command to execute to retrieve an archived segment of
+         the WAL file series. This parameter is required for archive recovery,
+         but optional for streaming replication.
+         Any <literal>%f</> in the string is
+         replaced by the name of the file to retrieve from the archive,
+         and any <literal>%p</> is replaced by the copy destination path name
+         on the server.
+         (The path name is relative to the current working directory,
+         i.e., the cluster's data directory.)
+         Any <literal>%r</> is replaced by the name of the file containing the
+         last valid restart point. That is the earliest file that must be kept
+         to allow a restore to be restartable, so this information can be used
+         to truncate the archive to just the minimum required to support
+         restarting from the current restore. <literal>%r</> is typically only
+         used by warm-standby configurations
+         (see <xref linkend="warm-standby">).
+         Write <literal>%%</> to embed an actual <literal>%</> character.
+        </para>
+        <para>
+         It is important for the command to return a zero exit status
+         only if it succeeds.  The command <emphasis>will</> be asked for file
+         names that are not present in the archive; it must return nonzero
+         when so asked.  Examples:
+<programlisting>
+restore_command = 'cp /mnt/server/archivedir/%f "%p"'
+restore_command = 'copy "C:\\server\\archivedir\\%f" "%p"'  # Windows
+</programlisting>
+        </para>
+        <para>
+         This parameter can only be set in the <filename>postgresql.conf</>
+         file or on the server command line. It only has effect during archive
+         recovery or in standby mode.
+        </para>
+       </listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+
+      <varlistentry id="guc-archive-cleanup-command" xreflabel="archive_cleanup_command">
+       <term><varname>archive_cleanup_command</varname> (<type>string</type>)</term>
+       <indexterm>
+         <primary><varname>archive_cleanup_command</> configuration parameter</primary>
+       </indexterm>
+       <listitem>
+        <para>
+         The shell command that will be executed at every restartpoint.
+         The purpose of <varname>archive_cleanup_command</> is to
+         provide a mechanism for cleaning up old archived WAL files that
+         are no longer needed by the standby server.
+         Any <literal>%r</> is replaced by the name of the file containing the
+         last valid restart point.
+         That is the earliest file that must be <emphasis>kept</> to allow a
+         restore to be restartable, and so all files earlier than <literal>%r</>
+         may be safely removed.
+         This information can be used to truncate the archive to just the
+         minimum required to support restart from the current restore.
+         The <xref linkend="pgarchivecleanup"> module
+         is often used in <varname>archive_cleanup_command</> for
+         single-standby configurations, for example:
+<programlisting>archive_cleanup_command = 'pg_archivecleanup /mnt/server/archivedir %r'</programlisting>
+         Note however that if multiple standby servers are restoring from the
+         same archive directory, you will need to ensure that you do not delete
+         WAL files until they are no longer needed by any of the servers.
+         <varname>archive_cleanup_command</> would typically be used in a
+         warm-standby configuration (see <xref linkend="warm-standby">).
+         Write <literal>%%</> to embed an actual <literal>%</> character in the
+         command.
+        </para>
+        <para>
+         If the command returns a non-zero exit status then a WARNING log
+         message will be written.
+        </para>
+        <para>
+         This parameter can only be set in the <filename>postgresql.conf</>
+         file or on the server command line. It only has effect during archive
+         recovery or in standby mode.
+        </para>
+       </listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+
+      <varlistentry id="guc-recovery-end-command" xreflabel="recovery_end_command">
+       <term><varname>recovery_end_command</varname> (<type>string</type>)</term>
+       <indexterm>
+         <primary><varname>recovery_end_command</> configuration parameter</primary>
+       </indexterm>
+       <listitem>
+        <para>
+         The shell command that will be executed once only
+         at the end of recovery. This parameter is optional. The purpose of the
+         <varname>recovery_end_command</> is to provide a mechanism for cleanup
+         following replication or recovery.
+         Any <literal>%r</> is replaced by the name of the file containing the
+         last valid restart point, like in <varname>archive_cleanup_command</>.
+        </para>
+        <para>
+         If the command returns a non-zero exit status then a WARNING log
+         message will be written and the database will proceed to start up
+         anyway.  An exception is that if the command was terminated by a
+         signal, the database will not proceed with startup.
+        </para>
+        <para>
+         This parameter can only be set in the <filename>postgresql.conf</>
+         file or on the server command line. It only has effect during archive
+         recovery or in standby mode.
+        </para>
+       </listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+     </variablelist>
+    </sect2>
+
+    <sect2 id="runtime-config-wal-recovery-target">
+     <title>Recovery Target</title>
+
+     <variablelist>
+      <varlistentry id="guc-recovery-target-name" xreflabel="recovery_target_name">
+       <term><varname>recovery_target_name</varname> (<type>string</type>)</term>
+       <indexterm>
+        <primary><varname>recovery_target_name</> configuration parameter</primary>
+       </indexterm>
+       <listitem>
+        <para>
+         Specifies the named restore point, created with
+         <function>pg_create_restore_point()</> to which recovery will proceed.
+         At most one of <varname>recovery_target_name</>,
+         <varname>recovery_target_time</> or
+         <varname>recovery_target_xid</> can be specified.  The default
+         value is an empty string, which will recover to the end of the WAL log.
+        </para>
+        <para>
+         This parameter can only be set in the <filename>postgresql.conf</>
+         file or on the server command line. It only has effect during archive
+         recovery or in standby mode.
+        </para>
+       </listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+
+      <varlistentry id="guc-recovery-target-time" xreflabel="recovery_target_time">
+       <term><varname>recovery_target_time</varname> (<type>string</type>)</term>
+       <indexterm>
+        <primary><varname>recovery_target_time</> configuration parameter</primary>
+       </indexterm>
+       <listitem>
+        <para>
+         Specifies the time stamp up to which recovery will proceed.
+         This parameter must be specified in the date/time format
+         (see <xref linkend="datatype-datetime-input"> for details).
+         At most one of <varname>recovery_target_time</>,
+         <varname>recovery_target_name</> or
+         <varname>recovery_target_xid</> can be specified.
+         The default value is an empty string, which will recover to
+         the end of the WAL log. The precise stopping point is also
+         influenced by <varname>recovery_target_inclusive</>.
+        </para>
+        <para>
+         This parameter can only be set in the <filename>postgresql.conf</>
+         file or on the server command line. It only has effect during archive
+         recovery or in standby mode.
+        </para>
+       </listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+
+      <varlistentry id="guc-recovery-target-xid" xreflabel="recovery_target_xid">
+       <term><varname>recovery_target_xid</varname> (<type>string</type>)</term>
+       <indexterm>
+        <primary><varname>recovery_target_xid</> configuration parameter</primary>
+       </indexterm>
+       <listitem>
+        <para>
+         Specifies the transaction ID up to which recovery will proceed.
+         Keep in mind that while transaction IDs are assigned sequentially
+         at transaction start, transactions can complete in a different
+         numeric order. The transactions that will be recovered are
+         those that committed before (and optionally including)
+         the specified one. At most one of <varname>recovery_target_xid</>,
+         <varname>recovery_target_name</> or
+         <varname>recovery_target_time</> can be specified.
+         The default value is an empty string, which will recover to the end of
+         the WAL log. The precise stopping point is also influenced by
+         <varname>recovery_target_inclusive</>.
+        </para>
+        <para>
+         This parameter can only be set in the <filename>postgresql.conf</>
+         file or on the server command line. It only has effect during archive
+         recovery or in standby mode.
+        </para>
+       </listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+
+      <varlistentry id="guc-recovery-target-inclusive" xreflabel="recovery_target_inclusive">
+       <term><varname>recovery_target_inclusive</varname> (<type>boolean</type>)</term>
+       <indexterm>
+        <primary><varname>recovery_target_inclusive</> configuration parameter</primary>
+       </indexterm>
+       <listitem>
+        <para>
+         Specifies whether we stop just after the specified recovery target
+         (<literal>on</>), or just before the recovery target (<literal>off</>).
+         Applies to both <varname>recovery_target_time</>
+         and <varname>recovery_target_xid</>, whichever one is
+         specified for this recovery.  This indicates whether transactions
+         having exactly the target commit time or ID, respectively, will
+         be included in the recovery.  Default is <literal>on</>.
+        </para>
+        <para>
+         This parameter can only be set in the <filename>postgresql.conf</>
+         file or on the server command line. It only has effect during archive
+         recovery or in standby mode.
+        </para>
+       </listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+
+      <varlistentry id="guc-recovery-target-timeline" xreflabel="recovery_target_timeline">
+       <term><varname>recovery_target_timeline</varname> (<type>string</type>)</term>
+       <indexterm>
+        <primary><varname>recovery_target_timeline</> configuration parameter</primary>
+       </indexterm>
+       <listitem>
+        <para>
+         Specifies recovering into a particular timeline.  The default value is
+         an empty string, which will recover along the same timeline that was
+         current when the base backup was taken. Setting this to
+         <literal>latest</> recovers to the latest timeline found in the archive,
+         which is useful in a standby server. Other than that you only need to
+         set this parameter in complex re-recovery situations, where you need
+         to return to a state that itself was reached after a point-in-time
+         recovery. See <xref linkend="backup-timelines"> for discussion.
+        </para>
+        <para>
+         This parameter can only be set at server start. It only has effect
+         during archive recovery or in standby mode.
+        </para>
+       </listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+
+      <varlistentry id="guc-pause-at-recovery-target" xreflabel="pause_at_recovery_target">
+       <term><varname>pause_at_recovery_target</varname> (<type>boolean</type>)</term>
+       <indexterm>
+        <primary><varname>pause_at_recovery_target</> configuration parameter</primary>
+       </indexterm>
+       <listitem>
+        <para>
+         Specifies whether recovery should pause when the recovery target
+         is reached. The default is <literal>on</>.
+         This is intended to allow queries to be executed against the
+         database to check if this recovery target is the most desirable
+         point for recovery. The paused state can be resumed by using
+         <function>pg_xlog_replay_resume()</> (See
+         <xref linkend="functions-recovery-control-table">), which then
+         causes recovery to end. If this recovery target is not the
+         desired stopping point, then shutdown the server, change the
+         recovery target settings to a later target and restart to
+         continue recovery.
+        </para>
+        <para>
+         This parameter can only be set in the <filename>postgresql.conf</>
+         file or on the server command line. It only has effect during archive
+         recovery or in standby mode if recovery target is set.
+        </para>
+       </listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+     </variablelist>
+     </sect2>
+
    </sect1>
 
    <sect1 id="runtime-config-replication">
@@ -2380,6 +2652,93 @@ include 'filename'
 
     <variablelist>
 
+     <varlistentry id="guc-standby-mode" xreflabel="standby_mode">
+      <term><varname>standby_mode</varname> (<type>boolean</type>)</term>
+      <indexterm>
+       <primary><varname>standby_mode</> configuration parameter</primary>
+      </indexterm>
+      <listitem>
+       <para>
+        Specifies whether to start the <productname>PostgreSQL</> server as
+        a standby when recovery trigger file <filename>recovery.trigger</> exists.
+        The default value is <literal>off</>.
+        If this parameter is <literal>on</>, the server will not
+        stop recovery when the end of archived WAL is reached,
+        but will keep trying to continue recovery by fetching new WAL segments
+        using <varname>restore_command</> and/or by connecting to
+        the primary server as specified by the <varname>primary_conninfo</>
+        setting.
+       </para>
+       <para>
+        This parameter can only be set at server start. It only has effect
+        if recovery trigger file <filename>recovery.trigger</> exists.
+       </para>
+      </listitem>
+     </varlistentry>
+
+     <varlistentry id="guc-primary-conninfo" xreflabel="primary_conninfo">
+      <term><varname>primary_conninfo</varname> (<type>string</type>)</term>
+      <indexterm>
+        <primary><varname>primary_conninfo</> configuration parameter</primary>
+      </indexterm>
+      <listitem>
+       <para>
+        Specifies a connection string to be used for the standby server
+        to connect with the primary. This string is in the format
+        accepted by the libpq <function>PQconnectdb</function> function,
+        described in <xref linkend="libpq-connect">. If any option is
+        unspecified in this string, then the corresponding environment
+        variable (see <xref linkend="libpq-envars">) is checked. If the
+        environment variable is not set either, then defaults are used.
+        If this parameter is an empty string (the default), no attempt is
+        made to connect to the master.
+       </para>
+       <para>
+        The connection string should specify the host name (or address)
+        of the primary server, as well as the port number if it is not
+        the same as the standby server's default.
+        Also specify a user name corresponding to a role that has the
+        <literal>REPLICATION</> and <literal>LOGIN</> privileges on the
+        primary (see
+        <xref linkend="streaming-replication-authentication">).
+        A password needs to be provided too, if the primary demands password
+        authentication.  It can be provided in the
+        <varname>primary_conninfo</varname> string, or in a separate
+        <filename>~/.pgpass</> file on the standby server (use
+        <literal>replication</> as the database name).
+        Do not specify a database name in the
+        <varname>primary_conninfo</varname> string.
+       </para>
+       <para>
+        This parameter can only be set in the <filename>postgresql.conf</>
+        file or on the server command line. It only has effect in standby mode.
+       </para>
+       <para>
+        If this parameter is changed while replication is in progress,
+        the standby terminates replication, and then tries to restart
+        replication with new setting.
+       </para>
+      </listitem>
+     </varlistentry>
+
+     <varlistentry id="guc-trigger-file" xreflabel="trigger_file">
+      <term><varname>trigger_file</varname> (<type>string</type>)</term>
+      <indexterm>
+        <primary><varname>trigger_file</> configuration parameter</primary>
+      </indexterm>
+      <listitem>
+       <para>
+        Specifies a trigger file whose presence ends recovery in the
+        standby.  Even if this value is not set, you can still promote
+        the standby using <command>pg_ctl promote</>.
+       </para>
+       <para>
+        This parameter can only be set in the <filename>postgresql.conf</>
+        file or on the server command line. It only has effect in standby mode.
+       </para>
+      </listitem>
+    </varlistentry>
+
      <varlistentry id="guc-hot-standby" xreflabel="hot_standby">
       <term><varname>hot_standby</varname> (<type>boolean</type>)</term>
       <indexterm>
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/func.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/func.sgml
index 35c7f75..48cfe9e 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/func.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/func.sgml
@@ -14670,7 +14670,7 @@ postgres=# select pg_start_backup('label_goes_here');
     <function>pg_create_restore_point</> creates a named transaction log
     record that can be used as recovery target, and returns the corresponding
     transaction log location.  The given name can then be used with
-    <xref linkend="recovery-target-name"> to specify the point up to which
+    <xref linkend="guc-recovery-target-name"> to specify the point up to which
     recovery will proceed.  Avoid creating multiple restore points with the
     same name, since recovery will stop at the first one whose name matches
     the recovery target.
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/high-availability.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/high-availability.sgml
index c8f6fa8..21e1ee0 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/high-availability.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/high-availability.sgml
@@ -591,7 +591,7 @@ protocol to make nodes agree on a serializable transactional order.
    <para>
     In standby mode, the server continuously applies WAL received from the
     master server. The standby server can read WAL from a WAL archive
-    (see <xref linkend="restore-command">) or directly from the master
+    (see <xref linkend="guc-restore-command">) or directly from the master
     over a TCP connection (streaming replication). The standby server will
     also attempt to restore any WAL found in the standby cluster's
     <filename>pg_xlog</> directory. That typically happens after a server
@@ -658,13 +658,14 @@ protocol to make nodes agree on a serializable transactional order.
    <para>
     To set up the standby server, restore the base backup taken from primary
     server (see <xref linkend="backup-pitr-recovery">). Create a recovery
-    command file <filename>recovery.conf</> in the standby's cluster data
-    directory, and turn on <varname>standby_mode</>. Set
+    command file <filename>recovery.done</> in the standby's cluster data
+    directory. Turn on <varname>standby_mode</> and set
     <varname>restore_command</> to a simple command to copy files from
     the WAL archive. If you plan to have multiple standby servers for high
     availability purposes, set <varname>recovery_target_timeline</> to
     <literal>latest</>, to make the standby server follow the timeline change
-    that occurs at failover to another standby.
+    that occurs at failover to another standby. Parameters can be set up
+    in either <filename>postgresql.conf</> or <filename>recovery.conf</>.
    </para>
 
    <note>
@@ -695,7 +696,7 @@ protocol to make nodes agree on a serializable transactional order.
 
    <para>
     If you're using a WAL archive, its size can be minimized using the <xref
-    linkend="archive-cleanup-command"> parameter to remove files that are no
+    linkend="guc-archive-cleanup-command"> parameter to remove files that are no
     longer required by the standby server.
     The <application>pg_archivecleanup</> utility is designed specifically to
     be used with <varname>archive_cleanup_command</> in typical single-standby
@@ -706,7 +707,7 @@ protocol to make nodes agree on a serializable transactional order.
    </para>
 
    <para>
-    A simple example of a <filename>recovery.conf</> is:
+    A simple example of standby settings is:
 <programlisting>
 standby_mode = 'on'
 primary_conninfo = 'host=192.168.1.50 port=5432 user=foo password=foopass'
@@ -763,8 +764,8 @@ archive_cleanup_command = 'pg_archivecleanup /path/to/archive %r'
     To use streaming replication, set up a file-based log-shipping standby
     server as described in <xref linkend="warm-standby">. The step that
     turns a file-based log-shipping standby into streaming replication
-    standby is setting <varname>primary_conninfo</> setting in the
-    <filename>recovery.conf</> file to point to the primary server. Set
+    standby is setting <varname>primary_conninfo</> to
+    point to the primary server. Set
     <xref linkend="guc-listen-addresses"> and authentication options
     (see <filename>pg_hba.conf</>) on the primary so that the standby server
     can connect to the <literal>replication</> pseudo-database on the primary
@@ -824,15 +825,14 @@ host    replication     foo             192.168.1.100/32        md5
     </para>
     <para>
      The host name and port number of the primary, connection user name,
-     and password are specified in the <filename>recovery.conf</> file.
+     and password are specified in <varname>primary_conninfo</>.
      The password can also be set in the <filename>~/.pgpass</> file on the
      standby (specify <literal>replication</> in the <replaceable>database</>
      field).
      For example, if the primary is running on host IP <literal>192.168.1.50</>,
      port <literal>5432</literal>, the account name for replication is
      <literal>foo</>, and the password is <literal>foopass</>, the administrator
-     can add the following line to the <filename>recovery.conf</> file on the
-     standby:
+     can set <varname>primary_conninfo</> on the standby like this:
 
 <programlisting>
 # The standby connects to the primary that is running on host 192.168.1.50
@@ -1212,8 +1212,8 @@ primary_conninfo = 'host=192.168.1.50 port=5432 user=foo password=foopass'
    <para>
     To trigger failover of a log-shipping standby server,
     run <command>pg_ctl promote</> or create a trigger
-    file with the file name and path specified by the <varname>trigger_file</>
-    setting in <filename>recovery.conf</>. If you're planning to use
+    file with the file name and path specified by the <varname>trigger_file</>.
+    If you're planning to use
     <command>pg_ctl promote</> to fail over, <varname>trigger_file</> is
     not required. If you're setting up the reporting servers that are
     only used to offload read-only queries from the primary, not for high
@@ -1258,8 +1258,7 @@ primary_conninfo = 'host=192.168.1.50 port=5432 user=foo password=foopass'
     The magic that makes the two loosely coupled servers work together is
     simply a <varname>restore_command</> used on the standby that,
     when asked for the next WAL file, waits for it to become available from
-    the primary. The <varname>restore_command</> is specified in the
-    <filename>recovery.conf</> file on the standby server. Normal recovery
+    the primary. Normal recovery
     processing would request a file from the WAL archive, reporting failure
     if the file was unavailable.  For standby processing it is normal for
     the next WAL file to be unavailable, so the standby must wait for
@@ -1347,9 +1346,10 @@ if (!triggered)
      <listitem>
       <para>
        Begin recovery on the standby server from the local WAL
-       archive, using a <filename>recovery.conf</> that specifies a
+       archive, create a <filename>recovery.conf</> file, then specify a
        <varname>restore_command</> that waits as described
-       previously (see <xref linkend="backup-pitr-recovery">).
+       previously (see <xref linkend="backup-pitr-recovery">) in either
+       <filename>postgresql.conf</> or <filename>recovery.conf</>.
       </para>
      </listitem>
     </orderedlist>
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/pgarchivecleanup.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/pgarchivecleanup.sgml
index 932914b..2984da4 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/pgarchivecleanup.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/pgarchivecleanup.sgml
@@ -38,8 +38,8 @@
 
   <para>
    To configure a standby
-   server to use <application>pg_archivecleanup</>, put this into its
-   <filename>recovery.conf</filename> configuration file:
+   server to use <application>pg_archivecleanup</>, specify
+   <xref linkend="guc-archive-cleanup-command"> like this:
 <programlisting>
 archive_cleanup_command = 'pg_archivecleanup <replaceable>archivelocation</> %r'
 </programlisting>
@@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ archive_cleanup_command = 'pg_archivecleanup <replaceable>archivelocation</> %r'
    files should be removed.
   </para>
   <para>
-   When used within <xref linkend="archive-cleanup-command">, all WAL files
+   When used within <varname>archive_cleanup_command</>, all WAL files
    logically preceding the value of the <literal>%r</> argument will be removed
    from <replaceable>archivelocation</>. This minimizes the number of files
    that need to be retained, while preserving crash-restart capability.  Use of
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/pgstandby.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/pgstandby.sgml
index ca2b5c0..15097ca 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/pgstandby.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/pgstandby.sgml
@@ -46,8 +46,8 @@
 
   <para>
    To configure a standby
-   server to use <application>pg_standby</>, put this into its
-   <filename>recovery.conf</filename> configuration file:
+   server to use <application>pg_standby</>, specify
+   <xref linkend="guc-restore-command"> like this:
 <programlisting>
 restore_command = 'pg_standby <replaceable>archiveDir</> %f %p %r'
 </programlisting>
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/recovery-config.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/recovery-config.sgml
index 7e39c0d..52b75b7 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/recovery-config.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/recovery-config.sgml
@@ -42,34 +42,8 @@
       </indexterm>
       <listitem>
        <para>
-        The shell command to execute to retrieve an archived segment of
-        the WAL file series. This parameter is required for archive recovery,
-        but optional for streaming replication.
-        Any <literal>%f</> in the string is
-        replaced by the name of the file to retrieve from the archive,
-        and any <literal>%p</> is replaced by the copy destination path name
-        on the server.
-        (The path name is relative to the current working directory,
-        i.e., the cluster's data directory.)
-        Any <literal>%r</> is replaced by the name of the file containing the
-        last valid restart point. That is the earliest file that must be kept
-        to allow a restore to be restartable, so this information can be used
-        to truncate the archive to just the minimum required to support
-        restarting from the current restore. <literal>%r</> is typically only
-        used by warm-standby configurations
-        (see <xref linkend="warm-standby">).
-        Write <literal>%%</> to embed an actual <literal>%</> character.
-       </para>
-
-       <para>
-        It is important for the command to return a zero exit status
-        only if it succeeds.  The command <emphasis>will</> be asked for file
-        names that are not present in the archive; it must return nonzero
-        when so asked.  Examples:
-<programlisting>
-restore_command = 'cp /mnt/server/archivedir/%f "%p"'
-restore_command = 'copy "C:\\server\\archivedir\\%f" "%p"'  # Windows
-</programlisting>
+        Refer to <xref linkend="guc-restore-command"> for detailed
+        description.
        </para>
       </listitem>
      </varlistentry>
@@ -81,33 +55,8 @@ restore_command = 'copy "C:\\server\\archivedir\\%f" "%p"'  # Windows
       </indexterm>
       <listitem>
        <para>
-        This optional parameter specifies a shell command that will be executed
-        at every restartpoint.  The purpose of
-        <varname>archive_cleanup_command</> is to provide a mechanism for
-        cleaning up old archived WAL files that are no longer needed by the
-        standby server.
-        Any <literal>%r</> is replaced by the name of the file containing the
-        last valid restart point.
-        That is the earliest file that must be <emphasis>kept</> to allow a
-        restore to be restartable, and so all files earlier than <literal>%r</>
-        may be safely removed.
-        This information can be used to truncate the archive to just the
-        minimum required to support restart from the current restore.
-        The <xref linkend="pgarchivecleanup"> module
-        is often used in <varname>archive_cleanup_command</> for
-        single-standby configurations, for example:
-<programlisting>archive_cleanup_command = 'pg_archivecleanup /mnt/server/archivedir %r'</programlisting>
-        Note however that if multiple standby servers are restoring from the
-        same archive directory, you will need to ensure that you do not delete
-        WAL files until they are no longer needed by any of the servers.
-        <varname>archive_cleanup_command</> would typically be used in a
-        warm-standby configuration (see <xref linkend="warm-standby">).
-        Write <literal>%%</> to embed an actual <literal>%</> character in the
-        command.
-       </para>
-       <para>
-        If the command returns a non-zero exit status then a WARNING log
-        message will be written.
+        Refer to <xref linkend="guc-archive-cleanup-command"> for detailed
+        description.
        </para>
       </listitem>
      </varlistentry>
@@ -119,18 +68,8 @@ restore_command = 'copy "C:\\server\\archivedir\\%f" "%p"'  # Windows
       </indexterm>
       <listitem>
        <para>
-        This parameter specifies a shell command that will be executed once only
-        at the end of recovery. This parameter is optional. The purpose of the
-        <varname>recovery_end_command</> is to provide a mechanism for cleanup
-        following replication or recovery.
-        Any <literal>%r</> is replaced by the name of the file containing the
-        last valid restart point, like in <xref linkend="archive-cleanup-command">.
-       </para>
-       <para>
-        If the command returns a non-zero exit status then a WARNING log
-        message will be written and the database will proceed to start up
-        anyway.  An exception is that if the command was terminated by a
-        signal, the database will not proceed with startup.
+        Refer to <xref linkend="guc-recovery-end-command"> for detailed
+        description.
        </para>
       </listitem>
      </varlistentry>
@@ -153,12 +92,8 @@ restore_command = 'copy "C:\\server\\archivedir\\%f" "%p"'  # Windows
       </indexterm>
       <listitem>
        <para>
-        This parameter specifies the named restore point, created with
-        <function>pg_create_restore_point()</> to which recovery will proceed.
-        At most one of <varname>recovery_target_name</>,
-        <xref linkend="recovery-target-time"> or
-        <xref linkend="recovery-target-xid"> can be specified.  The default is to
-        recover to the end of the WAL log.
+        Refer to <xref linkend="guc-recovery-target-name"> for detailed
+        description.
        </para>
       </listitem>
      </varlistentry>
@@ -172,14 +107,8 @@ restore_command = 'copy "C:\\server\\archivedir\\%f" "%p"'  # Windows
       </indexterm>
       <listitem>
        <para>
-        This parameter specifies the time stamp up to which recovery
-        will proceed.
-        At most one of <varname>recovery_target_time</>,
-        <xref linkend="recovery-target-name"> or
-        <xref linkend="recovery-target-xid"> can be specified.
-        The default is to recover to the end of the WAL log.
-        The precise stopping point is also influenced by
-        <xref linkend="recovery-target-inclusive">.
+        Refer to <xref linkend="guc-recovery-target-time"> for detailed
+        description.
        </para>
       </listitem>
      </varlistentry>
@@ -191,18 +120,7 @@ restore_command = 'copy "C:\\server\\archivedir\\%f" "%p"'  # Windows
       </indexterm>
       <listitem>
        <para>
-        This parameter specifies the transaction ID up to which recovery
-        will proceed. Keep in mind
-        that while transaction IDs are assigned sequentially at transaction
-        start, transactions can complete in a different numeric order.
-        The transactions that will be recovered are those that committed
-        before (and optionally including) the specified one.
-        At most one of <varname>recovery_target_xid</>,
-        <xref linkend="recovery-target-name"> or
-        <xref linkend="recovery-target-time"> can be specified.
-        The default is to recover to the end of the WAL log.
-        The precise stopping point is also influenced by
-        <xref linkend="recovery-target-inclusive">.
+        Refer to <xref linkend="guc-recovery-target-xid"> for detailed description.
        </para>
       </listitem>
      </varlistentry>
@@ -217,14 +135,8 @@ restore_command = 'copy "C:\\server\\archivedir\\%f" "%p"'  # Windows
       </indexterm>
       <listitem>
        <para>
-        Specifies whether we stop just after the specified recovery target
-        (<literal>true</literal>), or just before the recovery target
-        (<literal>false</literal>).
-        Applies to both <xref linkend="recovery-target-time">
-        and <xref linkend="recovery-target-xid">, whichever one is
-        specified for this recovery.  This indicates whether transactions
-        having exactly the target commit time or ID, respectively, will
-        be included in the recovery.  Default is <literal>true</>.
+        Refer to <xref linkend="guc-recovery-target-inclusive"> for detailed
+        description.
        </para>
       </listitem>
      </varlistentry>
@@ -239,14 +151,7 @@ restore_command = 'copy "C:\\server\\archivedir\\%f" "%p"'  # Windows
       </indexterm>
       <listitem>
        <para>
-        Specifies recovering into a particular timeline.  The default is
-        to recover along the same timeline that was current when the
-        base backup was taken. Setting this to <literal>latest</> recovers
-        to the latest timeline found in the archive, which is useful in
-        a standby server. Other than that you only need to set this parameter
-        in complex re-recovery situations, where you need to return to
-        a state that itself was reached after a point-in-time recovery.
-        See <xref linkend="backup-timelines"> for discussion.
+        Refer to <xref linkend="guc-recovery-target-timeline"> for more details.
        </para>
       </listitem>
      </varlistentry>
@@ -261,21 +166,7 @@ restore_command = 'copy "C:\\server\\archivedir\\%f" "%p"'  # Windows
       </indexterm>
       <listitem>
        <para>
-        Specifies whether recovery should pause when the recovery target
-        is reached. The default is true.
-        This is intended to allow queries to be executed against the
-        database to check if this recovery target is the most desirable
-        point for recovery. The paused state can be resumed by using
-        <function>pg_xlog_replay_resume()</> (See
-        <xref linkend="functions-recovery-control-table">), which then
-        causes recovery to end. If this recovery target is not the
-        desired stopping point, then shutdown the server, change the
-        recovery target settings to a later target and restart to
-        continue recovery.
-       </para>
-       <para>
-        This setting has no effect if <xref linkend="guc-hot-standby"> is not
-        enabled, or if no recovery target is set.
+        Refer to <xref linkend="guc-pause-at-recovery-target"> for more details.
        </para>
       </listitem>
      </varlistentry>
@@ -295,13 +186,7 @@ restore_command = 'copy "C:\\server\\archivedir\\%f" "%p"'  # Windows
         </indexterm>
         <listitem>
          <para>
-          Specifies whether to start the <productname>PostgreSQL</> server as
-          a standby. If this parameter is <literal>on</>, the server will
-          not stop recovery when the end of archived WAL is reached, but
-          will keep trying to continue recovery by fetching new WAL segments
-          using <varname>restore_command</>
-          and/or by connecting to the primary server as specified by the
-          <varname>primary_conninfo</> setting.
+          Refer to <xref linkend="guc-standby-mode"> for more details.
          </para>
         </listitem>
        </varlistentry>
@@ -312,32 +197,7 @@ restore_command = 'copy "C:\\server\\archivedir\\%f" "%p"'  # Windows
         </indexterm>
         <listitem>
          <para>
-          Specifies a connection string to be used for the standby server
-          to connect with the primary. This string is in the format
-          accepted by the libpq <function>PQconnectdb</function> function,
-          described in <xref linkend="libpq-connect">. If any option is
-          unspecified in this string, then the corresponding environment
-          variable (see <xref linkend="libpq-envars">) is checked. If the
-          environment variable is not set either, then
-          defaults are used.
-         </para>
-         <para>
-          The connection string should specify the host name (or address)
-          of the primary server, as well as the port number if it is not
-          the same as the standby server's default.
-          Also specify a user name corresponding to a suitably-privileged role
-          on the primary (see
-          <xref linkend="streaming-replication-authentication">).
-          A password needs to be provided too, if the primary demands password
-          authentication.  It can be provided in the
-          <varname>primary_conninfo</varname> string, or in a separate
-          <filename>~/.pgpass</> file on the standby server (use
-          <literal>replication</> as the database name).
-          Do not specify a database name in the
-          <varname>primary_conninfo</varname> string.
-         </para>
-         <para>
-          This setting has no effect if <varname>standby_mode</> is <literal>off</>.
+          Refer to <xref linkend="guc-primary-conninfo"> for more details.
          </para>
         </listitem>
        </varlistentry>
@@ -348,10 +208,7 @@ restore_command = 'copy "C:\\server\\archivedir\\%f" "%p"'  # Windows
         </indexterm>
         <listitem>
          <para>
-          Specifies a trigger file whose presence ends recovery in the
-          standby.  Even if this value is not set, you can still promote
-          the standby using <command>pg_ctl promote</>.
-          This setting has no effect if <varname>standby_mode</> is <literal>off</>.
+          Refer to <xref linkend="guc-trigger-file"> for more details.
          </para>
         </listitem>
        </varlistentry>
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/release-9.1.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/release-9.1.sgml
index 1143fdf..36546bb 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/release-9.1.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/release-9.1.sgml
@@ -3957,7 +3957,7 @@
       <listitem>
        <para>
         Add <filename>recovery.conf</> setting <link
-        linkend="pause-at-recovery-target"><varname>pause_at_recovery_target</></link>
+        linkend="guc-pause-at-recovery-target"><varname>pause_at_recovery_target</></link>
         to pause recovery at target (Simon Riggs)
        </para>
 
@@ -3977,7 +3977,7 @@
        <para>
         These named restore points can be specified as recovery
         targets using the new <filename>recovery.conf</> setting
-        <link linkend="recovery-target-name"><varname>recovery_target_name</></link>.
+        <link linkend="guc-recovery-target-name"><varname>recovery_target_name</></link>.
        </para>
       </listitem>
 
@@ -4009,8 +4009,7 @@
 
       <listitem>
        <para>
-        Allow <link
-        linkend="recovery-config"><filename>recovery.conf</></link>
+        Allow <filename>recovery.conf</>
         to use the same quoting behavior as <filename>postgresql.conf</>
         (Dimitri Fontaine)
        </para>
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/release.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/release.sgml
index 2515329..de7f68d 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/release.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/release.sgml
@@ -5,7 +5,7 @@ Typical markup:
 
 &<>                             use & escapes
 PostgreSQL                      <productname>
-postgresql.conf, pg_hba.conf,
+postgresql.conf, pg_hba.conf
         recovery.conf           <filename>
 [A-Z][A-Z_ ]+[A-Z_]             <command>, <literal>, <envar>
 [A-Za-z_][A-Za-z0-9_]+()        <function>
diff --git a/src/backend/access/transam/xlog.c b/src/backend/access/transam/xlog.c
index cf2f6e7..3671862 100644
--- a/src/backend/access/transam/xlog.c
+++ b/src/backend/access/transam/xlog.c
@@ -82,6 +82,20 @@ int			sync_method = DEFAULT_SYNC_METHOD;
 int			wal_level = WAL_LEVEL_MINIMAL;
 int			CommitDelay = 0;	/* precommit delay in microseconds */
 int			CommitSiblings = 5; /* # concurrent xacts needed to sleep */
+char	   *restore_command = NULL;
+char	   *archive_cleanup_command = NULL;
+char	   *recovery_end_command = NULL;
+bool		standby_mode = false;
+char	   *primary_conninfo = NULL;
+char	   *trigger_file = NULL;
+RecoveryTargetType	recovery_target = RECOVERY_TARGET_UNSET;
+TransactionId		recovery_target_xid = InvalidTransactionId;
+TimestampTz			recovery_target_time = 0;
+char	   *recovery_target_name = NULL;
+bool		recovery_target_inclusive = true;
+bool		pause_at_recovery_target = true;
+char	   *recovery_target_timeline_string = NULL;
+TimeLineID	recovery_target_timeline = 0;
 
 #ifdef WAL_DEBUG
 bool		XLOG_DEBUG = false;
@@ -194,23 +208,8 @@ bool InArchiveRecovery = false;
 /* Was the last xlog file restored from archive, or local? */
 static bool restoredFromArchive = false;
 
-/* options taken from recovery.conf for archive recovery */
-char *recoveryRestoreCommand = NULL;
-static char *recoveryEndCommand = NULL;
-static char *archiveCleanupCommand = NULL;
-static RecoveryTargetType recoveryTarget = RECOVERY_TARGET_UNSET;
-static bool recoveryTargetInclusive = true;
-static bool recoveryPauseAtTarget = true;
-static TransactionId recoveryTargetXid;
-static TimestampTz recoveryTargetTime;
-static char *recoveryTargetName;
-
-/* options taken from recovery.conf for XLOG streaming */
-bool StandbyMode = false;
-static char *PrimaryConnInfo = NULL;
-static char *TriggerFile = NULL;
-
 /* if recoveryStopsHere returns true, it saves actual stop xid/time/name here */
+static RecoveryTargetType recoveryStopTarget;
 static TransactionId recoveryStopXid;
 static TimestampTz recoveryStopTime;
 static char recoveryStopName[MAXFNAMELEN];
@@ -407,12 +406,6 @@ typedef struct XLogCtlData
 	TimeLineID	ThisTimeLineID;
 
 	/*
-	 * archiveCleanupCommand is read from recovery.conf but needs to be in
-	 * shared memory so that the checkpointer process can access it.
-	 */
-	char		archiveCleanupCommand[MAXPGPATH];
-
-	/*
 	 * SharedRecoveryInProgress indicates if we're still in crash or archive
 	 * recovery.  Protected by info_lck.
 	 */
@@ -3222,7 +3215,7 @@ ReadRecord(XLogReaderState *xlogreader, XLogRecPtr RecPtr, int emode,
 			/*
 			 * We only end up here without a message when XLogPageRead() failed
 			 * - in that case we already logged something.
-			 * In StandbyMode that only happens if we have been triggered, so
+			 * In standby_mode that only happens if we have been triggered, so
 			 * we shouldn't loop anymore in that case.
 			 */
 			if (errormsg)
@@ -3257,7 +3250,7 @@ ReadRecord(XLogReaderState *xlogreader, XLogRecPtr RecPtr, int emode,
 			record = NULL;
 			continue;
 		}
-	} while (StandbyMode && record == NULL && !CheckForStandbyTrigger());
+	} while (standby_mode && record == NULL && !CheckForStandbyTrigger());
 
 	return record;
 }
@@ -4006,21 +3999,18 @@ str_time(pg_time_t tnow)
 }
 
 /*
- * See if there is a recovery command file (recovery.conf), and if so
- * read in parameters for archive recovery and XLOG streaming.
- *
- * The file is parsed using the main configuration parser.
+ * Check to see if there is a recovery trigger file (recovery.trigger).
+ * If so, validate recovery parameters and determine recovery target timeline.
  */
 static void
 readRecoveryCommandFile(void)
 {
-	FILE	   *fd;
-	TimeLineID	rtli = 0;
-	bool		rtliGiven = false;
+	FILE *fd;
 	ConfigVariable *item,
-			   *head = NULL,
-			   *tail = NULL;
+		*head = NULL,
+		*tail = NULL;
 
+	/* Check the presence of recovery command file */
 	fd = AllocateFile(RECOVERY_COMMAND_FILE, "r");
 	if (fd == NULL)
 	{
@@ -4040,72 +4030,63 @@ readRecoveryCommandFile(void)
 
 	FreeFile(fd);
 
+	/*
+	 * Parse each item in recovery command file and set the related GUC
+	 * parameters in consequence. Priority is given to recovery command
+	 * file if parameters are already set in postgresql.conf.
+	 */
 	for (item = head; item; item = item->next)
 	{
 		if (strcmp(item->name, "restore_command") == 0)
 		{
-			recoveryRestoreCommand = pstrdup(item->value);
+			SetConfigOption("restore_command",
+							pstrdup(item->value), PGC_POSTMASTER, PGC_S_OVERRIDE);
 			ereport(DEBUG2,
 					(errmsg_internal("restore_command = '%s'",
-									 recoveryRestoreCommand)));
+									 restore_command)));
 		}
 		else if (strcmp(item->name, "recovery_end_command") == 0)
 		{
-			recoveryEndCommand = pstrdup(item->value);
+			SetConfigOption("recovery_end_command",
+							pstrdup(item->value), PGC_POSTMASTER, PGC_S_OVERRIDE);
 			ereport(DEBUG2,
 					(errmsg_internal("recovery_end_command = '%s'",
-									 recoveryEndCommand)));
+									 recovery_end_command)));
 		}
 		else if (strcmp(item->name, "archive_cleanup_command") == 0)
 		{
-			archiveCleanupCommand = pstrdup(item->value);
+			SetConfigOption("archive_cleanup_command",
+							pstrdup(item->value), PGC_POSTMASTER, PGC_S_OVERRIDE);
 			ereport(DEBUG2,
 					(errmsg_internal("archive_cleanup_command = '%s'",
-									 archiveCleanupCommand)));
+									 archive_cleanup_command)));
 		}
 		else if (strcmp(item->name, "pause_at_recovery_target") == 0)
 		{
-			if (!parse_bool(item->value, &recoveryPauseAtTarget))
-				ereport(ERROR,
-						(errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_PARAMETER_VALUE),
-						 errmsg("parameter \"%s\" requires a Boolean value", "pause_at_recovery_target")));
+			SetConfigOption("pause_at_recovery_target",
+							pstrdup(item->value), PGC_POSTMASTER, PGC_S_OVERRIDE);
 			ereport(DEBUG2,
 					(errmsg_internal("pause_at_recovery_target = '%s'",
-									 item->value)));
+									 pause_at_recovery_target ? "true" : "false")));
 		}
 		else if (strcmp(item->name, "recovery_target_timeline") == 0)
 		{
-			rtliGiven = true;
-			if (strcmp(item->value, "latest") == 0)
-				rtli = 0;
-			else
-			{
-				errno = 0;
-				rtli = (TimeLineID) strtoul(item->value, NULL, 0);
-				if (errno == EINVAL || errno == ERANGE)
-					ereport(FATAL,
-							(errmsg("recovery_target_timeline is not a valid number: \"%s\"",
-									item->value)));
-			}
-			if (rtli)
+			SetConfigOption("recovery_target_timeline",
+							pstrdup(item->value), PGC_POSTMASTER, PGC_S_OVERRIDE);
+			if (strcmp(recovery_target_timeline_string, "") != 0)
 				ereport(DEBUG2,
-				   (errmsg_internal("recovery_target_timeline = %u", rtli)));
-			else
-				ereport(DEBUG2,
-					 (errmsg_internal("recovery_target_timeline = latest")));
+						(errmsg_internal("recovery_target_timeline = %u",
+										 recovery_target_timeline)));
+			ereport(DEBUG2,
+					(errmsg_internal("recovery_target_timeline = latest")));
 		}
 		else if (strcmp(item->name, "recovery_target_xid") == 0)
 		{
-			errno = 0;
-			recoveryTargetXid = (TransactionId) strtoul(item->value, NULL, 0);
-			if (errno == EINVAL || errno == ERANGE)
-				ereport(FATAL,
-				 (errmsg("recovery_target_xid is not a valid number: \"%s\"",
-						 item->value)));
+			SetConfigOption("recovery_target_xid",
+							pstrdup(item->value), PGC_POSTMASTER, PGC_S_OVERRIDE);
 			ereport(DEBUG2,
 					(errmsg_internal("recovery_target_xid = %u",
-									 recoveryTargetXid)));
-			recoveryTarget = RECOVERY_TARGET_XID;
+									 recovery_target_xid)));
 		}
 		else if (strcmp(item->name, "recovery_target_time") == 0)
 		{
@@ -4113,22 +4094,15 @@ readRecoveryCommandFile(void)
 			 * if recovery_target_xid or recovery_target_name specified, then
 			 * this overrides recovery_target_time
 			 */
-			if (recoveryTarget == RECOVERY_TARGET_XID ||
-				recoveryTarget == RECOVERY_TARGET_NAME)
+			if (recovery_target == RECOVERY_TARGET_XID ||
+				recovery_target == RECOVERY_TARGET_NAME)
 				continue;
-			recoveryTarget = RECOVERY_TARGET_TIME;
 
-			/*
-			 * Convert the time string given by the user to TimestampTz form.
-			 */
-			recoveryTargetTime =
-				DatumGetTimestampTz(DirectFunctionCall3(timestamptz_in,
-												CStringGetDatum(item->value),
-												ObjectIdGetDatum(InvalidOid),
-														Int32GetDatum(-1)));
+			SetConfigOption("recovery_target_time",
+							pstrdup(item->value), PGC_POSTMASTER, PGC_S_OVERRIDE);
 			ereport(DEBUG2,
 					(errmsg_internal("recovery_target_time = '%s'",
-								   timestamptz_to_str(recoveryTargetTime))));
+									 timestamptz_to_str(recovery_target_time))));
 		}
 		else if (strcmp(item->name, "recovery_target_name") == 0)
 		{
@@ -4136,58 +4110,45 @@ readRecoveryCommandFile(void)
 			 * if recovery_target_xid specified, then this overrides
 			 * recovery_target_name
 			 */
-			if (recoveryTarget == RECOVERY_TARGET_XID)
+			if (recovery_target == RECOVERY_TARGET_XID)
 				continue;
-			recoveryTarget = RECOVERY_TARGET_NAME;
-
-			recoveryTargetName = pstrdup(item->value);
-			if (strlen(recoveryTargetName) >= MAXFNAMELEN)
-				ereport(FATAL,
-						(errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_PARAMETER_VALUE),
-						 errmsg("recovery_target_name is too long (maximum %d characters)",
-								MAXFNAMELEN - 1)));
 
+			SetConfigOption("recovery_target_name",
+							pstrdup(item->value), PGC_POSTMASTER, PGC_S_OVERRIDE);
 			ereport(DEBUG2,
 					(errmsg_internal("recovery_target_name = '%s'",
-									 recoveryTargetName)));
+									 recovery_target_name)));
 		}
 		else if (strcmp(item->name, "recovery_target_inclusive") == 0)
 		{
-			/*
-			 * does nothing if a recovery_target is not also set
-			 */
-			if (!parse_bool(item->value, &recoveryTargetInclusive))
-				ereport(ERROR,
-						(errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_PARAMETER_VALUE),
-						 errmsg("parameter \"%s\" requires a Boolean value",
-								"recovery_target_inclusive")));
+			SetConfigOption("recovery_target_inclusive",
+							pstrdup(item->value), PGC_POSTMASTER, PGC_S_OVERRIDE);
 			ereport(DEBUG2,
 					(errmsg_internal("recovery_target_inclusive = %s",
-									 item->value)));
+									 recovery_target_inclusive ? "true" : "false")));
 		}
 		else if (strcmp(item->name, "standby_mode") == 0)
 		{
-			if (!parse_bool(item->value, &StandbyMode))
-				ereport(ERROR,
-						(errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_PARAMETER_VALUE),
-						 errmsg("parameter \"%s\" requires a Boolean value",
-								"standby_mode")));
+			SetConfigOption("standby_mode",
+							pstrdup(item->value), PGC_POSTMASTER, PGC_S_OVERRIDE);
 			ereport(DEBUG2,
 					(errmsg_internal("standby_mode = '%s'", item->value)));
 		}
 		else if (strcmp(item->name, "primary_conninfo") == 0)
 		{
-			PrimaryConnInfo = pstrdup(item->value);
+			SetConfigOption("primary_conninfo",
+							pstrdup(item->value), PGC_POSTMASTER, PGC_S_OVERRIDE);
 			ereport(DEBUG2,
 					(errmsg_internal("primary_conninfo = '%s'",
-									 PrimaryConnInfo)));
+									 primary_conninfo)));
 		}
 		else if (strcmp(item->name, "trigger_file") == 0)
 		{
-			TriggerFile = pstrdup(item->value);
+			SetConfigOption("trigger_file",
+							pstrdup(item->value), PGC_POSTMASTER, PGC_S_OVERRIDE);
 			ereport(DEBUG2,
 					(errmsg_internal("trigger_file = '%s'",
-									 TriggerFile)));
+									 trigger_file)));
 		}
 		else
 			ereport(FATAL,
@@ -4195,23 +4156,20 @@ readRecoveryCommandFile(void)
 							item->name)));
 	}
 
-	/*
-	 * Check for compulsory parameters
-	 */
-	if (StandbyMode)
+	/* Check for compulsory parameters */
+	if (standby_mode)
 	{
-		if (PrimaryConnInfo == NULL && recoveryRestoreCommand == NULL)
+		if (!restore_command[0] && !primary_conninfo[0])
 			ereport(WARNING,
-					(errmsg("recovery command file \"%s\" specified neither primary_conninfo nor restore_command",
-							RECOVERY_COMMAND_FILE),
+					(errmsg("Neither primary_conninfo nor restore_command specified"),
 					 errhint("The database server will regularly poll the pg_xlog subdirectory to check for files placed there.")));
 	}
 	else
 	{
-		if (recoveryRestoreCommand == NULL)
+		if (!restore_command[0])
 			ereport(FATAL,
-					(errmsg("recovery command file \"%s\" must specify restore_command when standby mode is not enabled",
-							RECOVERY_COMMAND_FILE)));
+					(errmsg("restore_command must be specified when "
+							"standby_mode is not enabled")));
 	}
 
 	/* Enable fetching from archive recovery area */
@@ -4223,16 +4181,17 @@ readRecoveryCommandFile(void)
 	 * command and set InArchiveRecovery, because we need to fetch timeline
 	 * history files from the archive.
 	 */
-	if (rtliGiven)
+	if (strcmp(recovery_target_timeline_string, "") != 0)
 	{
-		if (rtli)
+		if (recovery_target_timeline)
 		{
 			/* Timeline 1 does not have a history file, all else should */
-			if (rtli != 1 && !existsTimeLineHistory(rtli))
+			if (recovery_target_timeline != 1 &&
+				!existsTimeLineHistory(recovery_target_timeline))
 				ereport(FATAL,
 						(errmsg("recovery target timeline %u does not exist",
-								rtli)));
-			recoveryTargetTLI = rtli;
+								recovery_target_timeline)));
+			recoveryTargetTLI = recovery_target_timeline;
 			recoveryTargetIsLatest = false;
 		}
 		else
@@ -4385,7 +4344,7 @@ recoveryStopsHere(XLogRecord *record, bool *includeThis)
 		return false;
 
 	/* Do we have a PITR target at all? */
-	if (recoveryTarget == RECOVERY_TARGET_UNSET)
+	if (recovery_target == RECOVERY_TARGET_UNSET)
 	{
 		/*
 		 * Save timestamp of latest transaction commit/abort if this is a
@@ -4396,7 +4355,7 @@ recoveryStopsHere(XLogRecord *record, bool *includeThis)
 		return false;
 	}
 
-	if (recoveryTarget == RECOVERY_TARGET_XID)
+	if (recovery_target == RECOVERY_TARGET_XID)
 	{
 		/*
 		 * There can be only one transaction end record with this exact
@@ -4407,17 +4366,17 @@ recoveryStopsHere(XLogRecord *record, bool *includeThis)
 		 * they complete. A higher numbered xid will complete before you about
 		 * 50% of the time...
 		 */
-		stopsHere = (record->xl_xid == recoveryTargetXid);
+		stopsHere = (record->xl_xid == recovery_target_xid);
 		if (stopsHere)
-			*includeThis = recoveryTargetInclusive;
+			*includeThis = recovery_target_inclusive;
 	}
-	else if (recoveryTarget == RECOVERY_TARGET_NAME)
+	else if (recovery_target == RECOVERY_TARGET_NAME)
 	{
 		/*
 		 * There can be many restore points that share the same name, so we
 		 * stop at the first one
 		 */
-		stopsHere = (strcmp(recordRPName, recoveryTargetName) == 0);
+		stopsHere = (strcmp(recordRPName, recovery_target_name) == 0);
 
 		/*
 		 * Ignore recoveryTargetInclusive because this is not a transaction
@@ -4432,16 +4391,17 @@ recoveryStopsHere(XLogRecord *record, bool *includeThis)
 		 * we stop after the last one, if we are inclusive, or stop at the
 		 * first one if we are exclusive
 		 */
-		if (recoveryTargetInclusive)
-			stopsHere = (recordXtime > recoveryTargetTime);
+		if (recovery_target_inclusive)
+			stopsHere = (recordXtime > recovery_target_time);
 		else
-			stopsHere = (recordXtime >= recoveryTargetTime);
+			stopsHere = (recordXtime >= recovery_target_time);
 		if (stopsHere)
 			*includeThis = false;
 	}
 
 	if (stopsHere)
 	{
+		recoveryStopTarget = recovery_target;
 		recoveryStopXid = record->xl_xid;
 		recoveryStopTime = recordXtime;
 		recoveryStopAfter = *includeThis;
@@ -4789,36 +4749,28 @@ StartupXLOG(void)
 	recoveryTargetTLI = ControlFile->checkPointCopy.ThisTimeLineID;
 
 	/*
-	 * Check for recovery control file, and if so set up state for offline
-	 * recovery
+	 * Check for recovery trigger file, and if so set up state for offline
+	 * recovery.
 	 */
 	readRecoveryCommandFile();
 
-	/*
-	 * Save archive_cleanup_command in shared memory so that other processes
-	 * can see it.
-	 */
-	strncpy(XLogCtl->archiveCleanupCommand,
-			archiveCleanupCommand ? archiveCleanupCommand : "",
-			sizeof(XLogCtl->archiveCleanupCommand));
-
 	if (InArchiveRecovery)
 	{
-		if (StandbyMode)
+		if (standby_mode)
 			ereport(LOG,
 					(errmsg("entering standby mode")));
-		else if (recoveryTarget == RECOVERY_TARGET_XID)
+		else if (recovery_target == RECOVERY_TARGET_XID)
 			ereport(LOG,
 					(errmsg("starting point-in-time recovery to XID %u",
-							recoveryTargetXid)));
-		else if (recoveryTarget == RECOVERY_TARGET_TIME)
+							recovery_target_xid)));
+		else if (recovery_target == RECOVERY_TARGET_TIME)
 			ereport(LOG,
 					(errmsg("starting point-in-time recovery to %s",
-							timestamptz_to_str(recoveryTargetTime))));
-		else if (recoveryTarget == RECOVERY_TARGET_NAME)
+							timestamptz_to_str(recovery_target_time))));
+		else if (recovery_target == RECOVERY_TARGET_NAME)
 			ereport(LOG,
 					(errmsg("starting point-in-time recovery to \"%s\"",
-							recoveryTargetName)));
+							recovery_target_name)));
 		else
 			ereport(LOG,
 					(errmsg("starting archive recovery")));
@@ -4828,7 +4780,7 @@ StartupXLOG(void)
 	 * Take ownership of the wakeup latch if we're going to sleep during
 	 * recovery.
 	 */
-	if (StandbyMode)
+	if (standby_mode)
 		OwnLatch(&XLogCtl->recoveryWakeupLatch);
 
 	/* Set up XLOG reader facility */
@@ -4897,7 +4849,7 @@ StartupXLOG(void)
 					(errmsg("checkpoint record is at %X/%X",
 							(uint32) (checkPointLoc >> 32), (uint32) checkPointLoc)));
 		}
-		else if (StandbyMode)
+		else if (standby_mode)
 		{
 			/*
 			 * The last valid checkpoint record required for a streaming
@@ -5030,7 +4982,7 @@ StartupXLOG(void)
 
 	/*
 	 * Check whether we need to force recovery from WAL.  If it appears to
-	 * have been a clean shutdown and we did not have a recovery.conf file,
+	 * have been a clean shutdown and we did not have a recovery.trigger file,
 	 * then assume no recovery needed.
 	 */
 	if (checkPoint.redo < RecPtr)
@@ -5044,7 +4996,7 @@ StartupXLOG(void)
 		InRecovery = true;
 	else if (InArchiveRecovery)
 	{
-		/* force recovery due to presence of recovery.conf */
+		/* force recovery due to presence of recovery.trigger */
 		InRecovery = true;
 	}
 
@@ -5357,7 +5309,7 @@ StartupXLOG(void)
 				 */
 				if (recoveryStopsHere(record, &recoveryApply))
 				{
-					if (recoveryPauseAtTarget)
+					if (pause_at_recovery_target)
 					{
 						SetRecoveryPause(true);
 						recoveryPausesHere();
@@ -5507,7 +5459,7 @@ StartupXLOG(void)
 	 * We don't need the latch anymore. It's not strictly necessary to disown
 	 * it, but let's do it for the sake of tidiness.
 	 */
-	if (StandbyMode)
+	if (standby_mode)
 		DisownLatch(&XLogCtl->recoveryWakeupLatch);
 
 	/*
@@ -5515,7 +5467,7 @@ StartupXLOG(void)
 	 * recovery to force fetching the files (which would be required at end of
 	 * recovery, e.g., timeline history file) from archive or pg_xlog.
 	 */
-	StandbyMode = false;
+	SetConfigOption("standby_mode", "false", PGC_POSTMASTER, PGC_S_OVERRIDE);
 
 	/*
 	 * Re-fetch the last valid or last applied record, so we can identify the
@@ -5594,17 +5546,17 @@ StartupXLOG(void)
 		 * Create a comment for the history file to explain why and where
 		 * timeline changed.
 		 */
-		if (recoveryTarget == RECOVERY_TARGET_XID)
+		if (recovery_target == RECOVERY_TARGET_XID)
 			snprintf(reason, sizeof(reason),
 					 "%s transaction %u",
 					 recoveryStopAfter ? "after" : "before",
 					 recoveryStopXid);
-		else if (recoveryTarget == RECOVERY_TARGET_TIME)
+		else if (recovery_target == RECOVERY_TARGET_TIME)
 			snprintf(reason, sizeof(reason),
 					 "%s %s\n",
 					 recoveryStopAfter ? "after" : "before",
 					 timestamptz_to_str(recoveryStopTime));
-		else if (recoveryTarget == RECOVERY_TARGET_NAME)
+		else if (recovery_target == RECOVERY_TARGET_NAME)
 			snprintf(reason, sizeof(reason),
 					 "at restore point \"%s\"",
 					 recoveryStopName);
@@ -5738,8 +5690,8 @@ StartupXLOG(void)
 		/*
 		 * And finally, execute the recovery_end_command, if any.
 		 */
-		if (recoveryEndCommand)
-			ExecuteRecoveryCommand(recoveryEndCommand,
+		if (recovery_end_command[0])
+			ExecuteRecoveryCommand(recovery_end_command,
 								   "recovery_end_command",
 								   true);
 	}
@@ -6592,7 +6544,7 @@ CreateCheckPoint(int flags)
 		XLogRecPtr	curInsert;
 
 		INSERT_RECPTR(curInsert, Insert, Insert->curridx);
-		if (curInsert == ControlFile->checkPoint + 
+		if (curInsert == ControlFile->checkPoint +
 			MAXALIGN(SizeOfXLogRecord + sizeof(CheckPoint)) &&
 			ControlFile->checkPoint == ControlFile->checkPointCopy.redo)
 		{
@@ -7169,8 +7121,8 @@ CreateRestartPoint(int flags)
 	/*
 	 * Finally, execute archive_cleanup_command, if any.
 	 */
-	if (XLogCtl->archiveCleanupCommand[0])
-		ExecuteRecoveryCommand(XLogCtl->archiveCleanupCommand,
+	if (archive_cleanup_command[0])
+		ExecuteRecoveryCommand(archive_cleanup_command,
 							   "archive_cleanup_command",
 							   false);
 
@@ -8886,7 +8838,7 @@ XLogPageRead(XLogReaderState *xlogreader, XLogRecPtr targetPagePtr, int reqLen,
 		 * Request a restartpoint if we've replayed too much xlog since the
 		 * last one.
 		 */
-		if (StandbyMode && bgwriterLaunched)
+		if (standby_mode && bgwriterLaunched)
 		{
 			if (XLogCheckpointNeeded(readSegNo))
 			{
@@ -8909,7 +8861,7 @@ retry:
 		(readSource == XLOG_FROM_STREAM &&
 		 receivedUpto < targetPagePtr + reqLen))
 	{
-		if (StandbyMode)
+		if (standby_mode)
 		{
 			if (!WaitForWALToBecomeAvailable(targetPagePtr + reqLen,
 											 private->randAccess,
@@ -8998,7 +8950,7 @@ next_record_is_invalid:
 	readSource = 0;
 
 	/* In standby-mode, keep trying */
-	if (StandbyMode)
+	if (standby_mode)
 		goto retry;
 	else
 		return -1;
@@ -9105,7 +9057,7 @@ WaitForWALToBecomeAvailable(XLogRecPtr RecPtr, bool randAccess,
 					 * that when we later jump backwards to start redo at
 					 * RedoStartLSN, we will have the logs streamed already.
 					 */
-					if (PrimaryConnInfo)
+					if (primary_conninfo[0])
 					{
 						XLogRecPtr ptr;
 						TimeLineID tli;
@@ -9126,7 +9078,7 @@ WaitForWALToBecomeAvailable(XLogRecPtr RecPtr, bool randAccess,
 									 tli, curFileTLI);
 						}
 						curFileTLI = tli;
-						RequestXLogStreaming(curFileTLI, ptr, PrimaryConnInfo);
+						RequestXLogStreaming(curFileTLI, ptr);
 					}
 					/*
 					 * Move to XLOG_FROM_STREAM state in either case. We'll get
@@ -9412,14 +9364,14 @@ CheckForStandbyTrigger(void)
 		return true;
 	}
 
-	if (TriggerFile == NULL)
+	if (!trigger_file[0])
 		return false;
 
-	if (stat(TriggerFile, &stat_buf) == 0)
+	if (stat(trigger_file, &stat_buf) == 0)
 	{
 		ereport(LOG,
-				(errmsg("trigger file found: %s", TriggerFile)));
-		unlink(TriggerFile);
+				(errmsg("trigger file found: %s", trigger_file)));
+		unlink(trigger_file);
 		triggered = true;
 		return true;
 	}
diff --git a/src/backend/access/transam/xlogarchive.c b/src/backend/access/transam/xlogarchive.c
index 52922da..20275c8 100644
--- a/src/backend/access/transam/xlogarchive.c
+++ b/src/backend/access/transam/xlogarchive.c
@@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ RestoreArchivedFile(char *path, const char *xlogfname,
 	TimeLineID	restartTli;
 
 	/* In standby mode, restore_command might not be supplied */
-	if (recoveryRestoreCommand == NULL)
+	if (restore_command == NULL)
 		goto not_available;
 
 	/*
@@ -150,7 +150,7 @@ RestoreArchivedFile(char *path, const char *xlogfname,
 	endp = xlogRestoreCmd + MAXPGPATH - 1;
 	*endp = '\0';
 
-	for (sp = recoveryRestoreCommand; *sp; sp++)
+	for (sp = restore_command; *sp; sp++)
 	{
 		if (*sp == '%')
 		{
@@ -236,7 +236,7 @@ RestoreArchivedFile(char *path, const char *xlogfname,
 				 * incorrectly conclude we've reached the end of WAL and we're
 				 * done recovering ...
 				 */
-				if (StandbyMode && stat_buf.st_size < expectedSize)
+				if (standby_mode && stat_buf.st_size < expectedSize)
 					elevel = DEBUG1;
 				else
 					elevel = FATAL;
diff --git a/src/backend/commands/extension.c b/src/backend/commands/extension.c
index c02101f..9babd74 100644
--- a/src/backend/commands/extension.c
+++ b/src/backend/commands/extension.c
@@ -9,7 +9,7 @@
  * dependent objects can be associated with it.  An extension is created by
  * populating the pg_extension catalog from a "control" file.
  * The extension control file is parsed with the same parser we use for
- * postgresql.conf and recovery.conf.  An extension also has an installation
+ * postgresql.conf.  An extension also has an installation
  * script file, containing SQL commands to create the extension's objects.
  *
  * Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2013, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
diff --git a/src/backend/replication/walreceiver.c b/src/backend/replication/walreceiver.c
index 7359297..325f6de 100644
--- a/src/backend/replication/walreceiver.c
+++ b/src/backend/replication/walreceiver.c
@@ -185,7 +185,6 @@ DisableWalRcvImmediateExit(void)
 void
 WalReceiverMain(void)
 {
-	char		conninfo[MAXCONNINFO];
 	XLogRecPtr	startpoint;
 	TimeLineID	startpointTLI;
 	TimeLineID	primaryTLI;
@@ -239,7 +238,6 @@ WalReceiverMain(void)
 	walrcv->walRcvState = WALRCV_STREAMING;
 
 	/* Fetch information required to start streaming */
-	strlcpy(conninfo, (char *) walrcv->conninfo, MAXCONNINFO);
 	startpoint = walrcv->receiveStart;
 	startpointTLI = walrcv->receiveStartTLI;
 
@@ -306,7 +304,7 @@ WalReceiverMain(void)
 
 	/* Establish the connection to the primary for XLOG streaming */
 	EnableWalRcvImmediateExit();
-	walrcv_connect(conninfo);
+	walrcv_connect(primary_conninfo);
 	DisableWalRcvImmediateExit();
 
 	first_stream = true;
@@ -404,8 +402,21 @@ WalReceiverMain(void)
 
 				if (got_SIGHUP)
 				{
+					char    *conninfo = pstrdup(primary_conninfo);
+
 					got_SIGHUP = false;
 					ProcessConfigFile(PGC_SIGHUP);
+
+					/*
+					 * If primary_conninfo has been changed while walreceiver is running,
+					 * shut down walreceiver so that new walreceiver is started and
+					 * it initiates replication with new primary_conninfo.
+					 */
+					if (strcmp(conninfo, primary_conninfo) != 0)
+						ereport(FATAL,
+								(errcode(ERRCODE_ADMIN_SHUTDOWN),
+								 errmsg("terminating walreceiver process because primary_conninfo was changed")));
+					pfree(conninfo);
 				}
 
 				/* Wait a while for data to arrive */
diff --git a/src/backend/replication/walreceiverfuncs.c b/src/backend/replication/walreceiverfuncs.c
index d414808..d6a5e06 100644
--- a/src/backend/replication/walreceiverfuncs.c
+++ b/src/backend/replication/walreceiverfuncs.c
@@ -219,11 +219,10 @@ ShutdownWalRcv(void)
 /*
  * Request postmaster to start walreceiver.
  *
- * recptr indicates the position where streaming should begin, and conninfo
- * is a libpq connection string to use.
+ * recptr indicates the position where streaming should begin.
  */
 void
-RequestXLogStreaming(TimeLineID tli, XLogRecPtr recptr, const char *conninfo)
+RequestXLogStreaming(TimeLineID tli, XLogRecPtr recptr)
 {
 	/* use volatile pointer to prevent code rearrangement */
 	volatile WalRcvData *walrcv = WalRcv;
@@ -245,11 +244,6 @@ RequestXLogStreaming(TimeLineID tli, XLogRecPtr recptr, const char *conninfo)
 	Assert(walrcv->walRcvState == WALRCV_STOPPED ||
 		   walrcv->walRcvState == WALRCV_WAITING);
 
-	if (conninfo != NULL)
-		strlcpy((char *) walrcv->conninfo, conninfo, MAXCONNINFO);
-	else
-		walrcv->conninfo[0] = '\0';
-
 	if (walrcv->walRcvState == WALRCV_STOPPED)
 	{
 		launch = true;
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/misc/guc.c b/src/backend/utils/misc/guc.c
index 6128694..f49b8fe 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/misc/guc.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/misc/guc.c
@@ -30,6 +30,7 @@
 #include "access/transam.h"
 #include "access/twophase.h"
 #include "access/xact.h"
+#include "access/xlog_internal.h"
 #include "catalog/namespace.h"
 #include "commands/async.h"
 #include "commands/prepare.h"
@@ -196,6 +197,14 @@ static bool check_application_name(char **newval, void **extra, GucSource source
 static void assign_application_name(const char *newval, void *extra);
 static const char *show_unix_socket_permissions(void);
 static const char *show_log_file_mode(void);
+static bool check_recovery_target_xid(char **newval, void **extra, GucSource source);
+static void assign_recovery_target_xid(const char *newval, void *extra);
+static bool check_recovery_target_name(char **newval, void **extra, GucSource source);
+static void assign_recovery_target_name(const char *newval, void *extra);
+static bool check_recovery_target_time(char **newval, void **extra, GucSource source);
+static void assign_recovery_target_time(const char *newval, void *extra);
+static bool check_recovery_target_timeline(char **newval, void **extra, GucSource source);
+static void assign_recovery_target_timeline(const char *newval, void *extra);
 
 static char *config_enum_get_options(struct config_enum * record,
 						const char *prefix, const char *suffix,
@@ -468,6 +477,8 @@ static int	wal_block_size;
 static int	wal_segment_size;
 static bool integer_datetimes;
 static int	effective_io_concurrency;
+static char *recovery_target_xid_string;
+static char *recovery_target_time_string;
 
 /* should be static, but commands/variable.c needs to get at this */
 char	   *role_string;
@@ -547,6 +558,10 @@ const char *const config_group_names[] =
 	gettext_noop("Write-Ahead Log / Checkpoints"),
 	/* WAL_ARCHIVING */
 	gettext_noop("Write-Ahead Log / Archiving"),
+	/* WAL_ARCHIVE_RECOVERY */
+	gettext_noop("Write-Ahead Log / Archive Recovery"),
+	/* WAL_RECOVERY_TARGET */
+	gettext_noop("Write-Ahead Log / Recovery Target"),
 	/* REPLICATION */
 	gettext_noop("Replication"),
 	/* REPLICATION_SENDING */
@@ -1375,6 +1390,36 @@ static struct config_bool ConfigureNamesBool[] =
 	},
 
 	{
+		{"recovery_target_inclusive", PGC_SIGHUP, WAL_RECOVERY_TARGET,
+			gettext_noop("Sets whether to include or exclude transaction with recovery target."),
+			NULL
+		},
+		&recovery_target_inclusive,
+		true,
+		NULL, NULL, NULL
+	},
+
+	{
+		{"pause_at_recovery_target", PGC_SIGHUP, WAL_RECOVERY_TARGET,
+			gettext_noop("Sets whether recovery should pause when the recovery target is reached."),
+			NULL
+		},
+		&pause_at_recovery_target,
+		true,
+		NULL, NULL, NULL
+	},
+
+	{
+		{"standby_mode", PGC_POSTMASTER, REPLICATION_STANDBY,
+			gettext_noop("Sets whether to start the server as a standby."),
+			NULL
+		},
+		&standby_mode,
+		false,
+		NULL, NULL, NULL
+	},
+
+	{
 		{"hot_standby", PGC_POSTMASTER, REPLICATION_STANDBY,
 			gettext_noop("Allows connections and queries during recovery."),
 			NULL
@@ -2543,6 +2588,97 @@ static struct config_string ConfigureNamesString[] =
 	},
 
 	{
+		{"restore_command", PGC_SIGHUP, WAL_ARCHIVE_RECOVERY,
+			gettext_noop("Sets the shell command that will retrieve an archived WAL file."),
+			NULL
+		},
+		&restore_command,
+		"",
+		NULL, NULL, NULL
+	},
+
+	{
+		{"archive_cleanup_command", PGC_SIGHUP, WAL_ARCHIVE_RECOVERY,
+			gettext_noop("Sets the shell command that will be executed at every restartpoint."),
+			NULL
+		},
+		&archive_cleanup_command,
+		"",
+		NULL, NULL, NULL
+	},
+
+	{
+		{"recovery_end_command", PGC_SIGHUP, WAL_ARCHIVE_RECOVERY,
+			gettext_noop("Sets the shell command that will be executed once only at the end of recovery."),
+			NULL
+		},
+		&recovery_end_command,
+		"",
+		NULL, NULL, NULL
+	},
+
+	{
+		{"recovery_target_xid", PGC_SIGHUP, WAL_RECOVERY_TARGET,
+			gettext_noop("Sets the transaction ID up to which recovery will proceed."),
+			NULL
+		},
+		&recovery_target_xid_string,
+		"",
+		check_recovery_target_xid, assign_recovery_target_xid, NULL
+	},
+
+	{
+		{"recovery_target_name", PGC_SIGHUP, WAL_RECOVERY_TARGET,
+			gettext_noop("Sets the named restore point."),
+			NULL
+		},
+		&recovery_target_name,
+		"",
+		check_recovery_target_name, assign_recovery_target_name, NULL
+	},
+
+	{
+		{"recovery_target_time", PGC_SIGHUP, WAL_RECOVERY_TARGET,
+			gettext_noop("Sets the time stamp up to which recovery will proceed."),
+			NULL
+		},
+		&recovery_target_time_string,
+		"",
+		check_recovery_target_time, assign_recovery_target_time, NULL
+	},
+
+	{
+		{"recovery_target_timeline", PGC_POSTMASTER, WAL_RECOVERY_TARGET,
+			gettext_noop("Sets recoverying into a particular timeline."),
+			NULL
+		},
+		&recovery_target_timeline_string,
+		"",
+		check_recovery_target_timeline, assign_recovery_target_timeline, NULL
+	},
+
+	{
+		{"primary_conninfo", PGC_SIGHUP, REPLICATION_STANDBY,
+			gettext_noop("Sets the connection string to be used to connect with the primary."),
+			NULL,
+			GUC_SUPERUSER_ONLY
+		},
+		&primary_conninfo,
+		"",
+		NULL, NULL, NULL
+	},
+
+	{
+		{"trigger_file", PGC_SIGHUP, REPLICATION_STANDBY,
+			gettext_noop("Sets the trigger file whose presence ends recovery in the standby."),
+			NULL
+		},
+		&trigger_file,
+		"",
+		NULL, NULL, NULL
+	},
+
+	{
 		{"client_encoding", PGC_USERSET, CLIENT_CONN_LOCALE,
 			gettext_noop("Sets the client's character set encoding."),
 			NULL,
@@ -8760,4 +8896,158 @@ show_log_file_mode(void)
 	return buf;
 }
 
+static bool
+check_recovery_target_xid(char **newval, void **extra, GucSource source)
+{
+	TransactionId   xid;
+	TransactionId   *myextra;
+
+	if (strcmp(*newval, "") == 0)
+		xid = InvalidTransactionId;
+	else
+	{
+		errno = 0;
+		xid = (TransactionId) strtoul(*newval, NULL, 0);
+		if (errno == EINVAL || errno == ERANGE)
+		{
+			GUC_check_errdetail("recovery_target_xid is not a valid number: \"%s\"",
+								*newval);
+			return false;
+		}
+	}
+
+	myextra = (TransactionId *) guc_malloc(ERROR, sizeof(TransactionId));
+	*myextra = xid;
+	*extra = (void *) myextra;
+
+	return true;
+}
+
+static void
+assign_recovery_target_xid(const char *newval, void *extra)
+{
+	recovery_target_xid = *((TransactionId *) extra);
+
+	if (recovery_target_xid != InvalidTransactionId)
+		recovery_target = RECOVERY_TARGET_XID;
+	else if (recovery_target_name[0])
+		recovery_target = RECOVERY_TARGET_NAME;
+	else if (recovery_target_time != 0)
+		recovery_target = RECOVERY_TARGET_TIME;
+	else
+		recovery_target = RECOVERY_TARGET_UNSET;
+}
+
+static bool
+check_recovery_target_name(char **newval, void **extra, GucSource source)
+{
+	if (strlen(*newval) >= MAXFNAMELEN)
+	{
+		GUC_check_errdetail("\"recovery_target_name\" is too long (maximum %d characters)",
+							MAXFNAMELEN - 1);
+		return false;
+	}
+	return true;
+}
+
+static void
+assign_recovery_target_name(const char *newval, void *extra)
+{
+	if (recovery_target_xid != InvalidTransactionId)
+		recovery_target = RECOVERY_TARGET_XID;
+	else if (newval[0])
+		recovery_target = RECOVERY_TARGET_NAME;
+	else if (recovery_target_time != 0)
+		recovery_target = RECOVERY_TARGET_TIME;
+	else
+		recovery_target = RECOVERY_TARGET_UNSET;
+}
+
+static bool
+check_recovery_target_time(char **newval, void **extra, GucSource source)
+{
+	TimestampTz     time;
+	TimestampTz     *myextra;
+	MemoryContext oldcontext = CurrentMemoryContext;
+
+	PG_TRY();
+	{
+		time = (strcmp(*newval, "") == 0) ?
+			0 :
+			DatumGetTimestampTz(DirectFunctionCall3(timestamptz_in,
+													CStringGetDatum(*newval),
+													ObjectIdGetDatum(InvalidOid),
+													Int32GetDatum(-1)));
+	}
+	PG_CATCH();
+	{
+		ErrorData  *edata;
+
+		/* Save error info */
+		MemoryContextSwitchTo(oldcontext);
+		edata = CopyErrorData();
+		FlushErrorState();
+
+		/* Pass the error message */
+		GUC_check_errdetail("%s", edata->message);
+		FreeErrorData(edata);
+		return false;
+	}
+	PG_END_TRY();
+
+	myextra = (TimestampTz *) guc_malloc(ERROR, sizeof(TimestampTz));
+	*myextra = time;
+	*extra = (void *) myextra;
+
+	return true;
+}
+
+static void
+assign_recovery_target_time(const char *newval, void *extra)
+{
+	recovery_target_time = *((TimestampTz *) extra);
+
+	if (recovery_target_xid != InvalidTransactionId)
+		recovery_target = RECOVERY_TARGET_XID;
+	else if (recovery_target_name[0])
+		recovery_target = RECOVERY_TARGET_NAME;
+	else if (recovery_target_time != 0)
+		recovery_target = RECOVERY_TARGET_TIME;
+	else
+		recovery_target = RECOVERY_TARGET_UNSET;
+}
+
+static bool
+check_recovery_target_timeline(char **newval, void **extra, GucSource source)
+{
+	TimeLineID	tli = 0;
+	TimeLineID	*myextra;
+
+	if (strcmp(*newval, "") == 0 || strcmp(*newval, "latest") == 0)
+		tli = 0;
+	else
+	{
+		errno = 0;
+		tli = (TimeLineID) strtoul(*newval, NULL, 0);
+		if (errno == EINVAL || errno == ERANGE)
+		{
+			GUC_check_errdetail("recovery_target_timeline is not a valid number: \"%s\"",
+								*newval);
+			return false;
+		}
+	}
+
+	myextra = (TimeLineID *) guc_malloc(ERROR, sizeof(TimeLineID));
+	*myextra = tli;
+	*extra = (void *) myextra;
+
+	return true;
+}
+
+static void
+assign_recovery_target_timeline(const char *newval, void *extra)
+{
+	recovery_target_timeline = *((TimeLineID *) extra);
+}
+
 #include "guc-file.c"
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/misc/postgresql.conf.sample b/src/backend/utils/misc/postgresql.conf.sample
index 62aea2f..52a4e71 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/misc/postgresql.conf.sample
+++ b/src/backend/utils/misc/postgresql.conf.sample
@@ -198,6 +198,23 @@
 #archive_timeout = 0		# force a logfile segment switch after this
 				# number of seconds; 0 disables
 
+# - Archive Recovery -
+#restore_command = ''		# command to use to restore an archived logfile segment
+				# placeholders: %p = path of file to restore
+				#               %f = file name only
+				# e.g. 'cp /mnt/server/archivedir/%f %p'
+#archive_cleanup_command = ''	# command to execute at every restartpoint
+#recovery_end_command = ''	# command to execute at completion of recovery
+
+# - Recovery Target -
+#recovery_target_xid = ''
+#recovery_target_name = ''		# e.g. 'daily backup 2011-01-26'
+#recovery_target_time = ''		# e.g. '2004-07-14 22:39:00 EST'
+#recovery_target_timeline = ''		# timeline ID or 'latest'
+					# (change requires restart)
+#recovery_target_inclusive = on
+#pause_at_recovery_target = on		# Pause recovery once target is reached
+
 
 #------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 # REPLICATION
@@ -240,6 +257,11 @@
 #wal_receiver_timeout = 60s		# time that receiver waits for
 					# communication from master
 					# in milliseconds; 0 disables
+#standby_mode = off			# "on" starts the server as a standby
+					# (change requires restart)
+#primary_conninfo = ''			# connection string to connect to the master
+					# e.g. 'host=localhost port=5432'
+#trigger_file = ''			# trigger file to promote the standby
 
 
 #------------------------------------------------------------------------------
diff --git a/src/bin/pg_ctl/pg_ctl.c b/src/bin/pg_ctl/pg_ctl.c
index e412d71..3a02481 100644
--- a/src/bin/pg_ctl/pg_ctl.c
+++ b/src/bin/pg_ctl/pg_ctl.c
@@ -928,7 +928,7 @@ do_stop(void)
 		/*
 		 * If backup_label exists, an online backup is running. Warn the user
 		 * that smart shutdown will wait for it to finish. However, if
-		 * recovery.conf is also present, we're recovering from an online
+		 * recovery.trigger is also present, we're recovering from an online
 		 * backup instead of performing one.
 		 */
 		if (shutdown_mode == SMART_MODE &&
@@ -1016,7 +1016,7 @@ do_restart(void)
 		/*
 		 * If backup_label exists, an online backup is running. Warn the user
 		 * that smart shutdown will wait for it to finish. However, if
-		 * recovery.conf is also present, we're recovering from an online
+		 * recovery.trigger is also present, we're recovering from an online
 		 * backup instead of performing one.
 		 */
 		if (shutdown_mode == SMART_MODE &&
@@ -1127,7 +1127,7 @@ do_promote(void)
 		exit(1);
 	}
 
-	/* If recovery.conf doesn't exist, the server is not in standby mode */
+	/* If recovery.trigger doesn't exist, the server is not in standby mode */
 	if (stat(recovery_file, &statbuf) != 0)
 	{
 		write_stderr(_("%s: cannot promote server; "
@@ -2270,7 +2270,7 @@ main(int argc, char **argv)
 		snprintf(postopts_file, MAXPGPATH, "%s/postmaster.opts", pg_data);
 		snprintf(pid_file, MAXPGPATH, "%s/postmaster.pid", pg_data);
 		snprintf(backup_file, MAXPGPATH, "%s/backup_label", pg_data);
-		snprintf(recovery_file, MAXPGPATH, "%s/recovery.conf", pg_data);
+		snprintf(recovery_file, MAXPGPATH, "%s/recovery.trigger", pg_data);
 		snprintf(promote_file, MAXPGPATH, "%s/promote", pg_data);
 	}
 
diff --git a/src/include/access/xlog.h b/src/include/access/xlog.h
index 72e3242..c831345 100644
--- a/src/include/access/xlog.h
+++ b/src/include/access/xlog.h
@@ -190,6 +190,20 @@ extern char *XLogArchiveCommand;
 extern bool EnableHotStandby;
 extern bool fullPageWrites;
 extern bool log_checkpoints;
+extern char *restore_command;
+extern char *archive_cleanup_command;
+extern char *recovery_end_command;
+extern bool standby_mode;
+extern char *primary_conninfo;
+extern char *trigger_file;
+extern RecoveryTargetType recovery_target;
+extern TransactionId recovery_target_xid;
+extern TimestampTz recovery_target_time;
+extern char *recovery_target_name;
+extern bool recovery_target_inclusive;
+extern bool pause_at_recovery_target;
+extern char *recovery_target_timeline_string;
+extern TimeLineID recovery_target_timeline;
 
 /* WAL levels */
 typedef enum WalLevel
diff --git a/src/include/replication/walreceiver.h b/src/include/replication/walreceiver.h
index 72878f8..d51d86f 100644
--- a/src/include/replication/walreceiver.h
+++ b/src/include/replication/walreceiver.h
@@ -149,7 +149,7 @@ extern void WalRcvShmemInit(void);
 extern void ShutdownWalRcv(void);
 extern bool WalRcvStreaming(void);
 extern bool WalRcvRunning(void);
-extern void RequestXLogStreaming(TimeLineID tli, XLogRecPtr recptr, const char *conninfo);
+extern void RequestXLogStreaming(TimeLineID tli, XLogRecPtr recptr);
 extern XLogRecPtr GetWalRcvWriteRecPtr(XLogRecPtr *latestChunkStart, TimeLineID *receiveTLI);
 extern int	GetReplicationApplyDelay(void);
 extern int	GetReplicationTransferLatency(void);
diff --git a/src/include/utils/guc_tables.h b/src/include/utils/guc_tables.h
index 7360ce3..a2d3281 100644
--- a/src/include/utils/guc_tables.h
+++ b/src/include/utils/guc_tables.h
@@ -68,6 +68,8 @@ enum config_group
 	WAL_SETTINGS,
 	WAL_CHECKPOINTS,
 	WAL_ARCHIVING,
+	WAL_ARCHIVE_RECOVERY,
+	WAL_RECOVERY_TARGET,
 	REPLICATION,
 	REPLICATION_SENDING,
 	REPLICATION_MASTER,

diff --git a/contrib/pg_archivecleanup/pg_archivecleanup.c b/contrib/pg_archivecleanup/pg_archivecleanup.c
index e97a11c..fb01da9 100644
--- a/contrib/pg_archivecleanup/pg_archivecleanup.c
+++ b/contrib/pg_archivecleanup/pg_archivecleanup.c
@@ -255,7 +255,7 @@ usage(void)
 	printf("  -x EXT         clean up files if they have this extension\n");
 	printf("  -?, --help     show this help, then exit\n");
 	printf("\n"
-		   "For use as archive_cleanup_command in recovery.conf when standby_mode = on:\n"
+		   "For use as archive_cleanup_command in postgresql.conf when standby_mode = on:\n"
 		   "  archive_cleanup_command = 'pg_archivecleanup [OPTION]... ARCHIVELOCATION %%r'\n"
 		   "e.g.\n"
 		   "  archive_cleanup_command = 'pg_archivecleanup /mnt/server/archiverdir %%r'\n");
diff --git a/contrib/pg_standby/pg_standby.c b/contrib/pg_standby/pg_standby.c
index 659bd50..115c25e 100644
--- a/contrib/pg_standby/pg_standby.c
+++ b/contrib/pg_standby/pg_standby.c
@@ -531,7 +531,7 @@ usage(void)
 	printf("  -w MAXWAITTIME     max seconds to wait for a file (0=no limit) (default=0)\n");
 	printf("  -?, --help         show this help, then exit\n");
 	printf("\n"
-		   "Main intended use as restore_command in recovery.conf:\n"
+		   "Main intended use as restore_command in postgresql.conf:\n"
 		   "  restore_command = 'pg_standby [OPTION]... ARCHIVELOCATION %%f %%p %%r'\n"
 		   "e.g.\n"
 	"  restore_command = 'pg_standby /mnt/server/archiverdir %%f %%p %%r'\n");
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/backup.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/backup.sgml
index c4215be..f3040ff 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/backup.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/backup.sgml
@@ -1002,10 +1002,17 @@ SELECT pg_stop_backup();
    </listitem>
    <listitem>
     <para>
-     Create a recovery command file <filename>recovery.conf</> in the cluster
-     data directory (see <xref linkend="recovery-config">). You might
-     also want to temporarily modify <filename>pg_hba.conf</> to prevent
-     ordinary users from connecting until you are sure the recovery was successful.
+     Set up recovery parameters in <filename>postgresql.conf</> (see
+     <xref linkend="runtime-config-wal-archive-recovery"> and
+     <xref linkend="runtime-config-wal-recovery-target">).
+    </para>
+   </listitem>
+   <listitem>
+    <para>
+     Create a file called <filename>standby.enabled</> in the cluster data
+     directory. You might also want to temporarily modify <filename>pg_hba.conf</>
+     to prevent ordinary users from connecting until you are sure the recovery
+     was successful.
     </para>
    </listitem>
    <listitem>
@@ -1014,10 +1021,9 @@ SELECT pg_stop_backup();
      proceed to read through the archived WAL files it needs.  Should the
      recovery be terminated because of an external error, the server can
      simply be restarted and it will continue recovery.  Upon completion
-     of the recovery process, the server will rename
-     <filename>recovery.conf</> to <filename>recovery.done</> (to prevent
-     accidentally re-entering recovery mode later) and then
-     commence normal database operations.
+     of the recovery process, the server will delete
+     <filename>standby.enabled</> (to prevent accidentally re-entering
+     recovery mode later) and then commence normal database operations.
     </para>
    </listitem>
    <listitem>
@@ -1031,12 +1037,11 @@ SELECT pg_stop_backup();
    </para>
 
    <para>
-    The key part of all this is to set up a recovery configuration file that
-    describes how you want to recover and how far the recovery should
-    run.  You can use <filename>recovery.conf.sample</> (normally
-    located in the installation's <filename>share/</> directory) as a
-    prototype.  The one thing that you absolutely must specify in
-    <filename>recovery.conf</> is the <varname>restore_command</>,
+    The key part of all this is to set up recovery parameters that
+    specify how you want to recover and how far the recovery should
+    run. The one thing that you absolutely must specify in
+    <filename>postgresql.conf</> to recover from the backup is
+    the <varname>restore_command</>,
     which tells <productname>PostgreSQL</> how to retrieve archived
     WAL file segments.  Like the <varname>archive_command</>, this is
     a shell command string.  It can contain <literal>%f</>, which is
@@ -1090,7 +1095,7 @@ restore_command = 'cp /mnt/server/archivedir/%f %p'
    <para>
     If you want to recover to some previous point in time (say, right before
     the junior DBA dropped your main transaction table), just specify the
-    required stopping point in <filename>recovery.conf</>.  You can specify
+    required stopping point in <filename>postgresql.conf</>.  You can specify
     the stop point, known as the <quote>recovery target</>, either by
     date/time, named restore point or by completion of a specific transaction
     ID.  As of this writing only the date/time and named restore point options
@@ -1187,8 +1192,9 @@ restore_command = 'cp /mnt/server/archivedir/%f %p'
     The default behavior of recovery is to recover along the same timeline
     that was current when the base backup was taken.  If you wish to recover
     into some child timeline (that is, you want to return to some state that
-    was itself generated after a recovery attempt), you need to specify the
-    target timeline ID in <filename>recovery.conf</>.  You cannot recover into
+    was itself generated after a recovery attempt), you need to set
+    <xref linkend="guc-recovery-target-timeline"> to the
+    target timeline ID in <filename>postgresql.conf</>.  You cannot recover into
     timelines that branched off earlier than the base backup.
    </para>
   </sect2>
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/config.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/config.sgml
index ae6ee60..70c4c08 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/config.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/config.sgml
@@ -2163,6 +2163,278 @@ include 'filename'
      </variablelist>
     </sect2>
 
+    <sect2 id="runtime-config-wal-archive-recovery">
+     <title>Archive Recovery</title>
+
+     <variablelist>
+      <varlistentry id="guc-restore-command" xreflabel="restore_command">
+       <term><varname>restore_command</varname> (<type>string</type>)</term>
+       <indexterm>
+        <primary><varname>restore_command</> configuration parameter</primary>
+       </indexterm>
+       <listitem>
+        <para>
+         The shell command to execute to retrieve an archived segment of
+         the WAL file series. This parameter is required for archive recovery,
+         but optional for streaming replication.
+         Any <literal>%f</> in the string is
+         replaced by the name of the file to retrieve from the archive,
+         and any <literal>%p</> is replaced by the copy destination path name
+         on the server.
+         (The path name is relative to the current working directory,
+         i.e., the cluster's data directory.)
+         Any <literal>%r</> is replaced by the name of the file containing the
+         last valid restart point. That is the earliest file that must be kept
+         to allow a restore to be restartable, so this information can be used
+         to truncate the archive to just the minimum required to support
+         restarting from the current restore. <literal>%r</> is typically only
+         used by warm-standby configurations
+         (see <xref linkend="warm-standby">).
+         Write <literal>%%</> to embed an actual <literal>%</> character.
+        </para>
+        <para>
+         It is important for the command to return a zero exit status
+         only if it succeeds.  The command <emphasis>will</> be asked for file
+         names that are not present in the archive; it must return nonzero
+         when so asked.  Examples:
+<programlisting>
+restore_command = 'cp /mnt/server/archivedir/%f "%p"'
+restore_command = 'copy "C:\\server\\archivedir\\%f" "%p"'  # Windows
+</programlisting>
+        </para>
+        <para>
+         This parameter can only be set in the <filename>postgresql.conf</>
+         file or on the server command line. It only has effect during archive
+         recovery or in standby mode.
+        </para>
+       </listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+
+      <varlistentry id="guc-archive-cleanup-command" xreflabel="archive_cleanup_command">
+       <term><varname>archive_cleanup_command</varname> (<type>string</type>)</term>
+       <indexterm>
+         <primary><varname>archive_cleanup_command</> configuration parameter</primary>
+       </indexterm>
+       <listitem>
+        <para>
+         The shell command that will be executed at every restartpoint.
+         The purpose of <varname>archive_cleanup_command</> is to
+         provide a mechanism for cleaning up old archived WAL files that
+         are no longer needed by the standby server.
+         Any <literal>%r</> is replaced by the name of the file containing the
+         last valid restart point.
+         That is the earliest file that must be <emphasis>kept</> to allow a
+         restore to be restartable, and so all files earlier than <literal>%r</>
+         may be safely removed.
+         This information can be used to truncate the archive to just the
+         minimum required to support restart from the current restore.
+         The <xref linkend="pgarchivecleanup"> module
+         is often used in <varname>archive_cleanup_command</> for
+         single-standby configurations, for example:
+<programlisting>archive_cleanup_command = 'pg_archivecleanup /mnt/server/archivedir %r'</programlisting>
+         Note however that if multiple standby servers are restoring from the
+         same archive directory, you will need to ensure that you do not delete
+         WAL files until they are no longer needed by any of the servers.
+         <varname>archive_cleanup_command</> would typically be used in a
+         warm-standby configuration (see <xref linkend="warm-standby">).
+         Write <literal>%%</> to embed an actual <literal>%</> character in the
+         command.
+        </para>
+        <para>
+         If the command returns a non-zero exit status then a WARNING log
+         message will be written.
+        </para>
+        <para>
+         This parameter can only be set in the <filename>postgresql.conf</>
+         file or on the server command line. It only has effect during archive
+         recovery or in standby mode.
+        </para>
+       </listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+
+      <varlistentry id="guc-recovery-end-command" xreflabel="recovery_end_command">
+       <term><varname>recovery_end_command</varname> (<type>string</type>)</term>
+       <indexterm>
+         <primary><varname>recovery_end_command</> configuration parameter</primary>
+       </indexterm>
+       <listitem>
+        <para>
+         The shell command that will be executed once only
+         at the end of recovery. This parameter is optional. The purpose of the
+         <varname>recovery_end_command</> is to provide a mechanism for cleanup
+         following replication or recovery.
+         Any <literal>%r</> is replaced by the name of the file containing the
+         last valid restart point, like in <varname>archive_cleanup_command</>.
+        </para>
+        <para>
+         If the command returns a non-zero exit status then a WARNING log
+         message will be written and the database will proceed to start up
+         anyway.  An exception is that if the command was terminated by a
+         signal, the database will not proceed with startup.
+        </para>
+        <para>
+         This parameter can only be set in the <filename>postgresql.conf</>
+         file or on the server command line. It only has effect during archive
+         recovery or in standby mode.
+        </para>
+       </listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+     </variablelist>
+    </sect2>
+
+    <sect2 id="runtime-config-wal-recovery-target">
+     <title>Recovery Target</title>
+
+     <variablelist>
+      <varlistentry id="guc-recovery-target-name" xreflabel="recovery_target_name">
+       <term><varname>recovery_target_name</varname> (<type>string</type>)</term>
+       <indexterm>
+        <primary><varname>recovery_target_name</> configuration parameter</primary>
+       </indexterm>
+       <listitem>
+        <para>
+         Specifies the named restore point, created with
+         <function>pg_create_restore_point()</> to which recovery will proceed.
+         At most one of <varname>recovery_target_name</>,
+         <varname>recovery_target_time</> or
+         <varname>recovery_target_xid</> can be specified.  The default
+         value is an empty string, which will recover to the end of the WAL log.
+        </para>
+        <para>
+         This parameter can only be set in the <filename>postgresql.conf</>
+         file or on the server command line. It only has effect during archive
+         recovery or in standby mode.
+        </para>
+       </listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+
+      <varlistentry id="guc-recovery-target-time" xreflabel="recovery_target_time">
+       <term><varname>recovery_target_time</varname> (<type>string</type>)</term>
+       <indexterm>
+        <primary><varname>recovery_target_time</> configuration parameter</primary>
+       </indexterm>
+       <listitem>
+        <para>
+         Specifies the time stamp up to which recovery will proceed.
+         This parameter must be specified in the date/time format
+         (see <xref linkend="datatype-datetime-input"> for details).
+         At most one of <varname>recovery_target_time</>,
+         <varname>recovery_target_name</> or
+         <varname>recovery_target_xid</> can be specified.
+         The default value is an empty string, which will recover to
+         the end of the WAL log. The precise stopping point is also
+         influenced by <varname>recovery_target_inclusive</>.
+        </para>
+        <para>
+         This parameter can only be set in the <filename>postgresql.conf</>
+         file or on the server command line. It only has effect during archive
+         recovery or in standby mode.
+        </para>
+       </listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+
+      <varlistentry id="guc-recovery-target-xid" xreflabel="recovery_target_xid">
+       <term><varname>recovery_target_xid</varname> (<type>string</type>)</term>
+       <indexterm>
+        <primary><varname>recovery_target_xid</> configuration parameter</primary>
+       </indexterm>
+       <listitem>
+        <para>
+         Specifies the transaction ID up to which recovery will proceed.
+         Keep in mind that while transaction IDs are assigned sequentially
+         at transaction start, transactions can complete in a different
+         numeric order. The transactions that will be recovered are
+         those that committed before (and optionally including)
+         the specified one. At most one of <varname>recovery_target_xid</>,
+         <varname>recovery_target_name</> or
+         <varname>recovery_target_time</> can be specified.
+         The default value is an empty string, which will recover to the end of
+         the WAL log. The precise stopping point is also influenced by
+         <varname>recovery_target_inclusive</>.
+        </para>
+        <para>
+         This parameter can only be set in the <filename>postgresql.conf</>
+         file or on the server command line. It only has effect during archive
+         recovery or in standby mode.
+        </para>
+       </listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+
+      <varlistentry id="guc-recovery-target-inclusive" xreflabel="recovery_target_inclusive">
+       <term><varname>recovery_target_inclusive</varname> (<type>boolean</type>)</term>
+       <indexterm>
+        <primary><varname>recovery_target_inclusive</> configuration parameter</primary>
+       </indexterm>
+       <listitem>
+        <para>
+         Specifies whether we stop just after the specified recovery target
+         (<literal>on</>), or just before the recovery target (<literal>off</>).
+         Applies to both <varname>recovery_target_time</>
+         and <varname>recovery_target_xid</>, whichever one is
+         specified for this recovery.  This indicates whether transactions
+         having exactly the target commit time or ID, respectively, will
+         be included in the recovery.  Default is <literal>on</>.
+        </para>
+        <para>
+         This parameter can only be set in the <filename>postgresql.conf</>
+         file or on the server command line. It only has effect during archive
+         recovery or in standby mode.
+        </para>
+       </listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+
+      <varlistentry id="guc-recovery-target-timeline" xreflabel="recovery_target_timeline">
+       <term><varname>recovery_target_timeline</varname> (<type>string</type>)</term>
+       <indexterm>
+        <primary><varname>recovery_target_timeline</> configuration parameter</primary>
+       </indexterm>
+       <listitem>
+        <para>
+         Specifies recovering into a particular timeline.  The default value is
+         an empty string, which will recover along the same timeline that was
+         current when the base backup was taken. Setting this to
+         <literal>latest</> recovers to the latest timeline found in the archive,
+         which is useful in a standby server. Other than that you only need to
+         set this parameter in complex re-recovery situations, where you need
+         to return to a state that itself was reached after a point-in-time
+         recovery. See <xref linkend="backup-timelines"> for discussion.
+        </para>
+        <para>
+         This parameter can only be set at server start. It only has effect
+         during archive recovery or in standby mode.
+        </para>
+       </listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+
+      <varlistentry id="guc-pause-at-recovery-target" xreflabel="pause_at_recovery_target">
+       <term><varname>pause_at_recovery_target</varname> (<type>boolean</type>)</term>
+       <indexterm>
+        <primary><varname>pause_at_recovery_target</> configuration parameter</primary>
+       </indexterm>
+       <listitem>
+        <para>
+         Specifies whether recovery should pause when the recovery target
+         is reached. The default is <literal>on</>.
+         This is intended to allow queries to be executed against the
+         database to check if this recovery target is the most desirable
+         point for recovery. The paused state can be resumed by using
+         <function>pg_xlog_replay_resume()</> (See
+         <xref linkend="functions-recovery-control-table">), which then
+         causes recovery to end. If this recovery target is not the
+         desired stopping point, then shutdown the server, change the
+         recovery target settings to a later target and restart to
+         continue recovery.
+        </para>
+        <para>
+         This parameter can only be set in the <filename>postgresql.conf</>
+         file or on the server command line. It only has effect during archive
+         recovery or in standby mode if recovery target is set.
+        </para>
+       </listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+     </variablelist>
+     </sect2>
+
    </sect1>
 
    <sect1 id="runtime-config-replication">
@@ -2382,6 +2654,93 @@ include 'filename'
 
     <variablelist>
 
+     <varlistentry id="guc-standby-mode" xreflabel="standby_mode">
+      <term><varname>standby_mode</varname> (<type>boolean</type>)</term>
+      <indexterm>
+       <primary><varname>standby_mode</> configuration parameter</primary>
+      </indexterm>
+      <listitem>
+       <para>
+        Specifies whether to start the <productname>PostgreSQL</> server as
+        a standby when the file called <filename>standby.enabled</> exists.
+        The default value is <literal>off</>.
+        If this parameter is <literal>on</>, the server will not
+        stop recovery when the end of archived WAL is reached,
+        but will keep trying to continue recovery by fetching new WAL segments
+        using <varname>restore_command</> and/or by connecting to
+        the primary server as specified by the <varname>primary_conninfo</>
+        setting.
+       </para>
+       <para>
+        This parameter can only be set at server start. It only has effect
+        if file <filename>standby.enabled</> exists.
+       </para>
+      </listitem>
+     </varlistentry>
+
+     <varlistentry id="guc-primary-conninfo" xreflabel="primary_conninfo">
+      <term><varname>primary_conninfo</varname> (<type>string</type>)</term>
+      <indexterm>
+        <primary><varname>primary_conninfo</> configuration parameter</primary>
+      </indexterm>
+      <listitem>
+       <para>
+        Specifies a connection string to be used for the standby server
+        to connect with the primary. This string is in the format
+        accepted by the libpq <function>PQconnectdb</function> function,
+        described in <xref linkend="libpq-connect">. If any option is
+        unspecified in this string, then the corresponding environment
+        variable (see <xref linkend="libpq-envars">) is checked. If the
+        environment variable is not set either, then defaults are used.
+        If this parameter is an empty string (the default), no attempt is
+        made to connect to the master.
+       </para>
+       <para>
+        The connection string should specify the host name (or address)
+        of the primary server, as well as the port number if it is not
+        the same as the standby server's default.
+        Also specify a user name corresponding to a role that has the
+        <literal>REPLICATION</> and <literal>LOGIN</> privileges on the
+        primary (see
+        <xref linkend="streaming-replication-authentication">).
+        A password needs to be provided too, if the primary demands password
+        authentication.  It can be provided in the
+        <varname>primary_conninfo</varname> string, or in a separate
+        <filename>~/.pgpass</> file on the standby server (use
+        <literal>replication</> as the database name).
+        Do not specify a database name in the
+        <varname>primary_conninfo</varname> string.
+       </para>
+       <para>
+        This parameter can only be set in the <filename>postgresql.conf</>
+        file or on the server command line. It only has effect in standby mode.
+       </para>
+       <para>
+        If this parameter is changed while replication is in progress,
+        the standby terminates replication, and then tries to restart
+        replication with new setting.
+       </para>
+      </listitem>
+     </varlistentry>
+
+     <varlistentry id="guc-trigger-file" xreflabel="trigger_file">
+      <term><varname>trigger_file</varname> (<type>string</type>)</term>
+      <indexterm>
+        <primary><varname>trigger_file</> configuration parameter</primary>
+      </indexterm>
+      <listitem>
+       <para>
+        Specifies a trigger file whose presence ends recovery in the
+        standby.  Even if this value is not set, you can still promote
+        the standby using <command>pg_ctl promote</>.
+       </para>
+       <para>
+        This parameter can only be set in the <filename>postgresql.conf</>
+        file or on the server command line. It only has effect in standby mode.
+       </para>
+      </listitem>
+    </varlistentry>
+
      <varlistentry id="guc-hot-standby" xreflabel="hot_standby">
       <term><varname>hot_standby</varname> (<type>boolean</type>)</term>
       <indexterm>
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/filelist.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/filelist.sgml
index b623f58..2eef816 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/filelist.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/filelist.sgml
@@ -43,7 +43,6 @@
 <!ENTITY manage-ag     SYSTEM "manage-ag.sgml">
 <!ENTITY monitoring    SYSTEM "monitoring.sgml">
 <!ENTITY regress       SYSTEM "regress.sgml">
-<!ENTITY recovery-config SYSTEM "recovery-config.sgml">
 <!ENTITY runtime       SYSTEM "runtime.sgml">
 <!ENTITY config        SYSTEM "config.sgml">
 <!ENTITY user-manag    SYSTEM "user-manag.sgml">
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/func.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/func.sgml
index 372e2b6..cd50730 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/func.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/func.sgml
@@ -14739,7 +14739,7 @@ postgres=# select pg_start_backup('label_goes_here');
     <function>pg_create_restore_point</> creates a named transaction log
     record that can be used as recovery target, and returns the corresponding
     transaction log location.  The given name can then be used with
-    <xref linkend="recovery-target-name"> to specify the point up to which
+    <xref linkend="guc-recovery-target-name"> to specify the point up to which
     recovery will proceed.  Avoid creating multiple restore points with the
     same name, since recovery will stop at the first one whose name matches
     the recovery target.
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/high-availability.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/high-availability.sgml
index c8f6fa8..a2993f5 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/high-availability.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/high-availability.sgml
@@ -591,7 +591,7 @@ protocol to make nodes agree on a serializable transactional order.
    <para>
     In standby mode, the server continuously applies WAL received from the
     master server. The standby server can read WAL from a WAL archive
-    (see <xref linkend="restore-command">) or directly from the master
+    (see <xref linkend="guc-restore-command">) or directly from the master
     over a TCP connection (streaming replication). The standby server will
     also attempt to restore any WAL found in the standby cluster's
     <filename>pg_xlog</> directory. That typically happens after a server
@@ -658,8 +658,8 @@ protocol to make nodes agree on a serializable transactional order.
    <para>
     To set up the standby server, restore the base backup taken from primary
     server (see <xref linkend="backup-pitr-recovery">). Create a recovery
-    command file <filename>recovery.conf</> in the standby's cluster data
-    directory, and turn on <varname>standby_mode</>. Set
+    trigger file <filename>standby.enabled</> in the standby's cluster data
+    directory. Turn on <varname>standby_mode</> and set
     <varname>restore_command</> to a simple command to copy files from
     the WAL archive. If you plan to have multiple standby servers for high
     availability purposes, set <varname>recovery_target_timeline</> to
@@ -695,7 +695,7 @@ protocol to make nodes agree on a serializable transactional order.
 
    <para>
     If you're using a WAL archive, its size can be minimized using the <xref
-    linkend="archive-cleanup-command"> parameter to remove files that are no
+    linkend="guc-archive-cleanup-command"> parameter to remove files that are no
     longer required by the standby server.
     The <application>pg_archivecleanup</> utility is designed specifically to
     be used with <varname>archive_cleanup_command</> in typical single-standby
@@ -706,7 +706,7 @@ protocol to make nodes agree on a serializable transactional order.
    </para>
 
    <para>
-    A simple example of a <filename>recovery.conf</> is:
+    A simple example of standby settings is:
 <programlisting>
 standby_mode = 'on'
 primary_conninfo = 'host=192.168.1.50 port=5432 user=foo password=foopass'
@@ -763,8 +763,8 @@ archive_cleanup_command = 'pg_archivecleanup /path/to/archive %r'
     To use streaming replication, set up a file-based log-shipping standby
     server as described in <xref linkend="warm-standby">. The step that
     turns a file-based log-shipping standby into streaming replication
-    standby is setting <varname>primary_conninfo</> setting in the
-    <filename>recovery.conf</> file to point to the primary server. Set
+    standby is setting <varname>primary_conninfo</> to
+    point to the primary server. Set
     <xref linkend="guc-listen-addresses"> and authentication options
     (see <filename>pg_hba.conf</>) on the primary so that the standby server
     can connect to the <literal>replication</> pseudo-database on the primary
@@ -824,15 +824,14 @@ host    replication     foo             192.168.1.100/32        md5
     </para>
     <para>
      The host name and port number of the primary, connection user name,
-     and password are specified in the <filename>recovery.conf</> file.
+     and password are specified in <varname>primary_conninfo</>.
      The password can also be set in the <filename>~/.pgpass</> file on the
      standby (specify <literal>replication</> in the <replaceable>database</>
      field).
      For example, if the primary is running on host IP <literal>192.168.1.50</>,
      port <literal>5432</literal>, the account name for replication is
      <literal>foo</>, and the password is <literal>foopass</>, the administrator
-     can add the following line to the <filename>recovery.conf</> file on the
-     standby:
+     can set <varname>primary_conninfo</> on the standby like this:
 
 <programlisting>
 # The standby connects to the primary that is running on host 192.168.1.50
@@ -1212,8 +1211,8 @@ primary_conninfo = 'host=192.168.1.50 port=5432 user=foo password=foopass'
    <para>
     To trigger failover of a log-shipping standby server,
     run <command>pg_ctl promote</> or create a trigger
-    file with the file name and path specified by the <varname>trigger_file</>
-    setting in <filename>recovery.conf</>. If you're planning to use
+    file with the file name and path specified by the <varname>trigger_file</>.
+    If you're planning to use
     <command>pg_ctl promote</> to fail over, <varname>trigger_file</> is
     not required. If you're setting up the reporting servers that are
     only used to offload read-only queries from the primary, not for high
@@ -1258,8 +1257,7 @@ primary_conninfo = 'host=192.168.1.50 port=5432 user=foo password=foopass'
     The magic that makes the two loosely coupled servers work together is
     simply a <varname>restore_command</> used on the standby that,
     when asked for the next WAL file, waits for it to become available from
-    the primary. The <varname>restore_command</> is specified in the
-    <filename>recovery.conf</> file on the standby server. Normal recovery
+    the primary. Normal recovery
     processing would request a file from the WAL archive, reporting failure
     if the file was unavailable.  For standby processing it is normal for
     the next WAL file to be unavailable, so the standby must wait for
@@ -1346,8 +1344,14 @@ if (!triggered)
      </listitem>
      <listitem>
       <para>
+       Create a file called <filename>standby.enabled</> in the standby's
+       cluster data directory to trigger the recovery.
+      </para>
+     </listitem>
+     <listitem>
+      <para>
        Begin recovery on the standby server from the local WAL
-       archive, using a <filename>recovery.conf</> that specifies a
+       archive, specifying a
        <varname>restore_command</> that waits as described
        previously (see <xref linkend="backup-pitr-recovery">).
       </para>
@@ -1838,9 +1842,8 @@ if (!triggered)
    <title>Administrator's Overview</title>
 
    <para>
-    If <varname>hot_standby</> is turned <literal>on</> in
-    <filename>postgresql.conf</> and there is a <filename>recovery.conf</>
-    file present, the server will run in Hot Standby mode.
+    If <varname>hot_standby</> is turned <literal>on</> and there is a file
+    <filename>standby.enabled</> present, the server will run in Hot Standby mode.
     However, it may take some time for Hot Standby connections to be allowed,
     because the server will not accept connections until it has completed
     sufficient recovery to provide a consistent state against which queries
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/pgarchivecleanup.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/pgarchivecleanup.sgml
index 932914b..2984da4 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/pgarchivecleanup.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/pgarchivecleanup.sgml
@@ -38,8 +38,8 @@
 
   <para>
    To configure a standby
-   server to use <application>pg_archivecleanup</>, put this into its
-   <filename>recovery.conf</filename> configuration file:
+   server to use <application>pg_archivecleanup</>, specify
+   <xref linkend="guc-archive-cleanup-command"> like this:
 <programlisting>
 archive_cleanup_command = 'pg_archivecleanup <replaceable>archivelocation</> %r'
 </programlisting>
@@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ archive_cleanup_command = 'pg_archivecleanup <replaceable>archivelocation</> %r'
    files should be removed.
   </para>
   <para>
-   When used within <xref linkend="archive-cleanup-command">, all WAL files
+   When used within <varname>archive_cleanup_command</>, all WAL files
    logically preceding the value of the <literal>%r</> argument will be removed
    from <replaceable>archivelocation</>. This minimizes the number of files
    that need to be retained, while preserving crash-restart capability.  Use of
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/pgstandby.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/pgstandby.sgml
index ca2b5c0..15097ca 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/pgstandby.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/pgstandby.sgml
@@ -46,8 +46,8 @@
 
   <para>
    To configure a standby
-   server to use <application>pg_standby</>, put this into its
-   <filename>recovery.conf</filename> configuration file:
+   server to use <application>pg_standby</>, specify
+   <xref linkend="guc-restore-command"> like this:
 <programlisting>
 restore_command = 'pg_standby <replaceable>archiveDir</> %f %p %r'
 </programlisting>
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/postgres.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/postgres.sgml
index 15e4ef6..26e8dc2 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/postgres.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/postgres.sgml
@@ -155,7 +155,6 @@
   &maintenance;
   &backup;
   &high-availability;
-  &recovery-config;
   &monitoring;
   &diskusage;
   &wal;
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/recovery-config.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/recovery-config.sgml
deleted file mode 100644
index c0c543e..0000000
--- a/doc/src/sgml/recovery-config.sgml
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,361 +0,0 @@
-<!-- doc/src/sgml/recovery-config.sgml -->
-
-<chapter id="recovery-config">
-  <title>Recovery Configuration</title>
-
-  <indexterm>
-   <primary>configuration</primary>
-   <secondary>of recovery</secondary>
-   <tertiary>of a standby server</tertiary>
-  </indexterm>
-
-   <para>
-    This chapter describes the settings available in the
-    <filename>recovery.conf</><indexterm><primary>recovery.conf</></>
-    file. They apply only for the duration of the
-    recovery.  They must be reset for any subsequent recovery you wish to
-    perform.  They cannot be changed once recovery has begun.
-   </para>
-
-   <para>
-     Settings in <filename>recovery.conf</> are specified in the format
-     <literal>name = 'value'</>. One parameter is specified per line.
-     Hash marks (<literal>#</literal>) designate the rest of the
-     line as a comment.  To embed a single quote in a parameter
-     value, write two quotes (<literal>''</>).
-   </para>
-
-   <para>
-    A sample file, <filename>share/recovery.conf.sample</>,
-    is provided in the installation's <filename>share/</> directory.
-   </para>
-
-  <sect1 id="archive-recovery-settings">
-
-    <title>Archive Recovery Settings</title>
-     <variablelist>
-
-     <varlistentry id="restore-command" xreflabel="restore_command">
-      <term><varname>restore_command</varname> (<type>string</type>)</term>
-      <indexterm>
-        <primary><varname>restore_command</> recovery parameter</primary>
-      </indexterm>
-      <listitem>
-       <para>
-        The shell command to execute to retrieve an archived segment of
-        the WAL file series. This parameter is required for archive recovery,
-        but optional for streaming replication.
-        Any <literal>%f</> in the string is
-        replaced by the name of the file to retrieve from the archive,
-        and any <literal>%p</> is replaced by the copy destination path name
-        on the server.
-        (The path name is relative to the current working directory,
-        i.e., the cluster's data directory.)
-        Any <literal>%r</> is replaced by the name of the file containing the
-        last valid restart point. That is the earliest file that must be kept
-        to allow a restore to be restartable, so this information can be used
-        to truncate the archive to just the minimum required to support
-        restarting from the current restore. <literal>%r</> is typically only
-        used by warm-standby configurations
-        (see <xref linkend="warm-standby">).
-        Write <literal>%%</> to embed an actual <literal>%</> character.
-       </para>
-
-       <para>
-        It is important for the command to return a zero exit status
-        only if it succeeds.  The command <emphasis>will</> be asked for file
-        names that are not present in the archive; it must return nonzero
-        when so asked.  Examples:
-<programlisting>
-restore_command = 'cp /mnt/server/archivedir/%f "%p"'
-restore_command = 'copy "C:\\server\\archivedir\\%f" "%p"'  # Windows
-</programlisting>
-       </para>
-      </listitem>
-     </varlistentry>
-
-     <varlistentry id="archive-cleanup-command" xreflabel="archive_cleanup_command">
-      <term><varname>archive_cleanup_command</varname> (<type>string</type>)</term>
-      <indexterm>
-        <primary><varname>archive_cleanup_command</> recovery parameter</primary>
-      </indexterm>
-      <listitem>
-       <para>
-        This optional parameter specifies a shell command that will be executed
-        at every restartpoint.  The purpose of
-        <varname>archive_cleanup_command</> is to provide a mechanism for
-        cleaning up old archived WAL files that are no longer needed by the
-        standby server.
-        Any <literal>%r</> is replaced by the name of the file containing the
-        last valid restart point.
-        That is the earliest file that must be <emphasis>kept</> to allow a
-        restore to be restartable, and so all files earlier than <literal>%r</>
-        may be safely removed.
-        This information can be used to truncate the archive to just the
-        minimum required to support restart from the current restore.
-        The <xref linkend="pgarchivecleanup"> module
-        is often used in <varname>archive_cleanup_command</> for
-        single-standby configurations, for example:
-<programlisting>archive_cleanup_command = 'pg_archivecleanup /mnt/server/archivedir %r'</programlisting>
-        Note however that if multiple standby servers are restoring from the
-        same archive directory, you will need to ensure that you do not delete
-        WAL files until they are no longer needed by any of the servers.
-        <varname>archive_cleanup_command</> would typically be used in a
-        warm-standby configuration (see <xref linkend="warm-standby">).
-        Write <literal>%%</> to embed an actual <literal>%</> character in the
-        command.
-       </para>
-       <para>
-        If the command returns a non-zero exit status then a WARNING log
-        message will be written.
-       </para>
-      </listitem>
-     </varlistentry>
-
-     <varlistentry id="recovery-end-command" xreflabel="recovery_end_command">
-      <term><varname>recovery_end_command</varname> (<type>string</type>)</term>
-      <indexterm>
-        <primary><varname>recovery_end_command</> recovery parameter</primary>
-      </indexterm>
-      <listitem>
-       <para>
-        This parameter specifies a shell command that will be executed once only
-        at the end of recovery. This parameter is optional. The purpose of the
-        <varname>recovery_end_command</> is to provide a mechanism for cleanup
-        following replication or recovery.
-        Any <literal>%r</> is replaced by the name of the file containing the
-        last valid restart point, like in <xref linkend="archive-cleanup-command">.
-       </para>
-       <para>
-        If the command returns a non-zero exit status then a WARNING log
-        message will be written and the database will proceed to start up
-        anyway.  An exception is that if the command was terminated by a
-        signal, the database will not proceed with startup.
-       </para>
-      </listitem>
-     </varlistentry>
-
-    </variablelist>
-
-  </sect1>
-
-  <sect1 id="recovery-target-settings">
-
-    <title>Recovery Target Settings</title>
-     <variablelist>
-
-     <varlistentry id="recovery-target-name" xreflabel="recovery_target_name">
-      <term><varname>recovery_target_name</varname>
-           (<type>string</type>)
-      </term>
-      <indexterm>
-        <primary><varname>recovery_target_name</> recovery parameter</primary>
-      </indexterm>
-      <listitem>
-       <para>
-        This parameter specifies the named restore point, created with
-        <function>pg_create_restore_point()</> to which recovery will proceed.
-        At most one of <varname>recovery_target_name</>,
-        <xref linkend="recovery-target-time"> or
-        <xref linkend="recovery-target-xid"> can be specified.  The default is to
-        recover to the end of the WAL log.
-       </para>
-      </listitem>
-     </varlistentry>
-
-     <varlistentry id="recovery-target-time" xreflabel="recovery_target_time">
-      <term><varname>recovery_target_time</varname>
-           (<type>timestamp</type>)
-      </term>
-      <indexterm>
-        <primary><varname>recovery_target_time</> recovery parameter</primary>
-      </indexterm>
-      <listitem>
-       <para>
-        This parameter specifies the time stamp up to which recovery
-        will proceed.
-        At most one of <varname>recovery_target_time</>,
-        <xref linkend="recovery-target-name"> or
-        <xref linkend="recovery-target-xid"> can be specified.
-        The default is to recover to the end of the WAL log.
-        The precise stopping point is also influenced by
-        <xref linkend="recovery-target-inclusive">.
-       </para>
-      </listitem>
-     </varlistentry>
-
-     <varlistentry id="recovery-target-xid" xreflabel="recovery_target_xid">
-      <term><varname>recovery_target_xid</varname> (<type>string</type>)</term>
-      <indexterm>
-        <primary><varname>recovery_target_xid</> recovery parameter</primary>
-      </indexterm>
-      <listitem>
-       <para>
-        This parameter specifies the transaction ID up to which recovery
-        will proceed. Keep in mind
-        that while transaction IDs are assigned sequentially at transaction
-        start, transactions can complete in a different numeric order.
-        The transactions that will be recovered are those that committed
-        before (and optionally including) the specified one.
-        At most one of <varname>recovery_target_xid</>,
-        <xref linkend="recovery-target-name"> or
-        <xref linkend="recovery-target-time"> can be specified.
-        The default is to recover to the end of the WAL log.
-        The precise stopping point is also influenced by
-        <xref linkend="recovery-target-inclusive">.
-       </para>
-      </listitem>
-     </varlistentry>
-
-     <varlistentry id="recovery-target-inclusive"
-                   xreflabel="recovery_target_inclusive">
-      <term><varname>recovery_target_inclusive</varname>
-        (<type>boolean</type>)
-      </term>
-      <indexterm>
-        <primary><varname>recovery_target_inclusive</> recovery parameter</primary>
-      </indexterm>
-      <listitem>
-       <para>
-        Specifies whether we stop just after the specified recovery target
-        (<literal>true</literal>), or just before the recovery target
-        (<literal>false</literal>).
-        Applies to both <xref linkend="recovery-target-time">
-        and <xref linkend="recovery-target-xid">, whichever one is
-        specified for this recovery.  This indicates whether transactions
-        having exactly the target commit time or ID, respectively, will
-        be included in the recovery.  Default is <literal>true</>.
-       </para>
-      </listitem>
-     </varlistentry>
-
-     <varlistentry id="recovery-target-timeline"
-                   xreflabel="recovery_target_timeline">
-      <term><varname>recovery_target_timeline</varname>
-        (<type>string</type>)
-      </term>
-      <indexterm>
-        <primary><varname>recovery_target_timeline</> recovery parameter</primary>
-      </indexterm>
-      <listitem>
-       <para>
-        Specifies recovering into a particular timeline.  The default is
-        to recover along the same timeline that was current when the
-        base backup was taken. Setting this to <literal>latest</> recovers
-        to the latest timeline found in the archive, which is useful in
-        a standby server. Other than that you only need to set this parameter
-        in complex re-recovery situations, where you need to return to
-        a state that itself was reached after a point-in-time recovery.
-        See <xref linkend="backup-timelines"> for discussion.
-       </para>
-      </listitem>
-     </varlistentry>
-
-     <varlistentry id="pause-at-recovery-target"
-                   xreflabel="pause_at_recovery_target">
-      <term><varname>pause_at_recovery_target</varname>
-        (<type>boolean</type>)
-      </term>
-      <indexterm>
-        <primary><varname>pause_at_recovery_target</> recovery parameter</primary>
-      </indexterm>
-      <listitem>
-       <para>
-        Specifies whether recovery should pause when the recovery target
-        is reached. The default is true.
-        This is intended to allow queries to be executed against the
-        database to check if this recovery target is the most desirable
-        point for recovery. The paused state can be resumed by using
-        <function>pg_xlog_replay_resume()</> (See
-        <xref linkend="functions-recovery-control-table">), which then
-        causes recovery to end. If this recovery target is not the
-        desired stopping point, then shutdown the server, change the
-        recovery target settings to a later target and restart to
-        continue recovery.
-       </para>
-       <para>
-        This setting has no effect if <xref linkend="guc-hot-standby"> is not
-        enabled, or if no recovery target is set.
-       </para>
-      </listitem>
-     </varlistentry>
-
-     </variablelist>
-   </sect1>
-
-  <sect1 id="standby-settings">
-
-    <title>Standby Server Settings</title>
-     <variablelist>
-
-       <varlistentry id="standby-mode" xreflabel="standby_mode">
-        <term><varname>standby_mode</varname> (<type>boolean</type>)</term>
-        <indexterm>
-          <primary><varname>standby_mode</> recovery parameter</primary>
-        </indexterm>
-        <listitem>
-         <para>
-          Specifies whether to start the <productname>PostgreSQL</> server as
-          a standby. If this parameter is <literal>on</>, the server will
-          not stop recovery when the end of archived WAL is reached, but
-          will keep trying to continue recovery by fetching new WAL segments
-          using <varname>restore_command</>
-          and/or by connecting to the primary server as specified by the
-          <varname>primary_conninfo</> setting.
-         </para>
-        </listitem>
-       </varlistentry>
-       <varlistentry id="primary-conninfo" xreflabel="primary_conninfo">
-        <term><varname>primary_conninfo</varname> (<type>string</type>)</term>
-        <indexterm>
-          <primary><varname>primary_conninfo</> recovery parameter</primary>
-        </indexterm>
-        <listitem>
-         <para>
-          Specifies a connection string to be used for the standby server
-          to connect with the primary. This string is in the format
-          described in <xref linkend="libpq-connstring">. If any option is
-          unspecified in this string, then the corresponding environment
-          variable (see <xref linkend="libpq-envars">) is checked. If the
-          environment variable is not set either, then
-          defaults are used.
-         </para>
-         <para>
-          The connection string should specify the host name (or address)
-          of the primary server, as well as the port number if it is not
-          the same as the standby server's default.
-          Also specify a user name corresponding to a suitably-privileged role
-          on the primary (see
-          <xref linkend="streaming-replication-authentication">).
-          A password needs to be provided too, if the primary demands password
-          authentication.  It can be provided in the
-          <varname>primary_conninfo</varname> string, or in a separate
-          <filename>~/.pgpass</> file on the standby server (use
-          <literal>replication</> as the database name).
-          Do not specify a database name in the
-          <varname>primary_conninfo</varname> string.
-         </para>
-         <para>
-          This setting has no effect if <varname>standby_mode</> is <literal>off</>.
-         </para>
-        </listitem>
-       </varlistentry>
-       <varlistentry id="trigger-file" xreflabel="trigger_file">
-        <term><varname>trigger_file</varname> (<type>string</type>)</term>
-        <indexterm>
-          <primary><varname>trigger_file</> recovery parameter</primary>
-        </indexterm>
-        <listitem>
-         <para>
-          Specifies a trigger file whose presence ends recovery in the
-          standby.  Even if this value is not set, you can still promote
-          the standby using <command>pg_ctl promote</>.
-          This setting has no effect if <varname>standby_mode</> is <literal>off</>.
-         </para>
-        </listitem>
-       </varlistentry>
-
-     </variablelist>
-   </sect1>
-
-</chapter>
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/release-9.1.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/release-9.1.sgml
index b524477..f10e02f 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/release-9.1.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/release-9.1.sgml
@@ -4279,7 +4279,7 @@
       <listitem>
        <para>
         Add <filename>recovery.conf</> setting <link
-        linkend="pause-at-recovery-target"><varname>pause_at_recovery_target</></link>
+        linkend="guc-pause-at-recovery-target"><varname>pause_at_recovery_target</></link>
         to pause recovery at target (Simon Riggs)
        </para>
 
@@ -4299,7 +4299,7 @@
        <para>
         These named restore points can be specified as recovery
         targets using the new <filename>recovery.conf</> setting
-        <link linkend="recovery-target-name"><varname>recovery_target_name</></link>.
+        <link linkend="guc-recovery-target-name"><varname>recovery_target_name</></link>.
        </para>
       </listitem>
 
@@ -4331,8 +4331,7 @@
 
       <listitem>
        <para>
-        Allow <link
-        linkend="recovery-config"><filename>recovery.conf</></link>
+        Allow <filename>recovery.conf</>
         to use the same quoting behavior as <filename>postgresql.conf</>
         (Dimitri Fontaine)
        </para>
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/release.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/release.sgml
index 2515329..252bf13 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/release.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/release.sgml
@@ -5,8 +5,8 @@ Typical markup:
 
 &<>                             use & escapes
 PostgreSQL                      <productname>
-postgresql.conf, pg_hba.conf,
-        recovery.conf           <filename>
+postgresql.conf, pg_hba.conf
+        standby.enabled         <filename>
 [A-Z][A-Z_ ]+[A-Z_]             <command>, <literal>, <envar>
 [A-Za-z_][A-Za-z0-9_]+()        <function>
 -[-A-Za-z_]+                    <option>
diff --git a/src/backend/Makefile b/src/backend/Makefile
index 318cdbc..58d42c5 100644
--- a/src/backend/Makefile
+++ b/src/backend/Makefile
@@ -225,7 +225,6 @@ endif
 	$(INSTALL_DATA) $(srcdir)/libpq/pg_hba.conf.sample '$(DESTDIR)$(datadir)/pg_hba.conf.sample'
 	$(INSTALL_DATA) $(srcdir)/libpq/pg_ident.conf.sample '$(DESTDIR)$(datadir)/pg_ident.conf.sample'
 	$(INSTALL_DATA) $(srcdir)/utils/misc/postgresql.conf.sample '$(DESTDIR)$(datadir)/postgresql.conf.sample'
-	$(INSTALL_DATA) $(srcdir)/access/transam/recovery.conf.sample '$(DESTDIR)$(datadir)/recovery.conf.sample'
 
 install-bin: postgres $(POSTGRES_IMP) installdirs
 	$(INSTALL_PROGRAM) postgres$(X) '$(DESTDIR)$(bindir)/postgres$(X)'
@@ -282,8 +281,7 @@ endif
 	$(MAKE) -C tsearch uninstall-data
 	rm -f '$(DESTDIR)$(datadir)/pg_hba.conf.sample' \
 	      '$(DESTDIR)$(datadir)/pg_ident.conf.sample' \
-              '$(DESTDIR)$(datadir)/postgresql.conf.sample' \
-	      '$(DESTDIR)$(datadir)/recovery.conf.sample'
+              '$(DESTDIR)$(datadir)/postgresql.conf.sample'
 
 
 ##########################################################################
diff --git a/src/backend/access/transam/recovery.conf.sample b/src/backend/access/transam/recovery.conf.sample
deleted file mode 100644
index 5acfa57..0000000
--- a/src/backend/access/transam/recovery.conf.sample
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,132 +0,0 @@
-# -------------------------------
-# PostgreSQL recovery config file
-# -------------------------------
-#
-# Edit this file to provide the parameters that PostgreSQL needs to
-# perform an archive recovery of a database, or to act as a replication
-# standby.
-#
-# If "recovery.conf" is present in the PostgreSQL data directory, it is
-# read on postmaster startup.  After successful recovery, it is renamed
-# to "recovery.done" to ensure that we do not accidentally re-enter
-# archive recovery or standby mode.
-#
-# This file consists of lines of the form:
-#
-#   name = value
-#
-# Comments are introduced with '#'.
-#
-# The complete list of option names and allowed values can be found
-# in the PostgreSQL documentation.
-#
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# ARCHIVE RECOVERY PARAMETERS
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-#
-# restore_command
-#
-# specifies the shell command that is executed to copy log files
-# back from archival storage.  The command string may contain %f,
-# which is replaced by the name of the desired log file, and %p,
-# which is replaced by the absolute path to copy the log file to.
-#
-# This parameter is *required* for an archive recovery, but optional
-# for streaming replication.
-#
-# It is important that the command return nonzero exit status on failure.
-# The command *will* be asked for log files that are not present in the
-# archive; it must return nonzero when so asked.
-#
-# NOTE that the basename of %p will be different from %f; do not
-# expect them to be interchangeable.
-#
-#restore_command = ''		# e.g. 'cp /mnt/server/archivedir/%f %p'
-#
-#
-# archive_cleanup_command
-#
-# specifies an optional shell command to execute at every restartpoint.
-# This can be useful for cleaning up the archive of a standby server.
-#
-#archive_cleanup_command = ''
-#
-# recovery_end_command
-#
-# specifies an optional shell command to execute at completion of recovery.
-# This can be useful for cleaning up after the restore_command.
-#
-#recovery_end_command = ''
-#
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# RECOVERY TARGET PARAMETERS
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-#
-# By default, recovery will rollforward to the end of the WAL log.
-# If you want to stop rollforward at a specific point, you
-# must set a recovery target.
-#
-# You may set a recovery target either by transactionId, by name,
-# or by timestamp. Recovery may either include or exclude the
-# transaction(s) with the recovery target value (ie, stop either
-# just after or just before the given target, respectively).
-#
-#
-#recovery_target_name = ''	# e.g. 'daily backup 2011-01-26'
-#
-#recovery_target_time = ''	# e.g. '2004-07-14 22:39:00 EST'
-#
-#recovery_target_xid = ''
-#
-#recovery_target_inclusive = true
-#
-#
-# If you want to recover into a timeline other than the "main line" shown in
-# pg_control, specify the timeline number here, or write 'latest' to get
-# the latest branch for which there's a history file.
-#
-#recovery_target_timeline = 'latest'
-#
-#
-# If pause_at_recovery_target is enabled, recovery will pause when
-# the recovery target is reached. The pause state will continue until
-# pg_xlog_replay_resume() is called. This setting has no effect if
-# hot standby is not enabled, or if no recovery target is set.
-#
-#pause_at_recovery_target = true
-#
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# STANDBY SERVER PARAMETERS
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-#
-# standby_mode
-#
-# When standby_mode is enabled, the PostgreSQL server will work as a
-# standby. It will continuously wait for the additional XLOG records, using
-# restore_command and/or primary_conninfo.
-#
-#standby_mode = off
-#
-# primary_conninfo
-#
-# If set, the PostgreSQL server will try to connect to the primary using this
-# connection string and receive XLOG records continuously.
-#
-#primary_conninfo = ''		# e.g. 'host=localhost port=5432'
-#
-#
-# By default, a standby server keeps restoring XLOG records from the
-# primary indefinitely. If you want to stop the standby mode, finish recovery
-# and open the system in read/write mode, specify path to a trigger file.
-# The server will poll the trigger file path periodically and start as a
-# primary server when it's found.
-#
-#trigger_file = ''
-#
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# HOT STANDBY PARAMETERS
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-#
-# Hot Standby related parameters are listed in postgresql.conf
-#
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
diff --git a/src/backend/access/transam/xlog.c b/src/backend/access/transam/xlog.c
index a02eebc..fce202f 100644
--- a/src/backend/access/transam/xlog.c
+++ b/src/backend/access/transam/xlog.c
@@ -63,11 +63,12 @@
 
 
 /* File path names (all relative to $PGDATA) */
-#define RECOVERY_COMMAND_FILE	"recovery.conf"
-#define RECOVERY_COMMAND_DONE	"recovery.done"
-#define PROMOTE_SIGNAL_FILE "promote"
+#define RECOVERY_ENABLE_FILE	"standby.enabled"
+#define PROMOTE_SIGNAL_FILE	"promote"
 #define FAST_PROMOTE_SIGNAL_FILE "fast_promote"
 
+/* recovery.conf is not supported anymore */
+#define RECOVERY_COMMAND_FILE	"recovery.conf"
 
 /* User-settable parameters */
 int			CheckPointSegments = 3;
@@ -83,6 +84,23 @@ int			sync_method = DEFAULT_SYNC_METHOD;
 int			wal_level = WAL_LEVEL_MINIMAL;
 int			CommitDelay = 0;	/* precommit delay in microseconds */
 int			CommitSiblings = 5; /* # concurrent xacts needed to sleep */
+char	   *restore_command = NULL;
+char	   *archive_cleanup_command = NULL;
+char	   *recovery_end_command = NULL;
+bool		StandbyModeRequested = false;
+char	   *primary_conninfo = NULL;
+char	   *trigger_file = NULL;
+RecoveryTargetType	recovery_target = RECOVERY_TARGET_UNSET;
+TransactionId		recovery_target_xid = InvalidTransactionId;
+TimestampTz			recovery_target_time = 0;
+char	   *recovery_target_name = NULL;
+bool		recovery_target_inclusive = true;
+bool		pause_at_recovery_target = true;
+char	   *recovery_target_timeline_string = NULL;
+TimeLineID	recovery_target_timeline = 0;
+
+/* are we currently in standby mode? */
+bool StandbyMode = false;
 
 #ifdef WAL_DEBUG
 bool		XLOG_DEBUG = false;
@@ -206,29 +224,11 @@ bool InArchiveRecovery = false;
 /* Was the last xlog file restored from archive, or local? */
 static bool restoredFromArchive = false;
 
-/* options taken from recovery.conf for archive recovery */
-char *recoveryRestoreCommand = NULL;
-static char *recoveryEndCommand = NULL;
-static char *archiveCleanupCommand = NULL;
-static RecoveryTargetType recoveryTarget = RECOVERY_TARGET_UNSET;
-static bool recoveryTargetInclusive = true;
-static bool recoveryPauseAtTarget = true;
-static TransactionId recoveryTargetXid;
-static TimestampTz recoveryTargetTime;
-static char *recoveryTargetName;
-
-/* options taken from recovery.conf for XLOG streaming */
-static bool StandbyModeRequested = false;
-static char *PrimaryConnInfo = NULL;
-static char *TriggerFile = NULL;
-
-/* are we currently in standby mode? */
-bool StandbyMode = false;
-
 /* whether request for fast promotion has been made yet */
 static bool fast_promote = false;
 
 /* if recoveryStopsHere returns true, it saves actual stop xid/time/name here */
+static RecoveryTargetType recoveryStopTarget;
 static TransactionId recoveryStopXid;
 static TimestampTz recoveryStopTime;
 static char recoveryStopName[MAXFNAMELEN];
@@ -437,12 +437,6 @@ typedef struct XLogCtlData
 	TimeLineID	PrevTimeLineID;
 
 	/*
-	 * archiveCleanupCommand is read from recovery.conf but needs to be in
-	 * shared memory so that the checkpointer process can access it.
-	 */
-	char		archiveCleanupCommand[MAXPGPATH];
-
-	/*
 	 * SharedRecoveryInProgress indicates if we're still in crash or archive
 	 * recovery.  Protected by info_lck.
 	 */
@@ -631,7 +625,7 @@ static bool InRedo = false;
 static bool bgwriterLaunched = false;
 
 
-static void readRecoveryCommandFile(void);
+static void CheckRecoveryReadyFile(void);
 static void exitArchiveRecovery(TimeLineID endTLI, XLogSegNo endLogSegNo);
 static bool recoveryStopsHere(XLogRecord *record, bool *includeThis);
 static void recoveryPausesHere(void);
@@ -3309,7 +3303,7 @@ ReadRecord(XLogReaderState *xlogreader, XLogRecPtr RecPtr, int emode,
 				ereport(DEBUG1,
 						(errmsg_internal("reached end of WAL in pg_xlog, entering archive recovery")));
 				InArchiveRecovery = true;
-				if (StandbyModeRequested)
+				if (ArchiveRecoveryRequested && StandbyModeRequested)
 					StandbyMode = true;
 
 				/* initialize minRecoveryPoint to this record */
@@ -4120,212 +4114,47 @@ str_time(pg_time_t tnow)
 }
 
 /*
- * See if there is a recovery command file (recovery.conf), and if so
- * read in parameters for archive recovery and XLOG streaming.
- *
- * The file is parsed using the main configuration parser.
+ * Check to see if there is a recovery trigger file (standby.enabled).
+ * If so, validate recovery parameters and determine recovery target timeline.
  */
 static void
-readRecoveryCommandFile(void)
+CheckRecoveryReadyFile(void)
 {
-	FILE	   *fd;
-	TimeLineID	rtli = 0;
-	bool		rtliGiven = false;
-	ConfigVariable *item,
-			   *head = NULL,
-			   *tail = NULL;
-
-	fd = AllocateFile(RECOVERY_COMMAND_FILE, "r");
+	FILE *fd;
+
+	/* Check the presence of recovery.conf, it is not supported anymore */
+	if (AllocateFile(RECOVERY_COMMAND_FILE, "r") != NULL)
+		ereport(FATAL,
+				(errmsg("\"%s\" is not supported anymore as a recovery method",
+						RECOVERY_COMMAND_FILE),
+				 errdetail("Refer to appropriate documentation about migration methods")));
+
+	/* Check the presence of file standby.enabled, the file triggering recovery */
+	fd = AllocateFile(RECOVERY_ENABLE_FILE, "r");
 	if (fd == NULL)
 	{
 		if (errno == ENOENT)
 			return;				/* not there, so no archive recovery */
 		ereport(FATAL,
 				(errcode_for_file_access(),
-				 errmsg("could not open recovery command file \"%s\": %m",
-						RECOVERY_COMMAND_FILE)));
-	}
-
-	/*
-	 * Since we're asking ParseConfigFp() to report errors as FATAL, there's
-	 * no need to check the return value.
-	 */
-	(void) ParseConfigFp(fd, RECOVERY_COMMAND_FILE, 0, FATAL, &head, &tail);
-
-	FreeFile(fd);
-
-	for (item = head; item; item = item->next)
-	{
-		if (strcmp(item->name, "restore_command") == 0)
-		{
-			recoveryRestoreCommand = pstrdup(item->value);
-			ereport(DEBUG2,
-					(errmsg_internal("restore_command = '%s'",
-									 recoveryRestoreCommand)));
-		}
-		else if (strcmp(item->name, "recovery_end_command") == 0)
-		{
-			recoveryEndCommand = pstrdup(item->value);
-			ereport(DEBUG2,
-					(errmsg_internal("recovery_end_command = '%s'",
-									 recoveryEndCommand)));
-		}
-		else if (strcmp(item->name, "archive_cleanup_command") == 0)
-		{
-			archiveCleanupCommand = pstrdup(item->value);
-			ereport(DEBUG2,
-					(errmsg_internal("archive_cleanup_command = '%s'",
-									 archiveCleanupCommand)));
-		}
-		else if (strcmp(item->name, "pause_at_recovery_target") == 0)
-		{
-			if (!parse_bool(item->value, &recoveryPauseAtTarget))
-				ereport(ERROR,
-						(errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_PARAMETER_VALUE),
-						 errmsg("parameter \"%s\" requires a Boolean value", "pause_at_recovery_target")));
-			ereport(DEBUG2,
-					(errmsg_internal("pause_at_recovery_target = '%s'",
-									 item->value)));
-		}
-		else if (strcmp(item->name, "recovery_target_timeline") == 0)
-		{
-			rtliGiven = true;
-			if (strcmp(item->value, "latest") == 0)
-				rtli = 0;
-			else
-			{
-				errno = 0;
-				rtli = (TimeLineID) strtoul(item->value, NULL, 0);
-				if (errno == EINVAL || errno == ERANGE)
-					ereport(FATAL,
-							(errmsg("recovery_target_timeline is not a valid number: \"%s\"",
-									item->value)));
-			}
-			if (rtli)
-				ereport(DEBUG2,
-				   (errmsg_internal("recovery_target_timeline = %u", rtli)));
-			else
-				ereport(DEBUG2,
-					 (errmsg_internal("recovery_target_timeline = latest")));
-		}
-		else if (strcmp(item->name, "recovery_target_xid") == 0)
-		{
-			errno = 0;
-			recoveryTargetXid = (TransactionId) strtoul(item->value, NULL, 0);
-			if (errno == EINVAL || errno == ERANGE)
-				ereport(FATAL,
-				 (errmsg("recovery_target_xid is not a valid number: \"%s\"",
-						 item->value)));
-			ereport(DEBUG2,
-					(errmsg_internal("recovery_target_xid = %u",
-									 recoveryTargetXid)));
-			recoveryTarget = RECOVERY_TARGET_XID;
-		}
-		else if (strcmp(item->name, "recovery_target_time") == 0)
-		{
-			/*
-			 * if recovery_target_xid or recovery_target_name specified, then
-			 * this overrides recovery_target_time
-			 */
-			if (recoveryTarget == RECOVERY_TARGET_XID ||
-				recoveryTarget == RECOVERY_TARGET_NAME)
-				continue;
-			recoveryTarget = RECOVERY_TARGET_TIME;
-
-			/*
-			 * Convert the time string given by the user to TimestampTz form.
-			 */
-			recoveryTargetTime =
-				DatumGetTimestampTz(DirectFunctionCall3(timestamptz_in,
-												CStringGetDatum(item->value),
-												ObjectIdGetDatum(InvalidOid),
-														Int32GetDatum(-1)));
-			ereport(DEBUG2,
-					(errmsg_internal("recovery_target_time = '%s'",
-								   timestamptz_to_str(recoveryTargetTime))));
-		}
-		else if (strcmp(item->name, "recovery_target_name") == 0)
-		{
-			/*
-			 * if recovery_target_xid specified, then this overrides
-			 * recovery_target_name
-			 */
-			if (recoveryTarget == RECOVERY_TARGET_XID)
-				continue;
-			recoveryTarget = RECOVERY_TARGET_NAME;
-
-			recoveryTargetName = pstrdup(item->value);
-			if (strlen(recoveryTargetName) >= MAXFNAMELEN)
-				ereport(FATAL,
-						(errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_PARAMETER_VALUE),
-						 errmsg("recovery_target_name is too long (maximum %d characters)",
-								MAXFNAMELEN - 1)));
-
-			ereport(DEBUG2,
-					(errmsg_internal("recovery_target_name = '%s'",
-									 recoveryTargetName)));
-		}
-		else if (strcmp(item->name, "recovery_target_inclusive") == 0)
-		{
-			/*
-			 * does nothing if a recovery_target is not also set
-			 */
-			if (!parse_bool(item->value, &recoveryTargetInclusive))
-				ereport(ERROR,
-						(errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_PARAMETER_VALUE),
-						 errmsg("parameter \"%s\" requires a Boolean value",
-								"recovery_target_inclusive")));
-			ereport(DEBUG2,
-					(errmsg_internal("recovery_target_inclusive = %s",
-									 item->value)));
-		}
-		else if (strcmp(item->name, "standby_mode") == 0)
-		{
-			if (!parse_bool(item->value, &StandbyModeRequested))
-				ereport(ERROR,
-						(errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_PARAMETER_VALUE),
-						 errmsg("parameter \"%s\" requires a Boolean value",
-								"standby_mode")));
-			ereport(DEBUG2,
-					(errmsg_internal("standby_mode = '%s'", item->value)));
-		}
-		else if (strcmp(item->name, "primary_conninfo") == 0)
-		{
-			PrimaryConnInfo = pstrdup(item->value);
-			ereport(DEBUG2,
-					(errmsg_internal("primary_conninfo = '%s'",
-									 PrimaryConnInfo)));
-		}
-		else if (strcmp(item->name, "trigger_file") == 0)
-		{
-			TriggerFile = pstrdup(item->value);
-			ereport(DEBUG2,
-					(errmsg_internal("trigger_file = '%s'",
-									 TriggerFile)));
-		}
-		else
-			ereport(FATAL,
-					(errmsg("unrecognized recovery parameter \"%s\"",
-							item->name)));
+				 errmsg("could not open recovery file trigger \"%s\": %m",
+						RECOVERY_ENABLE_FILE)));
 	}
 
-	/*
-	 * Check for compulsory parameters
-	 */
+	/* Check for compulsory parameters */
 	if (StandbyModeRequested)
 	{
-		if (PrimaryConnInfo == NULL && recoveryRestoreCommand == NULL)
+		if (!restore_command[0] && !primary_conninfo[0])
 			ereport(WARNING,
-					(errmsg("recovery command file \"%s\" specified neither primary_conninfo nor restore_command",
-							RECOVERY_COMMAND_FILE),
+					(errmsg("Neither primary_conninfo nor restore_command specified"),
 					 errhint("The database server will regularly poll the pg_xlog subdirectory to check for files placed there.")));
 	}
 	else
 	{
-		if (recoveryRestoreCommand == NULL)
+		if (!restore_command[0])
 			ereport(FATAL,
-					(errmsg("recovery command file \"%s\" must specify restore_command when standby mode is not enabled",
-							RECOVERY_COMMAND_FILE)));
+					(errmsg("restore_command must be specified when "
+							"standby_mode is not enabled")));
 	}
 
 	/* Enable fetching from archive recovery area */
@@ -4337,16 +4166,17 @@ readRecoveryCommandFile(void)
 	 * command and set InArchiveRecovery, because we need to fetch timeline
 	 * history files from the archive.
 	 */
-	if (rtliGiven)
+	if (strcmp(recovery_target_timeline_string, "") != 0)
 	{
-		if (rtli)
+		if (recovery_target_timeline)
 		{
 			/* Timeline 1 does not have a history file, all else should */
-			if (rtli != 1 && !existsTimeLineHistory(rtli))
+			if (recovery_target_timeline != 1 &&
+				!existsTimeLineHistory(recovery_target_timeline))
 				ereport(FATAL,
 						(errmsg("recovery target timeline %u does not exist",
-								rtli)));
-			recoveryTargetTLI = rtli;
+								recovery_target_timeline)));
+			recoveryTargetTLI = recovery_target_timeline;
 			recoveryTargetIsLatest = false;
 		}
 		else
@@ -4356,8 +4186,6 @@ readRecoveryCommandFile(void)
 			recoveryTargetIsLatest = true;
 		}
 	}
-
-	FreeConfigVariables(head);
 }
 
 /*
@@ -4428,15 +4256,13 @@ exitArchiveRecovery(TimeLineID endTLI, XLogSegNo endLogSegNo)
 	unlink(recoveryPath);		/* ignore any error */
 
 	/*
-	 * Rename the config file out of the way, so that we don't accidentally
-	 * re-enter archive recovery mode in a subsequent crash.
+	 * Remove file that triggered the recovery
 	 */
-	unlink(RECOVERY_COMMAND_DONE);
-	if (rename(RECOVERY_COMMAND_FILE, RECOVERY_COMMAND_DONE) != 0)
+	if (unlink(RECOVERY_ENABLE_FILE) != 0)
 		ereport(FATAL,
 				(errcode_for_file_access(),
-				 errmsg("could not rename file \"%s\" to \"%s\": %m",
-						RECOVERY_COMMAND_FILE, RECOVERY_COMMAND_DONE)));
+				 errmsg("could not remove file \"%s\": %m",
+						RECOVERY_ENABLE_FILE)));
 
 	ereport(LOG,
 			(errmsg("archive recovery complete")));
@@ -4499,7 +4325,7 @@ recoveryStopsHere(XLogRecord *record, bool *includeThis)
 		return false;
 
 	/* Do we have a PITR target at all? */
-	if (recoveryTarget == RECOVERY_TARGET_UNSET)
+	if (recovery_target == RECOVERY_TARGET_UNSET)
 	{
 		/*
 		 * Save timestamp of latest transaction commit/abort if this is a
@@ -4510,7 +4336,7 @@ recoveryStopsHere(XLogRecord *record, bool *includeThis)
 		return false;
 	}
 
-	if (recoveryTarget == RECOVERY_TARGET_XID)
+	if (recovery_target == RECOVERY_TARGET_XID)
 	{
 		/*
 		 * There can be only one transaction end record with this exact
@@ -4521,17 +4347,17 @@ recoveryStopsHere(XLogRecord *record, bool *includeThis)
 		 * they complete. A higher numbered xid will complete before you about
 		 * 50% of the time...
 		 */
-		stopsHere = (record->xl_xid == recoveryTargetXid);
+		stopsHere = (record->xl_xid == recovery_target_xid);
 		if (stopsHere)
-			*includeThis = recoveryTargetInclusive;
+			*includeThis = recovery_target_inclusive;
 	}
-	else if (recoveryTarget == RECOVERY_TARGET_NAME)
+	else if (recovery_target == RECOVERY_TARGET_NAME)
 	{
 		/*
 		 * There can be many restore points that share the same name, so we
 		 * stop at the first one
 		 */
-		stopsHere = (strcmp(recordRPName, recoveryTargetName) == 0);
+		stopsHere = (strcmp(recordRPName, recovery_target_name) == 0);
 
 		/*
 		 * Ignore recoveryTargetInclusive because this is not a transaction
@@ -4546,16 +4372,17 @@ recoveryStopsHere(XLogRecord *record, bool *includeThis)
 		 * we stop after the last one, if we are inclusive, or stop at the
 		 * first one if we are exclusive
 		 */
-		if (recoveryTargetInclusive)
-			stopsHere = (recordXtime > recoveryTargetTime);
+		if (recovery_target_inclusive)
+			stopsHere = (recordXtime > recovery_target_time);
 		else
-			stopsHere = (recordXtime >= recoveryTargetTime);
+			stopsHere = (recordXtime >= recovery_target_time);
 		if (stopsHere)
 			*includeThis = false;
 	}
 
 	if (stopsHere)
 	{
+		recoveryStopTarget = recovery_target;
 		recoveryStopXid = record->xl_xid;
 		recoveryStopTime = recordXtime;
 		recoveryStopAfter = *includeThis;
@@ -4905,36 +4732,28 @@ StartupXLOG(void)
 	recoveryTargetTLI = ControlFile->checkPointCopy.ThisTimeLineID;
 
 	/*
-	 * Check for recovery control file, and if so set up state for offline
-	 * recovery
-	 */
-	readRecoveryCommandFile();
-
-	/*
-	 * Save archive_cleanup_command in shared memory so that other processes
-	 * can see it.
+	 * Check for recovery trigger file, and if so set up state for offline
+	 * recovery.
 	 */
-	strncpy(XLogCtl->archiveCleanupCommand,
-			archiveCleanupCommand ? archiveCleanupCommand : "",
-			sizeof(XLogCtl->archiveCleanupCommand));
+	CheckRecoveryReadyFile();
 
 	if (ArchiveRecoveryRequested)
 	{
 		if (StandbyModeRequested)
 			ereport(LOG,
 					(errmsg("entering standby mode")));
-		else if (recoveryTarget == RECOVERY_TARGET_XID)
+		else if (recovery_target == RECOVERY_TARGET_XID)
 			ereport(LOG,
 					(errmsg("starting point-in-time recovery to XID %u",
-							recoveryTargetXid)));
-		else if (recoveryTarget == RECOVERY_TARGET_TIME)
+							recovery_target_xid)));
+		else if (recovery_target == RECOVERY_TARGET_TIME)
 			ereport(LOG,
 					(errmsg("starting point-in-time recovery to %s",
-							timestamptz_to_str(recoveryTargetTime))));
-		else if (recoveryTarget == RECOVERY_TARGET_NAME)
+							timestamptz_to_str(recovery_target_time))));
+		else if (recovery_target == RECOVERY_TARGET_NAME)
 			ereport(LOG,
 					(errmsg("starting point-in-time recovery to \"%s\"",
-							recoveryTargetName)));
+							recovery_target_name)));
 		else
 			ereport(LOG,
 					(errmsg("starting archive recovery")));
@@ -4960,7 +4779,7 @@ StartupXLOG(void)
 	 * Take ownership of the wakeup latch if we're going to sleep during
 	 * recovery.
 	 */
-	if (StandbyModeRequested)
+	if (ArchiveRecoveryRequested && StandbyModeRequested)
 		OwnLatch(&XLogCtl->recoveryWakeupLatch);
 
 	/* Set up XLOG reader facility */
@@ -4982,7 +4801,7 @@ StartupXLOG(void)
 		 * archive recovery directly.
 		 */
 		InArchiveRecovery = true;
-		if (StandbyModeRequested)
+		if (ArchiveRecoveryRequested && StandbyModeRequested)
 			StandbyMode = true;
 
 		/*
@@ -5048,7 +4867,7 @@ StartupXLOG(void)
 			 ControlFile->state == DB_SHUTDOWNED))
 		{
 			InArchiveRecovery = true;
-			if (StandbyModeRequested)
+			if (ArchiveRecoveryRequested && StandbyModeRequested)
 				StandbyMode = true;
 		}
 
@@ -5208,7 +5027,7 @@ StartupXLOG(void)
 
 	/*
 	 * Check whether we need to force recovery from WAL.  If it appears to
-	 * have been a clean shutdown and we did not have a recovery.conf file,
+	 * have been a clean shutdown and we did not have a standby.enabled file,
 	 * then assume no recovery needed.
 	 */
 	if (checkPoint.redo < RecPtr)
@@ -5222,7 +5041,7 @@ StartupXLOG(void)
 		InRecovery = true;
 	else if (ArchiveRecoveryRequested)
 	{
-		/* force recovery due to presence of recovery.conf */
+		/* force recovery due to presence of standby.enabled */
 		InRecovery = true;
 	}
 
@@ -5541,7 +5360,7 @@ StartupXLOG(void)
 				 */
 				if (recoveryStopsHere(record, &recoveryApply))
 				{
-					if (recoveryPauseAtTarget)
+					if (pause_at_recovery_target)
 					{
 						SetRecoveryPause(true);
 						recoveryPausesHere();
@@ -5705,7 +5524,7 @@ StartupXLOG(void)
 	 * We don't need the latch anymore. It's not strictly necessary to disown
 	 * it, but let's do it for the sake of tidiness.
 	 */
-	if (StandbyModeRequested)
+	if (ArchiveRecoveryRequested && StandbyModeRequested)
 		DisownLatch(&XLogCtl->recoveryWakeupLatch);
 
 	/*
@@ -5795,17 +5614,17 @@ StartupXLOG(void)
 		 * Create a comment for the history file to explain why and where
 		 * timeline changed.
 		 */
-		if (recoveryTarget == RECOVERY_TARGET_XID)
+		if (recovery_target == RECOVERY_TARGET_XID)
 			snprintf(reason, sizeof(reason),
 					 "%s transaction %u",
 					 recoveryStopAfter ? "after" : "before",
 					 recoveryStopXid);
-		else if (recoveryTarget == RECOVERY_TARGET_TIME)
+		else if (recovery_target == RECOVERY_TARGET_TIME)
 			snprintf(reason, sizeof(reason),
 					 "%s %s\n",
 					 recoveryStopAfter ? "after" : "before",
 					 timestamptz_to_str(recoveryStopTime));
-		else if (recoveryTarget == RECOVERY_TARGET_NAME)
+		else if (recovery_target == RECOVERY_TARGET_NAME)
 			snprintf(reason, sizeof(reason),
 					 "at restore point \"%s\"",
 					 recoveryStopName);
@@ -5964,8 +5783,8 @@ StartupXLOG(void)
 		/*
 		 * And finally, execute the recovery_end_command, if any.
 		 */
-		if (recoveryEndCommand)
-			ExecuteRecoveryCommand(recoveryEndCommand,
+		if (recovery_end_command[0])
+			ExecuteRecoveryCommand(recovery_end_command,
 								   "recovery_end_command",
 								   true);
 	}
@@ -6833,7 +6652,7 @@ CreateCheckPoint(int flags)
 		XLogRecPtr	curInsert;
 
 		INSERT_RECPTR(curInsert, Insert, Insert->curridx);
-		if (curInsert == ControlFile->checkPoint + 
+		if (curInsert == ControlFile->checkPoint +
 			MAXALIGN(SizeOfXLogRecord + sizeof(CheckPoint)) &&
 			ControlFile->checkPoint == ControlFile->checkPointCopy.redo)
 		{
@@ -7481,8 +7300,8 @@ CreateRestartPoint(int flags)
 	/*
 	 * Finally, execute archive_cleanup_command, if any.
 	 */
-	if (XLogCtl->archiveCleanupCommand[0])
-		ExecuteRecoveryCommand(XLogCtl->archiveCleanupCommand,
+	if (archive_cleanup_command[0])
+		ExecuteRecoveryCommand(archive_cleanup_command,
 							   "archive_cleanup_command",
 							   false);
 
@@ -9224,7 +9043,7 @@ XLogPageRead(XLogReaderState *xlogreader, XLogRecPtr targetPagePtr, int reqLen,
 		 * Request a restartpoint if we've replayed too much xlog since the
 		 * last one.
 		 */
-		if (StandbyModeRequested && bgwriterLaunched)
+		if (ArchiveRecoveryRequested && StandbyModeRequested && bgwriterLaunched)
 		{
 			if (XLogCheckpointNeeded(readSegNo))
 			{
@@ -9440,7 +9259,7 @@ WaitForWALToBecomeAvailable(XLogRecPtr RecPtr, bool randAccess,
 					 * that when we later jump backwards to start redo at
 					 * RedoStartLSN, we will have the logs streamed already.
 					 */
-					if (PrimaryConnInfo)
+					if (primary_conninfo[0])
 					{
 						XLogRecPtr ptr;
 						TimeLineID tli;
@@ -9461,7 +9280,7 @@ WaitForWALToBecomeAvailable(XLogRecPtr RecPtr, bool randAccess,
 									 tli, curFileTLI);
 						}
 						curFileTLI = tli;
-						RequestXLogStreaming(curFileTLI, ptr, PrimaryConnInfo);
+						RequestXLogStreaming(curFileTLI, ptr);
 					}
 					/*
 					 * Move to XLOG_FROM_STREAM state in either case. We'll get
@@ -9779,14 +9598,14 @@ CheckForStandbyTrigger(void)
 		return true;
 	}
 
-	if (TriggerFile == NULL)
+	if (!trigger_file[0])
 		return false;
 
-	if (stat(TriggerFile, &stat_buf) == 0)
+	if (stat(trigger_file, &stat_buf) == 0)
 	{
 		ereport(LOG,
-				(errmsg("trigger file found: %s", TriggerFile)));
-		unlink(TriggerFile);
+				(errmsg("trigger file found: %s", trigger_file)));
+		unlink(trigger_file);
 		triggered = true;
 		return true;
 	}
diff --git a/src/backend/access/transam/xlogarchive.c b/src/backend/access/transam/xlogarchive.c
index 0c178c5..21e2eee 100644
--- a/src/backend/access/transam/xlogarchive.c
+++ b/src/backend/access/transam/xlogarchive.c
@@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ RestoreArchivedFile(char *path, const char *xlogfname,
 	TimeLineID	restartTli;
 
 	/* In standby mode, restore_command might not be supplied */
-	if (recoveryRestoreCommand == NULL)
+	if (restore_command == NULL)
 		goto not_available;
 
 	/*
@@ -150,7 +150,7 @@ RestoreArchivedFile(char *path, const char *xlogfname,
 	endp = xlogRestoreCmd + MAXPGPATH - 1;
 	*endp = '\0';
 
-	for (sp = recoveryRestoreCommand; *sp; sp++)
+	for (sp = restore_command; *sp; sp++)
 	{
 		if (*sp == '%')
 		{
diff --git a/src/backend/commands/extension.c b/src/backend/commands/extension.c
index 6b7cb5b..69aa528 100644
--- a/src/backend/commands/extension.c
+++ b/src/backend/commands/extension.c
@@ -9,7 +9,7 @@
  * dependent objects can be associated with it.  An extension is created by
  * populating the pg_extension catalog from a "control" file.
  * The extension control file is parsed with the same parser we use for
- * postgresql.conf and recovery.conf.  An extension also has an installation
+ * postgresql.conf.  An extension also has an installation
  * script file, containing SQL commands to create the extension's objects.
  *
  * Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2013, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
diff --git a/src/backend/replication/walreceiver.c b/src/backend/replication/walreceiver.c
index 911a66b..9f8d450 100644
--- a/src/backend/replication/walreceiver.c
+++ b/src/backend/replication/walreceiver.c
@@ -186,7 +186,6 @@ DisableWalRcvImmediateExit(void)
 void
 WalReceiverMain(void)
 {
-	char		conninfo[MAXCONNINFO];
 	XLogRecPtr	startpoint;
 	TimeLineID	startpointTLI;
 	TimeLineID	primaryTLI;
@@ -240,7 +239,6 @@ WalReceiverMain(void)
 	walrcv->walRcvState = WALRCV_STREAMING;
 
 	/* Fetch information required to start streaming */
-	strlcpy(conninfo, (char *) walrcv->conninfo, MAXCONNINFO);
 	startpoint = walrcv->receiveStart;
 	startpointTLI = walrcv->receiveStartTLI;
 
@@ -307,7 +305,7 @@ WalReceiverMain(void)
 
 	/* Establish the connection to the primary for XLOG streaming */
 	EnableWalRcvImmediateExit();
-	walrcv_connect(conninfo);
+	walrcv_connect(primary_conninfo);
 	DisableWalRcvImmediateExit();
 
 	first_stream = true;
@@ -405,8 +403,22 @@ WalReceiverMain(void)
 
 				if (got_SIGHUP)
 				{
+					char    *conninfo = pstrdup(primary_conninfo);
+
 					got_SIGHUP = false;
 					ProcessConfigFile(PGC_SIGHUP);
+
+					/*
+					 * If primary_conninfo has been changed while walreceiver is running,
+					 * shut down walreceiver so that new walreceiver is started and
+					 * it initiates replication with new primary_conninfo.
+					 */
+					if (strcmp(conninfo, primary_conninfo) != 0)
+						ereport(FATAL,
+								(errcode(ERRCODE_ADMIN_SHUTDOWN),
+								 errmsg("terminating walreceiver process because primary_conninfo was changed")));
+					pfree(conninfo);
+
 					XLogWalRcvSendHSFeedback(true);
 				}
 
diff --git a/src/backend/replication/walreceiverfuncs.c b/src/backend/replication/walreceiverfuncs.c
index d414808..d6a5e06 100644
--- a/src/backend/replication/walreceiverfuncs.c
+++ b/src/backend/replication/walreceiverfuncs.c
@@ -219,11 +219,10 @@ ShutdownWalRcv(void)
 /*
  * Request postmaster to start walreceiver.
  *
- * recptr indicates the position where streaming should begin, and conninfo
- * is a libpq connection string to use.
+ * recptr indicates the position where streaming should begin.
  */
 void
-RequestXLogStreaming(TimeLineID tli, XLogRecPtr recptr, const char *conninfo)
+RequestXLogStreaming(TimeLineID tli, XLogRecPtr recptr)
 {
 	/* use volatile pointer to prevent code rearrangement */
 	volatile WalRcvData *walrcv = WalRcv;
@@ -245,11 +244,6 @@ RequestXLogStreaming(TimeLineID tli, XLogRecPtr recptr, const char *conninfo)
 	Assert(walrcv->walRcvState == WALRCV_STOPPED ||
 		   walrcv->walRcvState == WALRCV_WAITING);
 
-	if (conninfo != NULL)
-		strlcpy((char *) walrcv->conninfo, conninfo, MAXCONNINFO);
-	else
-		walrcv->conninfo[0] = '\0';
-
 	if (walrcv->walRcvState == WALRCV_STOPPED)
 	{
 		launch = true;
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/misc/guc.c b/src/backend/utils/misc/guc.c
index 98149fc..55427aa 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/misc/guc.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/misc/guc.c
@@ -30,6 +30,7 @@
 #include "access/transam.h"
 #include "access/twophase.h"
 #include "access/xact.h"
+#include "access/xlog_internal.h"
 #include "catalog/namespace.h"
 #include "commands/async.h"
 #include "commands/prepare.h"
@@ -196,6 +197,14 @@ static bool check_application_name(char **newval, void **extra, GucSource source
 static void assign_application_name(const char *newval, void *extra);
 static const char *show_unix_socket_permissions(void);
 static const char *show_log_file_mode(void);
+static bool check_recovery_target_xid(char **newval, void **extra, GucSource source);
+static void assign_recovery_target_xid(const char *newval, void *extra);
+static bool check_recovery_target_name(char **newval, void **extra, GucSource source);
+static void assign_recovery_target_name(const char *newval, void *extra);
+static bool check_recovery_target_time(char **newval, void **extra, GucSource source);
+static void assign_recovery_target_time(const char *newval, void *extra);
+static bool check_recovery_target_timeline(char **newval, void **extra, GucSource source);
+static void assign_recovery_target_timeline(const char *newval, void *extra);
 
 static char *config_enum_get_options(struct config_enum * record,
 						const char *prefix, const char *suffix,
@@ -468,6 +477,8 @@ static int	wal_block_size;
 static int	wal_segment_size;
 static bool integer_datetimes;
 static int	effective_io_concurrency;
+static char *recovery_target_xid_string;
+static char *recovery_target_time_string;
 
 /* should be static, but commands/variable.c needs to get at this */
 char	   *role_string;
@@ -548,6 +559,10 @@ const char *const config_group_names[] =
 	gettext_noop("Write-Ahead Log / Checkpoints"),
 	/* WAL_ARCHIVING */
 	gettext_noop("Write-Ahead Log / Archiving"),
+	/* WAL_ARCHIVE_RECOVERY */
+	gettext_noop("Write-Ahead Log / Archive Recovery"),
+	/* WAL_RECOVERY_TARGET */
+	gettext_noop("Write-Ahead Log / Recovery Target"),
 	/* REPLICATION */
 	gettext_noop("Replication"),
 	/* REPLICATION_SENDING */
@@ -1376,6 +1391,36 @@ static struct config_bool ConfigureNamesBool[] =
 	},
 
 	{
+		{"recovery_target_inclusive", PGC_SIGHUP, WAL_RECOVERY_TARGET,
+			gettext_noop("Sets whether to include or exclude transaction with recovery target."),
+			NULL
+		},
+		&recovery_target_inclusive,
+		true,
+		NULL, NULL, NULL
+	},
+
+	{
+		{"pause_at_recovery_target", PGC_SIGHUP, WAL_RECOVERY_TARGET,
+			gettext_noop("Sets whether recovery should pause when the recovery target is reached."),
+			NULL
+		},
+		&pause_at_recovery_target,
+		true,
+		NULL, NULL, NULL
+	},
+
+	{
+		{"standby_mode", PGC_POSTMASTER, REPLICATION_STANDBY,
+			gettext_noop("Sets whether to start the server as a standby."),
+			NULL
+		},
+		&StandbyModeRequested,
+		false,
+		NULL, NULL, NULL
+	},
+
+	{
 		{"hot_standby", PGC_POSTMASTER, REPLICATION_STANDBY,
 			gettext_noop("Allows connections and queries during recovery."),
 			NULL
@@ -2544,6 +2589,97 @@ static struct config_string ConfigureNamesString[] =
 	},
 
 	{
+		{"restore_command", PGC_SIGHUP, WAL_ARCHIVE_RECOVERY,
+			gettext_noop("Sets the shell command that will retrieve an archived WAL file."),
+			NULL
+		},
+		&restore_command,
+		"",
+		NULL, NULL, NULL
+	},
+
+	{
+		{"archive_cleanup_command", PGC_SIGHUP, WAL_ARCHIVE_RECOVERY,
+			gettext_noop("Sets the shell command that will be executed at every restartpoint."),
+			NULL
+		},
+		&archive_cleanup_command,
+		"",
+		NULL, NULL, NULL
+	},
+
+	{
+		{"recovery_end_command", PGC_SIGHUP, WAL_ARCHIVE_RECOVERY,
+			gettext_noop("Sets the shell command that will be executed once only at the end of recovery."),
+			NULL
+		},
+		&recovery_end_command,
+		"",
+		NULL, NULL, NULL
+	},
+
+	{
+		{"recovery_target_xid", PGC_SIGHUP, WAL_RECOVERY_TARGET,
+			gettext_noop("Sets the transaction ID up to which recovery will proceed."),
+			NULL
+		},
+		&recovery_target_xid_string,
+		"",
+		check_recovery_target_xid, assign_recovery_target_xid, NULL
+	},
+
+	{
+		{"recovery_target_name", PGC_SIGHUP, WAL_RECOVERY_TARGET,
+			gettext_noop("Sets the named restore point."),
+			NULL
+		},
+		&recovery_target_name,
+		"",
+		check_recovery_target_name, assign_recovery_target_name, NULL
+	},
+
+	{
+		{"recovery_target_time", PGC_SIGHUP, WAL_RECOVERY_TARGET,
+			gettext_noop("Sets the time stamp up to which recovery will proceed."),
+			NULL
+		},
+		&recovery_target_time_string,
+		"",
+		check_recovery_target_time, assign_recovery_target_time, NULL
+	},
+
+	{
+		{"recovery_target_timeline", PGC_POSTMASTER, WAL_RECOVERY_TARGET,
+			gettext_noop("Sets recoverying into a particular timeline."),
+			NULL
+		},
+		&recovery_target_timeline_string,
+		"",
+		check_recovery_target_timeline, assign_recovery_target_timeline, NULL
+	},
+
+	{
+		{"primary_conninfo", PGC_SIGHUP, REPLICATION_STANDBY,
+			gettext_noop("Sets the connection string to be used to connect with the primary."),
+			NULL,
+			GUC_SUPERUSER_ONLY
+		},
+		&primary_conninfo,
+		"",
+		NULL, NULL, NULL
+	},
+
+	{
+		{"trigger_file", PGC_SIGHUP, REPLICATION_STANDBY,
+			gettext_noop("Sets the trigger file whose presence ends recovery in the standby."),
+			NULL
+		},
+		&trigger_file,
+		"",
+		NULL, NULL, NULL
+	},
+
+	{
 		{"client_encoding", PGC_USERSET, CLIENT_CONN_LOCALE,
 			gettext_noop("Sets the client's character set encoding."),
 			NULL,
@@ -8770,4 +8906,158 @@ show_log_file_mode(void)
 	return buf;
 }
 
+static bool
+check_recovery_target_xid(char **newval, void **extra, GucSource source)
+{
+	TransactionId   xid;
+	TransactionId   *myextra;
+
+	if (strcmp(*newval, "") == 0)
+		xid = InvalidTransactionId;
+	else
+	{
+		errno = 0;
+		xid = (TransactionId) strtoul(*newval, NULL, 0);
+		if (errno == EINVAL || errno == ERANGE)
+		{
+			GUC_check_errdetail("recovery_target_xid is not a valid number: \"%s\"",
+								*newval);
+			return false;
+		}
+	}
+
+	myextra = (TransactionId *) guc_malloc(ERROR, sizeof(TransactionId));
+	*myextra = xid;
+	*extra = (void *) myextra;
+
+	return true;
+}
+
+static void
+assign_recovery_target_xid(const char *newval, void *extra)
+{
+	recovery_target_xid = *((TransactionId *) extra);
+
+	if (recovery_target_xid != InvalidTransactionId)
+		recovery_target = RECOVERY_TARGET_XID;
+	else if (recovery_target_name[0])
+		recovery_target = RECOVERY_TARGET_NAME;
+	else if (recovery_target_time != 0)
+		recovery_target = RECOVERY_TARGET_TIME;
+	else
+		recovery_target = RECOVERY_TARGET_UNSET;
+}
+
+static bool
+check_recovery_target_name(char **newval, void **extra, GucSource source)
+{
+	if (strlen(*newval) >= MAXFNAMELEN)
+	{
+		GUC_check_errdetail("\"recovery_target_name\" is too long (maximum %d characters)",
+							MAXFNAMELEN - 1);
+		return false;
+	}
+	return true;
+}
+
+static void
+assign_recovery_target_name(const char *newval, void *extra)
+{
+	if (recovery_target_xid != InvalidTransactionId)
+		recovery_target = RECOVERY_TARGET_XID;
+	else if (newval[0])
+		recovery_target = RECOVERY_TARGET_NAME;
+	else if (recovery_target_time != 0)
+		recovery_target = RECOVERY_TARGET_TIME;
+	else
+		recovery_target = RECOVERY_TARGET_UNSET;
+}
+
+static bool
+check_recovery_target_time(char **newval, void **extra, GucSource source)
+{
+	TimestampTz     time;
+	TimestampTz     *myextra;
+	MemoryContext oldcontext = CurrentMemoryContext;
+
+	PG_TRY();
+	{
+		time = (strcmp(*newval, "") == 0) ?
+			0 :
+			DatumGetTimestampTz(DirectFunctionCall3(timestamptz_in,
+													CStringGetDatum(*newval),
+													ObjectIdGetDatum(InvalidOid),
+													Int32GetDatum(-1)));
+	}
+	PG_CATCH();
+	{
+		ErrorData  *edata;
+
+		/* Save error info */
+		MemoryContextSwitchTo(oldcontext);
+		edata = CopyErrorData();
+		FlushErrorState();
+
+		/* Pass the error message */
+		GUC_check_errdetail("%s", edata->message);
+		FreeErrorData(edata);
+		return false;
+	}
+	PG_END_TRY();
+
+	myextra = (TimestampTz *) guc_malloc(ERROR, sizeof(TimestampTz));
+	*myextra = time;
+	*extra = (void *) myextra;
+
+	return true;
+}
+
+static void
+assign_recovery_target_time(const char *newval, void *extra)
+{
+	recovery_target_time = *((TimestampTz *) extra);
+
+	if (recovery_target_xid != InvalidTransactionId)
+		recovery_target = RECOVERY_TARGET_XID;
+	else if (recovery_target_name[0])
+		recovery_target = RECOVERY_TARGET_NAME;
+	else if (recovery_target_time != 0)
+		recovery_target = RECOVERY_TARGET_TIME;
+	else
+		recovery_target = RECOVERY_TARGET_UNSET;
+}
+
+static bool
+check_recovery_target_timeline(char **newval, void **extra, GucSource source)
+{
+	TimeLineID	tli = 0;
+	TimeLineID	*myextra;
+
+	if (strcmp(*newval, "") == 0 || strcmp(*newval, "latest") == 0)
+		tli = 0;
+	else
+	{
+		errno = 0;
+		tli = (TimeLineID) strtoul(*newval, NULL, 0);
+		if (errno == EINVAL || errno == ERANGE)
+		{
+			GUC_check_errdetail("recovery_target_timeline is not a valid number: \"%s\"",
+								*newval);
+			return false;
+		}
+	}
+
+	myextra = (TimeLineID *) guc_malloc(ERROR, sizeof(TimeLineID));
+	*myextra = tli;
+	*extra = (void *) myextra;
+
+	return true;
+}
+
+static void
+assign_recovery_target_timeline(const char *newval, void *extra)
+{
+	recovery_target_timeline = *((TimeLineID *) extra);
+}
+
 #include "guc-file.c"
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/misc/postgresql.conf.sample b/src/backend/utils/misc/postgresql.conf.sample
index 62aea2f..52a4e71 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/misc/postgresql.conf.sample
+++ b/src/backend/utils/misc/postgresql.conf.sample
@@ -198,6 +198,23 @@
 #archive_timeout = 0		# force a logfile segment switch after this
 				# number of seconds; 0 disables
 
+# - Archive Recovery -
+#restore_command = ''		# command to use to restore an archived logfile segment
+				# placeholders: %p = path of file to restore
+				#               %f = file name only
+				# e.g. 'cp /mnt/server/archivedir/%f %p'
+#archive_cleanup_command = ''	# command to execute at every restartpoint
+#recovery_end_command = ''	# command to execute at completion of recovery
+
+# - Recovery Target -
+#recovery_target_xid = ''
+#recovery_target_name = ''		# e.g. 'daily backup 2011-01-26'
+#recovery_target_time = ''		# e.g. '2004-07-14 22:39:00 EST'
+#recovery_target_timeline = ''		# timeline ID or 'latest'
+					# (change requires restart)
+#recovery_target_inclusive = on
+#pause_at_recovery_target = on		# Pause recovery once target is reached
+
 
 #------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 # REPLICATION
@@ -240,6 +257,11 @@
 #wal_receiver_timeout = 60s		# time that receiver waits for
 					# communication from master
 					# in milliseconds; 0 disables
+#standby_mode = off			# "on" starts the server as a standby
+					# (change requires restart)
+#primary_conninfo = ''			# connection string to connect to the master
+					# e.g. 'host=localhost port=5432'
+#trigger_file = ''			# trigger file to promote the standby
 
 
 #------------------------------------------------------------------------------
diff --git a/src/bin/pg_ctl/pg_ctl.c b/src/bin/pg_ctl/pg_ctl.c
index 7d5e168..274c3a3 100644
--- a/src/bin/pg_ctl/pg_ctl.c
+++ b/src/bin/pg_ctl/pg_ctl.c
@@ -890,7 +890,7 @@ do_stop(void)
 		/*
 		 * If backup_label exists, an online backup is running. Warn the user
 		 * that smart shutdown will wait for it to finish. However, if
-		 * recovery.conf is also present, we're recovering from an online
+		 * standby.enabled is also present, we're recovering from an online
 		 * backup instead of performing one.
 		 */
 		if (shutdown_mode == SMART_MODE &&
@@ -978,7 +978,7 @@ do_restart(void)
 		/*
 		 * If backup_label exists, an online backup is running. Warn the user
 		 * that smart shutdown will wait for it to finish. However, if
-		 * recovery.conf is also present, we're recovering from an online
+		 * standby.enabled is also present, we're recovering from an online
 		 * backup instead of performing one.
 		 */
 		if (shutdown_mode == SMART_MODE &&
@@ -1089,7 +1089,7 @@ do_promote(void)
 		exit(1);
 	}
 
-	/* If recovery.conf doesn't exist, the server is not in standby mode */
+	/* If standby.enabled doesn't exist, the server is not in standby mode */
 	if (stat(recovery_file, &statbuf) != 0)
 	{
 		write_stderr(_("%s: cannot promote server; "
@@ -2245,7 +2245,7 @@ main(int argc, char **argv)
 		snprintf(postopts_file, MAXPGPATH, "%s/postmaster.opts", pg_data);
 		snprintf(pid_file, MAXPGPATH, "%s/postmaster.pid", pg_data);
 		snprintf(backup_file, MAXPGPATH, "%s/backup_label", pg_data);
-		snprintf(recovery_file, MAXPGPATH, "%s/recovery.conf", pg_data);
+		snprintf(recovery_file, MAXPGPATH, "%s/standby.enabled", pg_data);
 	}
 
 	switch (ctl_command)
diff --git a/src/include/access/xlog.h b/src/include/access/xlog.h
index 8a65492..d85bd6d 100644
--- a/src/include/access/xlog.h
+++ b/src/include/access/xlog.h
@@ -190,6 +190,20 @@ extern char *XLogArchiveCommand;
 extern bool EnableHotStandby;
 extern bool fullPageWrites;
 extern bool log_checkpoints;
+extern char *restore_command;
+extern char *archive_cleanup_command;
+extern char *recovery_end_command;
+extern bool	StandbyModeRequested;
+extern char *primary_conninfo;
+extern char *trigger_file;
+extern RecoveryTargetType recovery_target;
+extern TransactionId recovery_target_xid;
+extern TimestampTz recovery_target_time;
+extern char *recovery_target_name;
+extern bool recovery_target_inclusive;
+extern bool pause_at_recovery_target;
+extern char *recovery_target_timeline_string;
+extern TimeLineID recovery_target_timeline;
 
 /* WAL levels */
 typedef enum WalLevel
diff --git a/src/include/replication/walreceiver.h b/src/include/replication/walreceiver.h
index 72878f8..d51d86f 100644
--- a/src/include/replication/walreceiver.h
+++ b/src/include/replication/walreceiver.h
@@ -149,7 +149,7 @@ extern void WalRcvShmemInit(void);
 extern void ShutdownWalRcv(void);
 extern bool WalRcvStreaming(void);
 extern bool WalRcvRunning(void);
-extern void RequestXLogStreaming(TimeLineID tli, XLogRecPtr recptr, const char *conninfo);
+extern void RequestXLogStreaming(TimeLineID tli, XLogRecPtr recptr);
 extern XLogRecPtr GetWalRcvWriteRecPtr(XLogRecPtr *latestChunkStart, TimeLineID *receiveTLI);
 extern int	GetReplicationApplyDelay(void);
 extern int	GetReplicationTransferLatency(void);
diff --git a/src/include/utils/guc_tables.h b/src/include/utils/guc_tables.h
index 7360ce3..a2d3281 100644
--- a/src/include/utils/guc_tables.h
+++ b/src/include/utils/guc_tables.h
@@ -68,6 +68,8 @@ enum config_group
 	WAL_SETTINGS,
 	WAL_CHECKPOINTS,
 	WAL_ARCHIVING,
+	WAL_ARCHIVE_RECOVERY,
+	WAL_RECOVERY_TARGET,
 	REPLICATION,
 	REPLICATION_SENDING,
 	REPLICATION_MASTER,

diff --git a/contrib/pg_archivecleanup/pg_archivecleanup.c b/contrib/pg_archivecleanup/pg_archivecleanup.c
index e97a11c..fb01da9 100644
--- a/contrib/pg_archivecleanup/pg_archivecleanup.c
+++ b/contrib/pg_archivecleanup/pg_archivecleanup.c
@@ -255,7 +255,7 @@ usage(void)
 	printf("  -x EXT         clean up files if they have this extension\n");
 	printf("  -?, --help     show this help, then exit\n");
 	printf("\n"
-		   "For use as archive_cleanup_command in recovery.conf when standby_mode = on:\n"
+		   "For use as archive_cleanup_command in postgresql.conf when standby_mode = on:\n"
 		   "  archive_cleanup_command = 'pg_archivecleanup [OPTION]... ARCHIVELOCATION %%r'\n"
 		   "e.g.\n"
 		   "  archive_cleanup_command = 'pg_archivecleanup /mnt/server/archiverdir %%r'\n");
diff --git a/contrib/pg_standby/pg_standby.c b/contrib/pg_standby/pg_standby.c
index 11615eb..c76b116 100644
--- a/contrib/pg_standby/pg_standby.c
+++ b/contrib/pg_standby/pg_standby.c
@@ -531,7 +531,7 @@ usage(void)
 	printf("  -w MAXWAITTIME     max seconds to wait for a file (0=no limit) (default=0)\n");
 	printf("  -?, --help         show this help, then exit\n");
 	printf("\n"
-		   "Main intended use as restore_command in recovery.conf:\n"
+		   "Main intended use as restore_command in postgresql.conf:\n"
 		   "  restore_command = 'pg_standby [OPTION]... ARCHIVELOCATION %%f %%p %%r'\n"
 		   "e.g.\n"
 	"  restore_command = 'pg_standby /mnt/server/archiverdir %%f %%p %%r'\n");
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/backup.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/backup.sgml
index c4215be..f3040ff 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/backup.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/backup.sgml
@@ -1002,10 +1002,17 @@ SELECT pg_stop_backup();
    </listitem>
    <listitem>
     <para>
-     Create a recovery command file <filename>recovery.conf</> in the cluster
-     data directory (see <xref linkend="recovery-config">). You might
-     also want to temporarily modify <filename>pg_hba.conf</> to prevent
-     ordinary users from connecting until you are sure the recovery was successful.
+     Set up recovery parameters in <filename>postgresql.conf</> (see
+     <xref linkend="runtime-config-wal-archive-recovery"> and
+     <xref linkend="runtime-config-wal-recovery-target">).
+    </para>
+   </listitem>
+   <listitem>
+    <para>
+     Create a file called <filename>standby.enabled</> in the cluster data
+     directory. You might also want to temporarily modify <filename>pg_hba.conf</>
+     to prevent ordinary users from connecting until you are sure the recovery
+     was successful.
     </para>
    </listitem>
    <listitem>
@@ -1014,10 +1021,9 @@ SELECT pg_stop_backup();
      proceed to read through the archived WAL files it needs.  Should the
      recovery be terminated because of an external error, the server can
      simply be restarted and it will continue recovery.  Upon completion
-     of the recovery process, the server will rename
-     <filename>recovery.conf</> to <filename>recovery.done</> (to prevent
-     accidentally re-entering recovery mode later) and then
-     commence normal database operations.
+     of the recovery process, the server will delete
+     <filename>standby.enabled</> (to prevent accidentally re-entering
+     recovery mode later) and then commence normal database operations.
     </para>
    </listitem>
    <listitem>
@@ -1031,12 +1037,11 @@ SELECT pg_stop_backup();
    </para>
 
    <para>
-    The key part of all this is to set up a recovery configuration file that
-    describes how you want to recover and how far the recovery should
-    run.  You can use <filename>recovery.conf.sample</> (normally
-    located in the installation's <filename>share/</> directory) as a
-    prototype.  The one thing that you absolutely must specify in
-    <filename>recovery.conf</> is the <varname>restore_command</>,
+    The key part of all this is to set up recovery parameters that
+    specify how you want to recover and how far the recovery should
+    run. The one thing that you absolutely must specify in
+    <filename>postgresql.conf</> to recover from the backup is
+    the <varname>restore_command</>,
     which tells <productname>PostgreSQL</> how to retrieve archived
     WAL file segments.  Like the <varname>archive_command</>, this is
     a shell command string.  It can contain <literal>%f</>, which is
@@ -1090,7 +1095,7 @@ restore_command = 'cp /mnt/server/archivedir/%f %p'
    <para>
     If you want to recover to some previous point in time (say, right before
     the junior DBA dropped your main transaction table), just specify the
-    required stopping point in <filename>recovery.conf</>.  You can specify
+    required stopping point in <filename>postgresql.conf</>.  You can specify
     the stop point, known as the <quote>recovery target</>, either by
     date/time, named restore point or by completion of a specific transaction
     ID.  As of this writing only the date/time and named restore point options
@@ -1187,8 +1192,9 @@ restore_command = 'cp /mnt/server/archivedir/%f %p'
     The default behavior of recovery is to recover along the same timeline
     that was current when the base backup was taken.  If you wish to recover
     into some child timeline (that is, you want to return to some state that
-    was itself generated after a recovery attempt), you need to specify the
-    target timeline ID in <filename>recovery.conf</>.  You cannot recover into
+    was itself generated after a recovery attempt), you need to set
+    <xref linkend="guc-recovery-target-timeline"> to the
+    target timeline ID in <filename>postgresql.conf</>.  You cannot recover into
     timelines that branched off earlier than the base backup.
    </para>
   </sect2>
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/config.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/config.sgml
index 6e1b084..7fc45c6 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/config.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/config.sgml
@@ -2166,6 +2166,312 @@ include 'filename'
 
      </variablelist>
     </sect2>
+   </sect1>
+
+   <sect1 id="runtime-config-recovery">
+    <title>Recovery</title>
+
+    <sect2 id="runtime-config-wal-archive-recovery">
+     <title>Archive Recovery</title>
+
+     <para>
+      These settings control the behavior of server when put in recovery by
+      creating a recovery trigger file <filename>standby.enabled</> in data
+      folder. Those parameters are not used if server is not in recovery.
+     </para>
+
+     <variablelist>
+      <varlistentry id="guc-restore-command" xreflabel="restore_command">
+       <term><varname>restore_command</varname> (<type>string</type>)</term>
+       <indexterm>
+        <primary><varname>restore_command</> configuration parameter</primary>
+       </indexterm>
+       <listitem>
+        <para>
+         The shell command to execute to retrieve an archived segment of
+         the WAL file series. This parameter is required for archive recovery,
+         but optional for streaming replication.
+         Any <literal>%f</> in the string is
+         replaced by the name of the file to retrieve from the archive,
+         and any <literal>%p</> is replaced by the copy destination path name
+         on the server.
+         (The path name is relative to the current working directory,
+         i.e., the cluster's data directory.)
+         Any <literal>%r</> is replaced by the name of the file containing the
+         last valid restart point. That is the earliest file that must be kept
+         to allow a restore to be restartable, so this information can be used
+         to truncate the archive to just the minimum required to support
+         restarting from the current restore. <literal>%r</> is typically only
+         used by warm-standby configurations
+         (see <xref linkend="warm-standby">).
+         Write <literal>%%</> to embed an actual <literal>%</> character.
+        </para>
+        <para>
+         It is important for the command to return a zero exit status
+         only if it succeeds.  The command <emphasis>will</> be asked for file
+         names that are not present in the archive; it must return nonzero
+         when so asked.  Examples:
+<programlisting>
+restore_command = 'cp /mnt/server/archivedir/%f "%p"'
+restore_command = 'copy "C:\\server\\archivedir\\%f" "%p"'  # Windows
+</programlisting>
+        </para>
+        <para>
+         This parameter can only be set in the <filename>postgresql.conf</>
+         file or on the server command line. It only has effect during archive
+         recovery or in standby mode.
+        </para>
+       </listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+
+      <varlistentry id="guc-archive-cleanup-command" xreflabel="archive_cleanup_command">
+       <term><varname>archive_cleanup_command</varname> (<type>string</type>)</term>
+       <indexterm>
+         <primary><varname>archive_cleanup_command</> configuration parameter</primary>
+       </indexterm>
+       <listitem>
+        <para>
+         The shell command that will be executed at every restartpoint.
+         The purpose of <varname>archive_cleanup_command</> is to
+         provide a mechanism for cleaning up old archived WAL files that
+         are no longer needed by the standby server.
+         Any <literal>%r</> is replaced by the name of the file containing the
+         last valid restart point.
+         That is the earliest file that must be <emphasis>kept</> to allow a
+         restore to be restartable, and so all files earlier than <literal>%r</>
+         may be safely removed.
+         This information can be used to truncate the archive to just the
+         minimum required to support restart from the current restore.
+         The <xref linkend="pgarchivecleanup"> module
+         is often used in <varname>archive_cleanup_command</> for
+         single-standby configurations, for example:
+<programlisting>archive_cleanup_command = 'pg_archivecleanup /mnt/server/archivedir %r'</programlisting>
+         Note however that if multiple standby servers are restoring from the
+         same archive directory, you will need to ensure that you do not delete
+         WAL files until they are no longer needed by any of the servers.
+         <varname>archive_cleanup_command</> would typically be used in a
+         warm-standby configuration (see <xref linkend="warm-standby">).
+         Write <literal>%%</> to embed an actual <literal>%</> character in the
+         command.
+        </para>
+        <para>
+         If the command returns a non-zero exit status then a WARNING log
+         message will be written.
+        </para>
+        <para>
+         This parameter can only be set in the <filename>postgresql.conf</>
+         file or on the server command line. It only has effect during archive
+         recovery or in standby mode.
+        </para>
+       </listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+
+      <varlistentry id="guc-recovery-end-command" xreflabel="recovery_end_command">
+       <term><varname>recovery_end_command</varname> (<type>string</type>)</term>
+       <indexterm>
+         <primary><varname>recovery_end_command</> configuration parameter</primary>
+       </indexterm>
+       <listitem>
+        <para>
+         The shell command that will be executed once only
+         at the end of recovery. This parameter is optional. The purpose of the
+         <varname>recovery_end_command</> is to provide a mechanism for cleanup
+         following replication or recovery.
+         Any <literal>%r</> is replaced by the name of the file containing the
+         last valid restart point, like in <varname>archive_cleanup_command</>.
+        </para>
+        <para>
+         If the command returns a non-zero exit status then a WARNING log
+         message will be written and the database will proceed to start up
+         anyway.  An exception is that if the command was terminated by a
+         signal, the database will not proceed with startup.
+        </para>
+        <para>
+         This parameter can only be set in the <filename>postgresql.conf</>
+         file or on the server command line. It only has effect during archive
+         recovery or in standby mode.
+        </para>
+       </listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+     </variablelist>
+    </sect2>
+
+    <sect2 id="runtime-config-wal-recovery-target">
+     <title>Recovery Target</title>
+
+     <variablelist>
+      <varlistentry id="guc-recovery-target-name" xreflabel="recovery_target_name">
+       <term><varname>recovery_target_name</varname> (<type>string</type>)</term>
+       <indexterm>
+        <primary><varname>recovery_target_name</> configuration parameter</primary>
+       </indexterm>
+       <listitem>
+        <para>
+         Specifies the named restore point, created with
+         <function>pg_create_restore_point()</> to which recovery will proceed.
+         At most one of <varname>recovery_target_name</>,
+         <varname>recovery_target_time</> or
+         <varname>recovery_target_xid</> can be specified.  The default
+         value is an empty string, which will recover to the end of the WAL log.
+        </para>
+        <para>
+         This parameter can only be set in the <filename>postgresql.conf</>
+         file or on the server command line. It only has effect during archive
+         recovery or in standby mode.
+        </para>
+       </listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+
+      <varlistentry id="guc-recovery-target-time" xreflabel="recovery_target_time">
+       <term><varname>recovery_target_time</varname> (<type>string</type>)</term>
+       <indexterm>
+        <primary><varname>recovery_target_time</> configuration parameter</primary>
+       </indexterm>
+       <listitem>
+        <para>
+         Specifies the time stamp up to which recovery will proceed.
+         This parameter must be specified in the date/time format
+         (see <xref linkend="datatype-datetime-input"> for details).
+         At most one of <varname>recovery_target_time</>,
+         <varname>recovery_target_name</> or
+         <varname>recovery_target_xid</> can be specified.
+         The default value is an empty string, which will recover to
+         the end of the WAL log. The precise stopping point is also
+         influenced by <varname>recovery_target_inclusive</>.
+        </para>
+        <para>
+         This parameter can only be set in the <filename>postgresql.conf</>
+         file or on the server command line. It only has effect during archive
+         recovery or in standby mode.
+        </para>
+       </listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+
+      <varlistentry id="guc-recovery-target-xid" xreflabel="recovery_target_xid">
+       <term><varname>recovery_target_xid</varname> (<type>string</type>)</term>
+       <indexterm>
+        <primary><varname>recovery_target_xid</> configuration parameter</primary>
+       </indexterm>
+       <listitem>
+        <para>
+         Specifies the transaction ID up to which recovery will proceed.
+         Keep in mind that while transaction IDs are assigned sequentially
+         at transaction start, transactions can complete in a different
+         numeric order. The transactions that will be recovered are
+         those that committed before (and optionally including)
+         the specified one. At most one of <varname>recovery_target_xid</>,
+         <varname>recovery_target_name</> or
+         <varname>recovery_target_time</> can be specified.
+         The default value is an empty string, which will recover to the end of
+         the WAL log. The precise stopping point is also influenced by
+         <varname>recovery_target_inclusive</>.
+        </para>
+        <para>
+         This parameter can only be set in the <filename>postgresql.conf</>
+         file or on the server command line. It only has effect during archive
+         recovery or in standby mode.
+        </para>
+       </listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+
+      <varlistentry id="guc-recovery-target-inclusive" xreflabel="recovery_target_inclusive">
+       <term><varname>recovery_target_inclusive</varname> (<type>boolean</type>)</term>
+       <indexterm>
+        <primary><varname>recovery_target_inclusive</> configuration parameter</primary>
+       </indexterm>
+       <listitem>
+        <para>
+         Specifies whether we stop just after the specified recovery target
+         (<literal>on</>), or just before the recovery target (<literal>off</>).
+         Applies to both <varname>recovery_target_time</>
+         and <varname>recovery_target_xid</>, whichever one is
+         specified for this recovery.  This indicates whether transactions
+         having exactly the target commit time or ID, respectively, will
+         be included in the recovery.  Default is <literal>on</>.
+        </para>
+        <para>
+         This parameter can only be set in the <filename>postgresql.conf</>
+         file or on the server command line. It only has effect during archive
+         recovery or in standby mode.
+        </para>
+       </listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+
+      <varlistentry id="guc-recovery-target-timeline" xreflabel="recovery_target_timeline">
+       <term><varname>recovery_target_timeline</varname> (<type>string</type>)</term>
+       <indexterm>
+        <primary><varname>recovery_target_timeline</> configuration parameter</primary>
+       </indexterm>
+       <listitem>
+        <para>
+         Specifies recovering into a particular timeline.  The default value is
+         an empty string, which will recover along the same timeline that was
+         current when the base backup was taken. Setting this to
+         <literal>latest</> recovers to the latest timeline found in the archive,
+         which is useful in a standby server. Other than that you only need to
+         set this parameter in complex re-recovery situations, where you need
+         to return to a state that itself was reached after a point-in-time
+         recovery. See <xref linkend="backup-timelines"> for discussion.
+        </para>
+        <para>
+         This parameter can only be set at server start. It only has effect
+         during archive recovery or in standby mode.
+        </para>
+       </listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+
+      <varlistentry id="guc-pause-at-recovery-target" xreflabel="pause_at_recovery_target">
+       <term><varname>pause_at_recovery_target</varname> (<type>boolean</type>)</term>
+       <indexterm>
+        <primary><varname>pause_at_recovery_target</> configuration parameter</primary>
+       </indexterm>
+       <listitem>
+        <para>
+         Specifies whether recovery should pause when the recovery target
+         is reached. The default is <literal>on</>.
+         This is intended to allow queries to be executed against the
+         database to check if this recovery target is the most desirable
+         point for recovery. The paused state can be resumed by using
+         <function>pg_xlog_replay_resume()</> (See
+         <xref linkend="functions-recovery-control-table">), which then
+         causes recovery to end. If this recovery target is not the
+         desired stopping point, then shutdown the server, change the
+         recovery target settings to a later target and restart to
+         continue recovery.
+        </para>
+        <para>
+         This parameter can only be set in the <filename>postgresql.conf</>
+         file or on the server command line. It only has effect during archive
+         recovery or in standby mode if recovery target is set.
+        </para>
+       </listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+     </variablelist>
+     </sect2>
+
+    <sect2 id="runtime-config-">
+     <title>Migration from recovery.conf</title>
+
+     <para>
+      Prior <productname>PostgreSQL</> 9.2, all the recovery parameters had
+      to be specified in a configuration file called <filename>recovery.conf</>
+      located at the root of data folder of server. Servers running
+      <productname>PostgreSQL</> 9.3 and above return an error if
+      <filename>recovery.conf</> is found in data folder.
+     </para>
+
+     <para>
+      <filename>postgresql.conf</> provides two parameters allowing the
+      inclusion of external configuration files by either setting
+      <literal>include_if_exists</> to include a given file or <literal>include_dir</>
+      to include a directory containing a set of files configuration files.
+      In order to migrate an existing <filename>recovery.conf</> used with
+      a server whose version is lower than 9.2, set one of those parameters to
+      include it correctly. It is also necessary to rename <filename>recovery.conf</>
+      to a new name if the file included is located at root of data folder.
+     </para>
+
+    </sect2>
 
    </sect1>
 
@@ -2386,6 +2692,93 @@ include 'filename'
 
     <variablelist>
 
+     <varlistentry id="guc-standby-mode" xreflabel="standby_mode">
+      <term><varname>standby_mode</varname> (<type>boolean</type>)</term>
+      <indexterm>
+       <primary><varname>standby_mode</> configuration parameter</primary>
+      </indexterm>
+      <listitem>
+       <para>
+        Specifies whether to start the <productname>PostgreSQL</> server as
+        a standby when the file called <filename>standby.enabled</> exists.
+        The default value is <literal>off</>.
+        If this parameter is <literal>on</>, the server will not
+        stop recovery when the end of archived WAL is reached,
+        but will keep trying to continue recovery by fetching new WAL segments
+        using <varname>restore_command</> and/or by connecting to
+        the primary server as specified by the <varname>primary_conninfo</>
+        setting.
+       </para>
+       <para>
+        This parameter can only be set at server start. It only has effect
+        if file <filename>standby.enabled</> exists.
+       </para>
+      </listitem>
+     </varlistentry>
+
+     <varlistentry id="guc-primary-conninfo" xreflabel="primary_conninfo">
+      <term><varname>primary_conninfo</varname> (<type>string</type>)</term>
+      <indexterm>
+        <primary><varname>primary_conninfo</> configuration parameter</primary>
+      </indexterm>
+      <listitem>
+       <para>
+        Specifies a connection string to be used for the standby server
+        to connect with the primary. This string is in the format
+        accepted by the libpq <function>PQconnectdb</function> function,
+        described in <xref linkend="libpq-connect">. If any option is
+        unspecified in this string, then the corresponding environment
+        variable (see <xref linkend="libpq-envars">) is checked. If the
+        environment variable is not set either, then defaults are used.
+        If this parameter is an empty string (the default), no attempt is
+        made to connect to the master.
+       </para>
+       <para>
+        The connection string should specify the host name (or address)
+        of the primary server, as well as the port number if it is not
+        the same as the standby server's default.
+        Also specify a user name corresponding to a role that has the
+        <literal>REPLICATION</> and <literal>LOGIN</> privileges on the
+        primary (see
+        <xref linkend="streaming-replication-authentication">).
+        A password needs to be provided too, if the primary demands password
+        authentication.  It can be provided in the
+        <varname>primary_conninfo</varname> string, or in a separate
+        <filename>~/.pgpass</> file on the standby server (use
+        <literal>replication</> as the database name).
+        Do not specify a database name in the
+        <varname>primary_conninfo</varname> string.
+       </para>
+       <para>
+        This parameter can only be set in the <filename>postgresql.conf</>
+        file or on the server command line. It only has effect in standby mode.
+       </para>
+       <para>
+        If this parameter is changed while replication is in progress,
+        the standby terminates replication, and then tries to restart
+        replication with new setting.
+       </para>
+      </listitem>
+     </varlistentry>
+
+     <varlistentry id="guc-trigger-file" xreflabel="trigger_file">
+      <term><varname>trigger_file</varname> (<type>string</type>)</term>
+      <indexterm>
+        <primary><varname>trigger_file</> configuration parameter</primary>
+      </indexterm>
+      <listitem>
+       <para>
+        Specifies a trigger file whose presence ends recovery in the
+        standby.  Even if this value is not set, you can still promote
+        the standby using <command>pg_ctl promote</>.
+       </para>
+       <para>
+        This parameter can only be set in the <filename>postgresql.conf</>
+        file or on the server command line. It only has effect in standby mode.
+       </para>
+      </listitem>
+    </varlistentry>
+
      <varlistentry id="guc-hot-standby" xreflabel="hot_standby">
       <term><varname>hot_standby</varname> (<type>boolean</type>)</term>
       <indexterm>
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/filelist.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/filelist.sgml
index b623f58..2eef816 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/filelist.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/filelist.sgml
@@ -43,7 +43,6 @@
 <!ENTITY manage-ag     SYSTEM "manage-ag.sgml">
 <!ENTITY monitoring    SYSTEM "monitoring.sgml">
 <!ENTITY regress       SYSTEM "regress.sgml">
-<!ENTITY recovery-config SYSTEM "recovery-config.sgml">
 <!ENTITY runtime       SYSTEM "runtime.sgml">
 <!ENTITY config        SYSTEM "config.sgml">
 <!ENTITY user-manag    SYSTEM "user-manag.sgml">
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/func.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/func.sgml
index 490d710..692470b 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/func.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/func.sgml
@@ -14969,7 +14969,7 @@ postgres=# select pg_start_backup('label_goes_here');
     <function>pg_create_restore_point</> creates a named transaction log
     record that can be used as recovery target, and returns the corresponding
     transaction log location.  The given name can then be used with
-    <xref linkend="recovery-target-name"> to specify the point up to which
+    <xref linkend="guc-recovery-target-name"> to specify the point up to which
     recovery will proceed.  Avoid creating multiple restore points with the
     same name, since recovery will stop at the first one whose name matches
     the recovery target.
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/high-availability.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/high-availability.sgml
index c8f6fa8..a2993f5 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/high-availability.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/high-availability.sgml
@@ -591,7 +591,7 @@ protocol to make nodes agree on a serializable transactional order.
    <para>
     In standby mode, the server continuously applies WAL received from the
     master server. The standby server can read WAL from a WAL archive
-    (see <xref linkend="restore-command">) or directly from the master
+    (see <xref linkend="guc-restore-command">) or directly from the master
     over a TCP connection (streaming replication). The standby server will
     also attempt to restore any WAL found in the standby cluster's
     <filename>pg_xlog</> directory. That typically happens after a server
@@ -658,8 +658,8 @@ protocol to make nodes agree on a serializable transactional order.
    <para>
     To set up the standby server, restore the base backup taken from primary
     server (see <xref linkend="backup-pitr-recovery">). Create a recovery
-    command file <filename>recovery.conf</> in the standby's cluster data
-    directory, and turn on <varname>standby_mode</>. Set
+    trigger file <filename>standby.enabled</> in the standby's cluster data
+    directory. Turn on <varname>standby_mode</> and set
     <varname>restore_command</> to a simple command to copy files from
     the WAL archive. If you plan to have multiple standby servers for high
     availability purposes, set <varname>recovery_target_timeline</> to
@@ -695,7 +695,7 @@ protocol to make nodes agree on a serializable transactional order.
 
    <para>
     If you're using a WAL archive, its size can be minimized using the <xref
-    linkend="archive-cleanup-command"> parameter to remove files that are no
+    linkend="guc-archive-cleanup-command"> parameter to remove files that are no
     longer required by the standby server.
     The <application>pg_archivecleanup</> utility is designed specifically to
     be used with <varname>archive_cleanup_command</> in typical single-standby
@@ -706,7 +706,7 @@ protocol to make nodes agree on a serializable transactional order.
    </para>
 
    <para>
-    A simple example of a <filename>recovery.conf</> is:
+    A simple example of standby settings is:
 <programlisting>
 standby_mode = 'on'
 primary_conninfo = 'host=192.168.1.50 port=5432 user=foo password=foopass'
@@ -763,8 +763,8 @@ archive_cleanup_command = 'pg_archivecleanup /path/to/archive %r'
     To use streaming replication, set up a file-based log-shipping standby
     server as described in <xref linkend="warm-standby">. The step that
     turns a file-based log-shipping standby into streaming replication
-    standby is setting <varname>primary_conninfo</> setting in the
-    <filename>recovery.conf</> file to point to the primary server. Set
+    standby is setting <varname>primary_conninfo</> to
+    point to the primary server. Set
     <xref linkend="guc-listen-addresses"> and authentication options
     (see <filename>pg_hba.conf</>) on the primary so that the standby server
     can connect to the <literal>replication</> pseudo-database on the primary
@@ -824,15 +824,14 @@ host    replication     foo             192.168.1.100/32        md5
     </para>
     <para>
      The host name and port number of the primary, connection user name,
-     and password are specified in the <filename>recovery.conf</> file.
+     and password are specified in <varname>primary_conninfo</>.
      The password can also be set in the <filename>~/.pgpass</> file on the
      standby (specify <literal>replication</> in the <replaceable>database</>
      field).
      For example, if the primary is running on host IP <literal>192.168.1.50</>,
      port <literal>5432</literal>, the account name for replication is
      <literal>foo</>, and the password is <literal>foopass</>, the administrator
-     can add the following line to the <filename>recovery.conf</> file on the
-     standby:
+     can set <varname>primary_conninfo</> on the standby like this:
 
 <programlisting>
 # The standby connects to the primary that is running on host 192.168.1.50
@@ -1212,8 +1211,8 @@ primary_conninfo = 'host=192.168.1.50 port=5432 user=foo password=foopass'
    <para>
     To trigger failover of a log-shipping standby server,
     run <command>pg_ctl promote</> or create a trigger
-    file with the file name and path specified by the <varname>trigger_file</>
-    setting in <filename>recovery.conf</>. If you're planning to use
+    file with the file name and path specified by the <varname>trigger_file</>.
+    If you're planning to use
     <command>pg_ctl promote</> to fail over, <varname>trigger_file</> is
     not required. If you're setting up the reporting servers that are
     only used to offload read-only queries from the primary, not for high
@@ -1258,8 +1257,7 @@ primary_conninfo = 'host=192.168.1.50 port=5432 user=foo password=foopass'
     The magic that makes the two loosely coupled servers work together is
     simply a <varname>restore_command</> used on the standby that,
     when asked for the next WAL file, waits for it to become available from
-    the primary. The <varname>restore_command</> is specified in the
-    <filename>recovery.conf</> file on the standby server. Normal recovery
+    the primary. Normal recovery
     processing would request a file from the WAL archive, reporting failure
     if the file was unavailable.  For standby processing it is normal for
     the next WAL file to be unavailable, so the standby must wait for
@@ -1346,8 +1344,14 @@ if (!triggered)
      </listitem>
      <listitem>
       <para>
+       Create a file called <filename>standby.enabled</> in the standby's
+       cluster data directory to trigger the recovery.
+      </para>
+     </listitem>
+     <listitem>
+      <para>
        Begin recovery on the standby server from the local WAL
-       archive, using a <filename>recovery.conf</> that specifies a
+       archive, specifying a
        <varname>restore_command</> that waits as described
        previously (see <xref linkend="backup-pitr-recovery">).
       </para>
@@ -1838,9 +1842,8 @@ if (!triggered)
    <title>Administrator's Overview</title>
 
    <para>
-    If <varname>hot_standby</> is turned <literal>on</> in
-    <filename>postgresql.conf</> and there is a <filename>recovery.conf</>
-    file present, the server will run in Hot Standby mode.
+    If <varname>hot_standby</> is turned <literal>on</> and there is a file
+    <filename>standby.enabled</> present, the server will run in Hot Standby mode.
     However, it may take some time for Hot Standby connections to be allowed,
     because the server will not accept connections until it has completed
     sufficient recovery to provide a consistent state against which queries
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/pgarchivecleanup.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/pgarchivecleanup.sgml
index 932914b..2984da4 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/pgarchivecleanup.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/pgarchivecleanup.sgml
@@ -38,8 +38,8 @@
 
   <para>
    To configure a standby
-   server to use <application>pg_archivecleanup</>, put this into its
-   <filename>recovery.conf</filename> configuration file:
+   server to use <application>pg_archivecleanup</>, specify
+   <xref linkend="guc-archive-cleanup-command"> like this:
 <programlisting>
 archive_cleanup_command = 'pg_archivecleanup <replaceable>archivelocation</> %r'
 </programlisting>
@@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ archive_cleanup_command = 'pg_archivecleanup <replaceable>archivelocation</> %r'
    files should be removed.
   </para>
   <para>
-   When used within <xref linkend="archive-cleanup-command">, all WAL files
+   When used within <varname>archive_cleanup_command</>, all WAL files
    logically preceding the value of the <literal>%r</> argument will be removed
    from <replaceable>archivelocation</>. This minimizes the number of files
    that need to be retained, while preserving crash-restart capability.  Use of
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/pgstandby.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/pgstandby.sgml
index ca2b5c0..15097ca 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/pgstandby.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/pgstandby.sgml
@@ -46,8 +46,8 @@
 
   <para>
    To configure a standby
-   server to use <application>pg_standby</>, put this into its
-   <filename>recovery.conf</filename> configuration file:
+   server to use <application>pg_standby</>, specify
+   <xref linkend="guc-restore-command"> like this:
 <programlisting>
 restore_command = 'pg_standby <replaceable>archiveDir</> %f %p %r'
 </programlisting>
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/postgres.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/postgres.sgml
index 15e4ef6..26e8dc2 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/postgres.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/postgres.sgml
@@ -155,7 +155,6 @@
   &maintenance;
   &backup;
   &high-availability;
-  &recovery-config;
   &monitoring;
   &diskusage;
   &wal;
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/recovery-config.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/recovery-config.sgml
deleted file mode 100644
index c0c543e..0000000
--- a/doc/src/sgml/recovery-config.sgml
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,361 +0,0 @@
-<!-- doc/src/sgml/recovery-config.sgml -->
-
-<chapter id="recovery-config">
-  <title>Recovery Configuration</title>
-
-  <indexterm>
-   <primary>configuration</primary>
-   <secondary>of recovery</secondary>
-   <tertiary>of a standby server</tertiary>
-  </indexterm>
-
-   <para>
-    This chapter describes the settings available in the
-    <filename>recovery.conf</><indexterm><primary>recovery.conf</></>
-    file. They apply only for the duration of the
-    recovery.  They must be reset for any subsequent recovery you wish to
-    perform.  They cannot be changed once recovery has begun.
-   </para>
-
-   <para>
-     Settings in <filename>recovery.conf</> are specified in the format
-     <literal>name = 'value'</>. One parameter is specified per line.
-     Hash marks (<literal>#</literal>) designate the rest of the
-     line as a comment.  To embed a single quote in a parameter
-     value, write two quotes (<literal>''</>).
-   </para>
-
-   <para>
-    A sample file, <filename>share/recovery.conf.sample</>,
-    is provided in the installation's <filename>share/</> directory.
-   </para>
-
-  <sect1 id="archive-recovery-settings">
-
-    <title>Archive Recovery Settings</title>
-     <variablelist>
-
-     <varlistentry id="restore-command" xreflabel="restore_command">
-      <term><varname>restore_command</varname> (<type>string</type>)</term>
-      <indexterm>
-        <primary><varname>restore_command</> recovery parameter</primary>
-      </indexterm>
-      <listitem>
-       <para>
-        The shell command to execute to retrieve an archived segment of
-        the WAL file series. This parameter is required for archive recovery,
-        but optional for streaming replication.
-        Any <literal>%f</> in the string is
-        replaced by the name of the file to retrieve from the archive,
-        and any <literal>%p</> is replaced by the copy destination path name
-        on the server.
-        (The path name is relative to the current working directory,
-        i.e., the cluster's data directory.)
-        Any <literal>%r</> is replaced by the name of the file containing the
-        last valid restart point. That is the earliest file that must be kept
-        to allow a restore to be restartable, so this information can be used
-        to truncate the archive to just the minimum required to support
-        restarting from the current restore. <literal>%r</> is typically only
-        used by warm-standby configurations
-        (see <xref linkend="warm-standby">).
-        Write <literal>%%</> to embed an actual <literal>%</> character.
-       </para>
-
-       <para>
-        It is important for the command to return a zero exit status
-        only if it succeeds.  The command <emphasis>will</> be asked for file
-        names that are not present in the archive; it must return nonzero
-        when so asked.  Examples:
-<programlisting>
-restore_command = 'cp /mnt/server/archivedir/%f "%p"'
-restore_command = 'copy "C:\\server\\archivedir\\%f" "%p"'  # Windows
-</programlisting>
-       </para>
-      </listitem>
-     </varlistentry>
-
-     <varlistentry id="archive-cleanup-command" xreflabel="archive_cleanup_command">
-      <term><varname>archive_cleanup_command</varname> (<type>string</type>)</term>
-      <indexterm>
-        <primary><varname>archive_cleanup_command</> recovery parameter</primary>
-      </indexterm>
-      <listitem>
-       <para>
-        This optional parameter specifies a shell command that will be executed
-        at every restartpoint.  The purpose of
-        <varname>archive_cleanup_command</> is to provide a mechanism for
-        cleaning up old archived WAL files that are no longer needed by the
-        standby server.
-        Any <literal>%r</> is replaced by the name of the file containing the
-        last valid restart point.
-        That is the earliest file that must be <emphasis>kept</> to allow a
-        restore to be restartable, and so all files earlier than <literal>%r</>
-        may be safely removed.
-        This information can be used to truncate the archive to just the
-        minimum required to support restart from the current restore.
-        The <xref linkend="pgarchivecleanup"> module
-        is often used in <varname>archive_cleanup_command</> for
-        single-standby configurations, for example:
-<programlisting>archive_cleanup_command = 'pg_archivecleanup /mnt/server/archivedir %r'</programlisting>
-        Note however that if multiple standby servers are restoring from the
-        same archive directory, you will need to ensure that you do not delete
-        WAL files until they are no longer needed by any of the servers.
-        <varname>archive_cleanup_command</> would typically be used in a
-        warm-standby configuration (see <xref linkend="warm-standby">).
-        Write <literal>%%</> to embed an actual <literal>%</> character in the
-        command.
-       </para>
-       <para>
-        If the command returns a non-zero exit status then a WARNING log
-        message will be written.
-       </para>
-      </listitem>
-     </varlistentry>
-
-     <varlistentry id="recovery-end-command" xreflabel="recovery_end_command">
-      <term><varname>recovery_end_command</varname> (<type>string</type>)</term>
-      <indexterm>
-        <primary><varname>recovery_end_command</> recovery parameter</primary>
-      </indexterm>
-      <listitem>
-       <para>
-        This parameter specifies a shell command that will be executed once only
-        at the end of recovery. This parameter is optional. The purpose of the
-        <varname>recovery_end_command</> is to provide a mechanism for cleanup
-        following replication or recovery.
-        Any <literal>%r</> is replaced by the name of the file containing the
-        last valid restart point, like in <xref linkend="archive-cleanup-command">.
-       </para>
-       <para>
-        If the command returns a non-zero exit status then a WARNING log
-        message will be written and the database will proceed to start up
-        anyway.  An exception is that if the command was terminated by a
-        signal, the database will not proceed with startup.
-       </para>
-      </listitem>
-     </varlistentry>
-
-    </variablelist>
-
-  </sect1>
-
-  <sect1 id="recovery-target-settings">
-
-    <title>Recovery Target Settings</title>
-     <variablelist>
-
-     <varlistentry id="recovery-target-name" xreflabel="recovery_target_name">
-      <term><varname>recovery_target_name</varname>
-           (<type>string</type>)
-      </term>
-      <indexterm>
-        <primary><varname>recovery_target_name</> recovery parameter</primary>
-      </indexterm>
-      <listitem>
-       <para>
-        This parameter specifies the named restore point, created with
-        <function>pg_create_restore_point()</> to which recovery will proceed.
-        At most one of <varname>recovery_target_name</>,
-        <xref linkend="recovery-target-time"> or
-        <xref linkend="recovery-target-xid"> can be specified.  The default is to
-        recover to the end of the WAL log.
-       </para>
-      </listitem>
-     </varlistentry>
-
-     <varlistentry id="recovery-target-time" xreflabel="recovery_target_time">
-      <term><varname>recovery_target_time</varname>
-           (<type>timestamp</type>)
-      </term>
-      <indexterm>
-        <primary><varname>recovery_target_time</> recovery parameter</primary>
-      </indexterm>
-      <listitem>
-       <para>
-        This parameter specifies the time stamp up to which recovery
-        will proceed.
-        At most one of <varname>recovery_target_time</>,
-        <xref linkend="recovery-target-name"> or
-        <xref linkend="recovery-target-xid"> can be specified.
-        The default is to recover to the end of the WAL log.
-        The precise stopping point is also influenced by
-        <xref linkend="recovery-target-inclusive">.
-       </para>
-      </listitem>
-     </varlistentry>
-
-     <varlistentry id="recovery-target-xid" xreflabel="recovery_target_xid">
-      <term><varname>recovery_target_xid</varname> (<type>string</type>)</term>
-      <indexterm>
-        <primary><varname>recovery_target_xid</> recovery parameter</primary>
-      </indexterm>
-      <listitem>
-       <para>
-        This parameter specifies the transaction ID up to which recovery
-        will proceed. Keep in mind
-        that while transaction IDs are assigned sequentially at transaction
-        start, transactions can complete in a different numeric order.
-        The transactions that will be recovered are those that committed
-        before (and optionally including) the specified one.
-        At most one of <varname>recovery_target_xid</>,
-        <xref linkend="recovery-target-name"> or
-        <xref linkend="recovery-target-time"> can be specified.
-        The default is to recover to the end of the WAL log.
-        The precise stopping point is also influenced by
-        <xref linkend="recovery-target-inclusive">.
-       </para>
-      </listitem>
-     </varlistentry>
-
-     <varlistentry id="recovery-target-inclusive"
-                   xreflabel="recovery_target_inclusive">
-      <term><varname>recovery_target_inclusive</varname>
-        (<type>boolean</type>)
-      </term>
-      <indexterm>
-        <primary><varname>recovery_target_inclusive</> recovery parameter</primary>
-      </indexterm>
-      <listitem>
-       <para>
-        Specifies whether we stop just after the specified recovery target
-        (<literal>true</literal>), or just before the recovery target
-        (<literal>false</literal>).
-        Applies to both <xref linkend="recovery-target-time">
-        and <xref linkend="recovery-target-xid">, whichever one is
-        specified for this recovery.  This indicates whether transactions
-        having exactly the target commit time or ID, respectively, will
-        be included in the recovery.  Default is <literal>true</>.
-       </para>
-      </listitem>
-     </varlistentry>
-
-     <varlistentry id="recovery-target-timeline"
-                   xreflabel="recovery_target_timeline">
-      <term><varname>recovery_target_timeline</varname>
-        (<type>string</type>)
-      </term>
-      <indexterm>
-        <primary><varname>recovery_target_timeline</> recovery parameter</primary>
-      </indexterm>
-      <listitem>
-       <para>
-        Specifies recovering into a particular timeline.  The default is
-        to recover along the same timeline that was current when the
-        base backup was taken. Setting this to <literal>latest</> recovers
-        to the latest timeline found in the archive, which is useful in
-        a standby server. Other than that you only need to set this parameter
-        in complex re-recovery situations, where you need to return to
-        a state that itself was reached after a point-in-time recovery.
-        See <xref linkend="backup-timelines"> for discussion.
-       </para>
-      </listitem>
-     </varlistentry>
-
-     <varlistentry id="pause-at-recovery-target"
-                   xreflabel="pause_at_recovery_target">
-      <term><varname>pause_at_recovery_target</varname>
-        (<type>boolean</type>)
-      </term>
-      <indexterm>
-        <primary><varname>pause_at_recovery_target</> recovery parameter</primary>
-      </indexterm>
-      <listitem>
-       <para>
-        Specifies whether recovery should pause when the recovery target
-        is reached. The default is true.
-        This is intended to allow queries to be executed against the
-        database to check if this recovery target is the most desirable
-        point for recovery. The paused state can be resumed by using
-        <function>pg_xlog_replay_resume()</> (See
-        <xref linkend="functions-recovery-control-table">), which then
-        causes recovery to end. If this recovery target is not the
-        desired stopping point, then shutdown the server, change the
-        recovery target settings to a later target and restart to
-        continue recovery.
-       </para>
-       <para>
-        This setting has no effect if <xref linkend="guc-hot-standby"> is not
-        enabled, or if no recovery target is set.
-       </para>
-      </listitem>
-     </varlistentry>
-
-     </variablelist>
-   </sect1>
-
-  <sect1 id="standby-settings">
-
-    <title>Standby Server Settings</title>
-     <variablelist>
-
-       <varlistentry id="standby-mode" xreflabel="standby_mode">
-        <term><varname>standby_mode</varname> (<type>boolean</type>)</term>
-        <indexterm>
-          <primary><varname>standby_mode</> recovery parameter</primary>
-        </indexterm>
-        <listitem>
-         <para>
-          Specifies whether to start the <productname>PostgreSQL</> server as
-          a standby. If this parameter is <literal>on</>, the server will
-          not stop recovery when the end of archived WAL is reached, but
-          will keep trying to continue recovery by fetching new WAL segments
-          using <varname>restore_command</>
-          and/or by connecting to the primary server as specified by the
-          <varname>primary_conninfo</> setting.
-         </para>
-        </listitem>
-       </varlistentry>
-       <varlistentry id="primary-conninfo" xreflabel="primary_conninfo">
-        <term><varname>primary_conninfo</varname> (<type>string</type>)</term>
-        <indexterm>
-          <primary><varname>primary_conninfo</> recovery parameter</primary>
-        </indexterm>
-        <listitem>
-         <para>
-          Specifies a connection string to be used for the standby server
-          to connect with the primary. This string is in the format
-          described in <xref linkend="libpq-connstring">. If any option is
-          unspecified in this string, then the corresponding environment
-          variable (see <xref linkend="libpq-envars">) is checked. If the
-          environment variable is not set either, then
-          defaults are used.
-         </para>
-         <para>
-          The connection string should specify the host name (or address)
-          of the primary server, as well as the port number if it is not
-          the same as the standby server's default.
-          Also specify a user name corresponding to a suitably-privileged role
-          on the primary (see
-          <xref linkend="streaming-replication-authentication">).
-          A password needs to be provided too, if the primary demands password
-          authentication.  It can be provided in the
-          <varname>primary_conninfo</varname> string, or in a separate
-          <filename>~/.pgpass</> file on the standby server (use
-          <literal>replication</> as the database name).
-          Do not specify a database name in the
-          <varname>primary_conninfo</varname> string.
-         </para>
-         <para>
-          This setting has no effect if <varname>standby_mode</> is <literal>off</>.
-         </para>
-        </listitem>
-       </varlistentry>
-       <varlistentry id="trigger-file" xreflabel="trigger_file">
-        <term><varname>trigger_file</varname> (<type>string</type>)</term>
-        <indexterm>
-          <primary><varname>trigger_file</> recovery parameter</primary>
-        </indexterm>
-        <listitem>
-         <para>
-          Specifies a trigger file whose presence ends recovery in the
-          standby.  Even if this value is not set, you can still promote
-          the standby using <command>pg_ctl promote</>.
-          This setting has no effect if <varname>standby_mode</> is <literal>off</>.
-         </para>
-        </listitem>
-       </varlistentry>
-
-     </variablelist>
-   </sect1>
-
-</chapter>
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/ref/pg_basebackup.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/ref/pg_basebackup.sgml
index 578541a..df8c34d 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/ref/pg_basebackup.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/ref/pg_basebackup.sgml
@@ -190,11 +190,11 @@ PostgreSQL documentation
 
      <varlistentry>
       <term><option>-R</option></term>
-      <term><option>--write-recovery-conf</option></term>
+      <term><option>--write-standby-enable</option></term>
       <listitem>
 
        <para>
-        Write a minimal recovery.conf in the output directory (or into
+        Write a minimal standby.enabled in the output directory (or into
         the base archive file when using tar format) to ease setting
         up a standby server.
        </para>
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/release-9.1.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/release-9.1.sgml
index b524477..f10e02f 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/release-9.1.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/release-9.1.sgml
@@ -4279,7 +4279,7 @@
       <listitem>
        <para>
         Add <filename>recovery.conf</> setting <link
-        linkend="pause-at-recovery-target"><varname>pause_at_recovery_target</></link>
+        linkend="guc-pause-at-recovery-target"><varname>pause_at_recovery_target</></link>
         to pause recovery at target (Simon Riggs)
        </para>
 
@@ -4299,7 +4299,7 @@
        <para>
         These named restore points can be specified as recovery
         targets using the new <filename>recovery.conf</> setting
-        <link linkend="recovery-target-name"><varname>recovery_target_name</></link>.
+        <link linkend="guc-recovery-target-name"><varname>recovery_target_name</></link>.
        </para>
       </listitem>
 
@@ -4331,8 +4331,7 @@
 
       <listitem>
        <para>
-        Allow <link
-        linkend="recovery-config"><filename>recovery.conf</></link>
+        Allow <filename>recovery.conf</>
         to use the same quoting behavior as <filename>postgresql.conf</>
         (Dimitri Fontaine)
        </para>
diff --git a/doc/src/sgml/release.sgml b/doc/src/sgml/release.sgml
index 2515329..252bf13 100644
--- a/doc/src/sgml/release.sgml
+++ b/doc/src/sgml/release.sgml
@@ -5,8 +5,8 @@ Typical markup:
 
 &<>                             use & escapes
 PostgreSQL                      <productname>
-postgresql.conf, pg_hba.conf,
-        recovery.conf           <filename>
+postgresql.conf, pg_hba.conf
+        standby.enabled         <filename>
 [A-Z][A-Z_ ]+[A-Z_]             <command>, <literal>, <envar>
 [A-Za-z_][A-Za-z0-9_]+()        <function>
 -[-A-Za-z_]+                    <option>
diff --git a/src/backend/Makefile b/src/backend/Makefile
index 318cdbc..58d42c5 100644
--- a/src/backend/Makefile
+++ b/src/backend/Makefile
@@ -225,7 +225,6 @@ endif
 	$(INSTALL_DATA) $(srcdir)/libpq/pg_hba.conf.sample '$(DESTDIR)$(datadir)/pg_hba.conf.sample'
 	$(INSTALL_DATA) $(srcdir)/libpq/pg_ident.conf.sample '$(DESTDIR)$(datadir)/pg_ident.conf.sample'
 	$(INSTALL_DATA) $(srcdir)/utils/misc/postgresql.conf.sample '$(DESTDIR)$(datadir)/postgresql.conf.sample'
-	$(INSTALL_DATA) $(srcdir)/access/transam/recovery.conf.sample '$(DESTDIR)$(datadir)/recovery.conf.sample'
 
 install-bin: postgres $(POSTGRES_IMP) installdirs
 	$(INSTALL_PROGRAM) postgres$(X) '$(DESTDIR)$(bindir)/postgres$(X)'
@@ -282,8 +281,7 @@ endif
 	$(MAKE) -C tsearch uninstall-data
 	rm -f '$(DESTDIR)$(datadir)/pg_hba.conf.sample' \
 	      '$(DESTDIR)$(datadir)/pg_ident.conf.sample' \
-              '$(DESTDIR)$(datadir)/postgresql.conf.sample' \
-	      '$(DESTDIR)$(datadir)/recovery.conf.sample'
+              '$(DESTDIR)$(datadir)/postgresql.conf.sample'
 
 
 ##########################################################################
diff --git a/src/backend/access/transam/recovery.conf.sample b/src/backend/access/transam/recovery.conf.sample
deleted file mode 100644
index 5acfa57..0000000
--- a/src/backend/access/transam/recovery.conf.sample
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,132 +0,0 @@
-# -------------------------------
-# PostgreSQL recovery config file
-# -------------------------------
-#
-# Edit this file to provide the parameters that PostgreSQL needs to
-# perform an archive recovery of a database, or to act as a replication
-# standby.
-#
-# If "recovery.conf" is present in the PostgreSQL data directory, it is
-# read on postmaster startup.  After successful recovery, it is renamed
-# to "recovery.done" to ensure that we do not accidentally re-enter
-# archive recovery or standby mode.
-#
-# This file consists of lines of the form:
-#
-#   name = value
-#
-# Comments are introduced with '#'.
-#
-# The complete list of option names and allowed values can be found
-# in the PostgreSQL documentation.
-#
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# ARCHIVE RECOVERY PARAMETERS
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-#
-# restore_command
-#
-# specifies the shell command that is executed to copy log files
-# back from archival storage.  The command string may contain %f,
-# which is replaced by the name of the desired log file, and %p,
-# which is replaced by the absolute path to copy the log file to.
-#
-# This parameter is *required* for an archive recovery, but optional
-# for streaming replication.
-#
-# It is important that the command return nonzero exit status on failure.
-# The command *will* be asked for log files that are not present in the
-# archive; it must return nonzero when so asked.
-#
-# NOTE that the basename of %p will be different from %f; do not
-# expect them to be interchangeable.
-#
-#restore_command = ''		# e.g. 'cp /mnt/server/archivedir/%f %p'
-#
-#
-# archive_cleanup_command
-#
-# specifies an optional shell command to execute at every restartpoint.
-# This can be useful for cleaning up the archive of a standby server.
-#
-#archive_cleanup_command = ''
-#
-# recovery_end_command
-#
-# specifies an optional shell command to execute at completion of recovery.
-# This can be useful for cleaning up after the restore_command.
-#
-#recovery_end_command = ''
-#
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# RECOVERY TARGET PARAMETERS
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-#
-# By default, recovery will rollforward to the end of the WAL log.
-# If you want to stop rollforward at a specific point, you
-# must set a recovery target.
-#
-# You may set a recovery target either by transactionId, by name,
-# or by timestamp. Recovery may either include or exclude the
-# transaction(s) with the recovery target value (ie, stop either
-# just after or just before the given target, respectively).
-#
-#
-#recovery_target_name = ''	# e.g. 'daily backup 2011-01-26'
-#
-#recovery_target_time = ''	# e.g. '2004-07-14 22:39:00 EST'
-#
-#recovery_target_xid = ''
-#
-#recovery_target_inclusive = true
-#
-#
-# If you want to recover into a timeline other than the "main line" shown in
-# pg_control, specify the timeline number here, or write 'latest' to get
-# the latest branch for which there's a history file.
-#
-#recovery_target_timeline = 'latest'
-#
-#
-# If pause_at_recovery_target is enabled, recovery will pause when
-# the recovery target is reached. The pause state will continue until
-# pg_xlog_replay_resume() is called. This setting has no effect if
-# hot standby is not enabled, or if no recovery target is set.
-#
-#pause_at_recovery_target = true
-#
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# STANDBY SERVER PARAMETERS
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-#
-# standby_mode
-#
-# When standby_mode is enabled, the PostgreSQL server will work as a
-# standby. It will continuously wait for the additional XLOG records, using
-# restore_command and/or primary_conninfo.
-#
-#standby_mode = off
-#
-# primary_conninfo
-#
-# If set, the PostgreSQL server will try to connect to the primary using this
-# connection string and receive XLOG records continuously.
-#
-#primary_conninfo = ''		# e.g. 'host=localhost port=5432'
-#
-#
-# By default, a standby server keeps restoring XLOG records from the
-# primary indefinitely. If you want to stop the standby mode, finish recovery
-# and open the system in read/write mode, specify path to a trigger file.
-# The server will poll the trigger file path periodically and start as a
-# primary server when it's found.
-#
-#trigger_file = ''
-#
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-# HOT STANDBY PARAMETERS
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-#
-# Hot Standby related parameters are listed in postgresql.conf
-#
-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
diff --git a/src/backend/access/transam/xlog.c b/src/backend/access/transam/xlog.c
index 07c68ad..5a0b5fe 100644
--- a/src/backend/access/transam/xlog.c
+++ b/src/backend/access/transam/xlog.c
@@ -63,11 +63,12 @@
 extern bool bootstrap_data_checksums;
 
 /* File path names (all relative to $PGDATA) */
-#define RECOVERY_COMMAND_FILE	"recovery.conf"
-#define RECOVERY_COMMAND_DONE	"recovery.done"
-#define PROMOTE_SIGNAL_FILE "promote"
+#define RECOVERY_ENABLE_FILE	"standby.enabled"
+#define PROMOTE_SIGNAL_FILE	"promote"
 #define FAST_PROMOTE_SIGNAL_FILE "fast_promote"
 
+/* recovery.conf is not supported anymore */
+#define RECOVERY_COMMAND_FILE	"recovery.conf"
 
 /* User-settable parameters */
 int			CheckPointSegments = 3;
@@ -83,6 +84,23 @@ int			sync_method = DEFAULT_SYNC_METHOD;
 int			wal_level = WAL_LEVEL_MINIMAL;
 int			CommitDelay = 0;	/* precommit delay in microseconds */
 int			CommitSiblings = 5; /* # concurrent xacts needed to sleep */
+char	   *restore_command = NULL;
+char	   *archive_cleanup_command = NULL;
+char	   *recovery_end_command = NULL;
+bool		StandbyModeRequested = false;
+char	   *primary_conninfo = NULL;
+char	   *trigger_file = NULL;
+RecoveryTargetType	recovery_target = RECOVERY_TARGET_UNSET;
+TransactionId		recovery_target_xid = InvalidTransactionId;
+TimestampTz			recovery_target_time = 0;
+char	   *recovery_target_name = NULL;
+bool		recovery_target_inclusive = true;
+bool		pause_at_recovery_target = true;
+char	   *recovery_target_timeline_string = NULL;
+TimeLineID	recovery_target_timeline = 0;
+
+/* are we currently in standby mode? */
+bool StandbyMode = false;
 
 #ifdef WAL_DEBUG
 bool		XLOG_DEBUG = false;
@@ -206,29 +224,11 @@ bool InArchiveRecovery = false;
 /* Was the last xlog file restored from archive, or local? */
 static bool restoredFromArchive = false;
 
-/* options taken from recovery.conf for archive recovery */
-char *recoveryRestoreCommand = NULL;
-static char *recoveryEndCommand = NULL;
-static char *archiveCleanupCommand = NULL;
-static RecoveryTargetType recoveryTarget = RECOVERY_TARGET_UNSET;
-static bool recoveryTargetInclusive = true;
-static bool recoveryPauseAtTarget = true;
-static TransactionId recoveryTargetXid;
-static TimestampTz recoveryTargetTime;
-static char *recoveryTargetName;
-
-/* options taken from recovery.conf for XLOG streaming */
-static bool StandbyModeRequested = false;
-static char *PrimaryConnInfo = NULL;
-static char *TriggerFile = NULL;
-
-/* are we currently in standby mode? */
-bool StandbyMode = false;
-
 /* whether request for fast promotion has been made yet */
 static bool fast_promote = false;
 
 /* if recoveryStopsHere returns true, it saves actual stop xid/time/name here */
+static RecoveryTargetType recoveryStopTarget;
 static TransactionId recoveryStopXid;
 static TimestampTz recoveryStopTime;
 static char recoveryStopName[MAXFNAMELEN];
@@ -437,12 +437,6 @@ typedef struct XLogCtlData
 	TimeLineID	PrevTimeLineID;
 
 	/*
-	 * archiveCleanupCommand is read from recovery.conf but needs to be in
-	 * shared memory so that the checkpointer process can access it.
-	 */
-	char		archiveCleanupCommand[MAXPGPATH];
-
-	/*
 	 * SharedRecoveryInProgress indicates if we're still in crash or archive
 	 * recovery.  Protected by info_lck.
 	 */
@@ -631,7 +625,7 @@ static bool InRedo = false;
 static bool bgwriterLaunched = false;
 
 
-static void readRecoveryCommandFile(void);
+static void CheckRecoveryReadyFile(void);
 static void exitArchiveRecovery(TimeLineID endTLI, XLogSegNo endLogSegNo);
 static bool recoveryStopsHere(XLogRecord *record, bool *includeThis);
 static void recoveryPausesHere(void);
@@ -3326,7 +3320,7 @@ ReadRecord(XLogReaderState *xlogreader, XLogRecPtr RecPtr, int emode,
 				ereport(DEBUG1,
 						(errmsg_internal("reached end of WAL in pg_xlog, entering archive recovery")));
 				InArchiveRecovery = true;
-				if (StandbyModeRequested)
+				if (ArchiveRecoveryRequested && StandbyModeRequested)
 					StandbyMode = true;
 
 				/* initialize minRecoveryPoint to this record */
@@ -4148,212 +4142,47 @@ str_time(pg_time_t tnow)
 }
 
 /*
- * See if there is a recovery command file (recovery.conf), and if so
- * read in parameters for archive recovery and XLOG streaming.
- *
- * The file is parsed using the main configuration parser.
+ * Check to see if there is a recovery trigger file (standby.enabled).
+ * If so, validate recovery parameters and determine recovery target timeline.
  */
 static void
-readRecoveryCommandFile(void)
+CheckRecoveryReadyFile(void)
 {
-	FILE	   *fd;
-	TimeLineID	rtli = 0;
-	bool		rtliGiven = false;
-	ConfigVariable *item,
-			   *head = NULL,
-			   *tail = NULL;
-
-	fd = AllocateFile(RECOVERY_COMMAND_FILE, "r");
+	FILE *fd;
+
+	/* Check the presence of recovery.conf, it is not supported anymore */
+	if (AllocateFile(RECOVERY_COMMAND_FILE, "r") != NULL)
+		ereport(FATAL,
+				(errmsg("\"%s\" is not supported anymore as a recovery method",
+						RECOVERY_COMMAND_FILE),
+				 errdetail("Refer to appropriate documentation about migration methods")));
+
+	/* Check the presence of file standby.enabled, the file triggering recovery */
+	fd = AllocateFile(RECOVERY_ENABLE_FILE, "r");
 	if (fd == NULL)
 	{
 		if (errno == ENOENT)
 			return;				/* not there, so no archive recovery */
 		ereport(FATAL,
 				(errcode_for_file_access(),
-				 errmsg("could not open recovery command file \"%s\": %m",
-						RECOVERY_COMMAND_FILE)));
-	}
-
-	/*
-	 * Since we're asking ParseConfigFp() to report errors as FATAL, there's
-	 * no need to check the return value.
-	 */
-	(void) ParseConfigFp(fd, RECOVERY_COMMAND_FILE, 0, FATAL, &head, &tail);
-
-	FreeFile(fd);
-
-	for (item = head; item; item = item->next)
-	{
-		if (strcmp(item->name, "restore_command") == 0)
-		{
-			recoveryRestoreCommand = pstrdup(item->value);
-			ereport(DEBUG2,
-					(errmsg_internal("restore_command = '%s'",
-									 recoveryRestoreCommand)));
-		}
-		else if (strcmp(item->name, "recovery_end_command") == 0)
-		{
-			recoveryEndCommand = pstrdup(item->value);
-			ereport(DEBUG2,
-					(errmsg_internal("recovery_end_command = '%s'",
-									 recoveryEndCommand)));
-		}
-		else if (strcmp(item->name, "archive_cleanup_command") == 0)
-		{
-			archiveCleanupCommand = pstrdup(item->value);
-			ereport(DEBUG2,
-					(errmsg_internal("archive_cleanup_command = '%s'",
-									 archiveCleanupCommand)));
-		}
-		else if (strcmp(item->name, "pause_at_recovery_target") == 0)
-		{
-			if (!parse_bool(item->value, &recoveryPauseAtTarget))
-				ereport(ERROR,
-						(errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_PARAMETER_VALUE),
-						 errmsg("parameter \"%s\" requires a Boolean value", "pause_at_recovery_target")));
-			ereport(DEBUG2,
-					(errmsg_internal("pause_at_recovery_target = '%s'",
-									 item->value)));
-		}
-		else if (strcmp(item->name, "recovery_target_timeline") == 0)
-		{
-			rtliGiven = true;
-			if (strcmp(item->value, "latest") == 0)
-				rtli = 0;
-			else
-			{
-				errno = 0;
-				rtli = (TimeLineID) strtoul(item->value, NULL, 0);
-				if (errno == EINVAL || errno == ERANGE)
-					ereport(FATAL,
-							(errmsg("recovery_target_timeline is not a valid number: \"%s\"",
-									item->value)));
-			}
-			if (rtli)
-				ereport(DEBUG2,
-				   (errmsg_internal("recovery_target_timeline = %u", rtli)));
-			else
-				ereport(DEBUG2,
-					 (errmsg_internal("recovery_target_timeline = latest")));
-		}
-		else if (strcmp(item->name, "recovery_target_xid") == 0)
-		{
-			errno = 0;
-			recoveryTargetXid = (TransactionId) strtoul(item->value, NULL, 0);
-			if (errno == EINVAL || errno == ERANGE)
-				ereport(FATAL,
-				 (errmsg("recovery_target_xid is not a valid number: \"%s\"",
-						 item->value)));
-			ereport(DEBUG2,
-					(errmsg_internal("recovery_target_xid = %u",
-									 recoveryTargetXid)));
-			recoveryTarget = RECOVERY_TARGET_XID;
-		}
-		else if (strcmp(item->name, "recovery_target_time") == 0)
-		{
-			/*
-			 * if recovery_target_xid or recovery_target_name specified, then
-			 * this overrides recovery_target_time
-			 */
-			if (recoveryTarget == RECOVERY_TARGET_XID ||
-				recoveryTarget == RECOVERY_TARGET_NAME)
-				continue;
-			recoveryTarget = RECOVERY_TARGET_TIME;
-
-			/*
-			 * Convert the time string given by the user to TimestampTz form.
-			 */
-			recoveryTargetTime =
-				DatumGetTimestampTz(DirectFunctionCall3(timestamptz_in,
-												CStringGetDatum(item->value),
-												ObjectIdGetDatum(InvalidOid),
-														Int32GetDatum(-1)));
-			ereport(DEBUG2,
-					(errmsg_internal("recovery_target_time = '%s'",
-								   timestamptz_to_str(recoveryTargetTime))));
-		}
-		else if (strcmp(item->name, "recovery_target_name") == 0)
-		{
-			/*
-			 * if recovery_target_xid specified, then this overrides
-			 * recovery_target_name
-			 */
-			if (recoveryTarget == RECOVERY_TARGET_XID)
-				continue;
-			recoveryTarget = RECOVERY_TARGET_NAME;
-
-			recoveryTargetName = pstrdup(item->value);
-			if (strlen(recoveryTargetName) >= MAXFNAMELEN)
-				ereport(FATAL,
-						(errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_PARAMETER_VALUE),
-						 errmsg("recovery_target_name is too long (maximum %d characters)",
-								MAXFNAMELEN - 1)));
-
-			ereport(DEBUG2,
-					(errmsg_internal("recovery_target_name = '%s'",
-									 recoveryTargetName)));
-		}
-		else if (strcmp(item->name, "recovery_target_inclusive") == 0)
-		{
-			/*
-			 * does nothing if a recovery_target is not also set
-			 */
-			if (!parse_bool(item->value, &recoveryTargetInclusive))
-				ereport(ERROR,
-						(errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_PARAMETER_VALUE),
-						 errmsg("parameter \"%s\" requires a Boolean value",
-								"recovery_target_inclusive")));
-			ereport(DEBUG2,
-					(errmsg_internal("recovery_target_inclusive = %s",
-									 item->value)));
-		}
-		else if (strcmp(item->name, "standby_mode") == 0)
-		{
-			if (!parse_bool(item->value, &StandbyModeRequested))
-				ereport(ERROR,
-						(errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_PARAMETER_VALUE),
-						 errmsg("parameter \"%s\" requires a Boolean value",
-								"standby_mode")));
-			ereport(DEBUG2,
-					(errmsg_internal("standby_mode = '%s'", item->value)));
-		}
-		else if (strcmp(item->name, "primary_conninfo") == 0)
-		{
-			PrimaryConnInfo = pstrdup(item->value);
-			ereport(DEBUG2,
-					(errmsg_internal("primary_conninfo = '%s'",
-									 PrimaryConnInfo)));
-		}
-		else if (strcmp(item->name, "trigger_file") == 0)
-		{
-			TriggerFile = pstrdup(item->value);
-			ereport(DEBUG2,
-					(errmsg_internal("trigger_file = '%s'",
-									 TriggerFile)));
-		}
-		else
-			ereport(FATAL,
-					(errmsg("unrecognized recovery parameter \"%s\"",
-							item->name)));
+				 errmsg("could not open recovery file trigger \"%s\": %m",
+						RECOVERY_ENABLE_FILE)));
 	}
 
-	/*
-	 * Check for compulsory parameters
-	 */
+	/* Check for compulsory parameters */
 	if (StandbyModeRequested)
 	{
-		if (PrimaryConnInfo == NULL && recoveryRestoreCommand == NULL)
+		if (!restore_command[0] && !primary_conninfo[0])
 			ereport(WARNING,
-					(errmsg("recovery command file \"%s\" specified neither primary_conninfo nor restore_command",
-							RECOVERY_COMMAND_FILE),
+					(errmsg("Neither primary_conninfo nor restore_command specified"),
 					 errhint("The database server will regularly poll the pg_xlog subdirectory to check for files placed there.")));
 	}
 	else
 	{
-		if (recoveryRestoreCommand == NULL)
+		if (!restore_command[0])
 			ereport(FATAL,
-					(errmsg("recovery command file \"%s\" must specify restore_command when standby mode is not enabled",
-							RECOVERY_COMMAND_FILE)));
+					(errmsg("restore_command must be specified when "
+							"standby_mode is not enabled")));
 	}
 
 	/* Enable fetching from archive recovery area */
@@ -4365,16 +4194,17 @@ readRecoveryCommandFile(void)
 	 * command and set InArchiveRecovery, because we need to fetch timeline
 	 * history files from the archive.
 	 */
-	if (rtliGiven)
+	if (strcmp(recovery_target_timeline_string, "") != 0)
 	{
-		if (rtli)
+		if (recovery_target_timeline)
 		{
 			/* Timeline 1 does not have a history file, all else should */
-			if (rtli != 1 && !existsTimeLineHistory(rtli))
+			if (recovery_target_timeline != 1 &&
+				!existsTimeLineHistory(recovery_target_timeline))
 				ereport(FATAL,
 						(errmsg("recovery target timeline %u does not exist",
-								rtli)));
-			recoveryTargetTLI = rtli;
+								recovery_target_timeline)));
+			recoveryTargetTLI = recovery_target_timeline;
 			recoveryTargetIsLatest = false;
 		}
 		else
@@ -4384,8 +4214,6 @@ readRecoveryCommandFile(void)
 			recoveryTargetIsLatest = true;
 		}
 	}
-
-	FreeConfigVariables(head);
 }
 
 /*
@@ -4456,15 +4284,13 @@ exitArchiveRecovery(TimeLineID endTLI, XLogSegNo endLogSegNo)
 	unlink(recoveryPath);		/* ignore any error */
 
 	/*
-	 * Rename the config file out of the way, so that we don't accidentally
-	 * re-enter archive recovery mode in a subsequent crash.
+	 * Remove file that triggered the recovery
 	 */
-	unlink(RECOVERY_COMMAND_DONE);
-	if (rename(RECOVERY_COMMAND_FILE, RECOVERY_COMMAND_DONE) != 0)
+	if (unlink(RECOVERY_ENABLE_FILE) != 0)
 		ereport(FATAL,
 				(errcode_for_file_access(),
-				 errmsg("could not rename file \"%s\" to \"%s\": %m",
-						RECOVERY_COMMAND_FILE, RECOVERY_COMMAND_DONE)));
+				 errmsg("could not remove file \"%s\": %m",
+						RECOVERY_ENABLE_FILE)));
 
 	ereport(LOG,
 			(errmsg("archive recovery complete")));
@@ -4527,7 +4353,7 @@ recoveryStopsHere(XLogRecord *record, bool *includeThis)
 		return false;
 
 	/* Do we have a PITR target at all? */
-	if (recoveryTarget == RECOVERY_TARGET_UNSET)
+	if (recovery_target == RECOVERY_TARGET_UNSET)
 	{
 		/*
 		 * Save timestamp of latest transaction commit/abort if this is a
@@ -4538,7 +4364,7 @@ recoveryStopsHere(XLogRecord *record, bool *includeThis)
 		return false;
 	}
 
-	if (recoveryTarget == RECOVERY_TARGET_XID)
+	if (recovery_target == RECOVERY_TARGET_XID)
 	{
 		/*
 		 * There can be only one transaction end record with this exact
@@ -4549,17 +4375,17 @@ recoveryStopsHere(XLogRecord *record, bool *includeThis)
 		 * they complete. A higher numbered xid will complete before you about
 		 * 50% of the time...
 		 */
-		stopsHere = (record->xl_xid == recoveryTargetXid);
+		stopsHere = (record->xl_xid == recovery_target_xid);
 		if (stopsHere)
-			*includeThis = recoveryTargetInclusive;
+			*includeThis = recovery_target_inclusive;
 	}
-	else if (recoveryTarget == RECOVERY_TARGET_NAME)
+	else if (recovery_target == RECOVERY_TARGET_NAME)
 	{
 		/*
 		 * There can be many restore points that share the same name, so we
 		 * stop at the first one
 		 */
-		stopsHere = (strcmp(recordRPName, recoveryTargetName) == 0);
+		stopsHere = (strcmp(recordRPName, recovery_target_name) == 0);
 
 		/*
 		 * Ignore recoveryTargetInclusive because this is not a transaction
@@ -4574,16 +4400,17 @@ recoveryStopsHere(XLogRecord *record, bool *includeThis)
 		 * we stop after the last one, if we are inclusive, or stop at the
 		 * first one if we are exclusive
 		 */
-		if (recoveryTargetInclusive)
-			stopsHere = (recordXtime > recoveryTargetTime);
+		if (recovery_target_inclusive)
+			stopsHere = (recordXtime > recovery_target_time);
 		else
-			stopsHere = (recordXtime >= recoveryTargetTime);
+			stopsHere = (recordXtime >= recovery_target_time);
 		if (stopsHere)
 			*includeThis = false;
 	}
 
 	if (stopsHere)
 	{
+		recoveryStopTarget = recovery_target;
 		recoveryStopXid = record->xl_xid;
 		recoveryStopTime = recordXtime;
 		recoveryStopAfter = *includeThis;
@@ -4933,36 +4760,28 @@ StartupXLOG(void)
 	recoveryTargetTLI = ControlFile->checkPointCopy.ThisTimeLineID;
 
 	/*
-	 * Check for recovery control file, and if so set up state for offline
-	 * recovery
-	 */
-	readRecoveryCommandFile();
-
-	/*
-	 * Save archive_cleanup_command in shared memory so that other processes
-	 * can see it.
+	 * Check for recovery trigger file, and if so set up state for offline
+	 * recovery.
 	 */
-	strncpy(XLogCtl->archiveCleanupCommand,
-			archiveCleanupCommand ? archiveCleanupCommand : "",
-			sizeof(XLogCtl->archiveCleanupCommand));
+	CheckRecoveryReadyFile();
 
 	if (ArchiveRecoveryRequested)
 	{
 		if (StandbyModeRequested)
 			ereport(LOG,
 					(errmsg("entering standby mode")));
-		else if (recoveryTarget == RECOVERY_TARGET_XID)
+		else if (recovery_target == RECOVERY_TARGET_XID)
 			ereport(LOG,
 					(errmsg("starting point-in-time recovery to XID %u",
-							recoveryTargetXid)));
-		else if (recoveryTarget == RECOVERY_TARGET_TIME)
+							recovery_target_xid)));
+		else if (recovery_target == RECOVERY_TARGET_TIME)
 			ereport(LOG,
 					(errmsg("starting point-in-time recovery to %s",
-							timestamptz_to_str(recoveryTargetTime))));
-		else if (recoveryTarget == RECOVERY_TARGET_NAME)
+							timestamptz_to_str(recovery_target_time))));
+		else if (recovery_target == RECOVERY_TARGET_NAME)
 			ereport(LOG,
 					(errmsg("starting point-in-time recovery to \"%s\"",
-							recoveryTargetName)));
+							recovery_target_name)));
 		else
 			ereport(LOG,
 					(errmsg("starting archive recovery")));
@@ -4988,7 +4807,7 @@ StartupXLOG(void)
 	 * Take ownership of the wakeup latch if we're going to sleep during
 	 * recovery.
 	 */
-	if (StandbyModeRequested)
+	if (ArchiveRecoveryRequested && StandbyModeRequested)
 		OwnLatch(&XLogCtl->recoveryWakeupLatch);
 
 	/* Set up XLOG reader facility */
@@ -5010,7 +4829,7 @@ StartupXLOG(void)
 		 * archive recovery directly.
 		 */
 		InArchiveRecovery = true;
-		if (StandbyModeRequested)
+		if (ArchiveRecoveryRequested && StandbyModeRequested)
 			StandbyMode = true;
 
 		/*
@@ -5076,7 +4895,7 @@ StartupXLOG(void)
 			 ControlFile->state == DB_SHUTDOWNED))
 		{
 			InArchiveRecovery = true;
-			if (StandbyModeRequested)
+			if (ArchiveRecoveryRequested && StandbyModeRequested)
 				StandbyMode = true;
 		}
 
@@ -5236,7 +5055,7 @@ StartupXLOG(void)
 
 	/*
 	 * Check whether we need to force recovery from WAL.  If it appears to
-	 * have been a clean shutdown and we did not have a recovery.conf file,
+	 * have been a clean shutdown and we did not have a standby.enabled file,
 	 * then assume no recovery needed.
 	 */
 	if (checkPoint.redo < RecPtr)
@@ -5250,7 +5069,7 @@ StartupXLOG(void)
 		InRecovery = true;
 	else if (ArchiveRecoveryRequested)
 	{
-		/* force recovery due to presence of recovery.conf */
+		/* force recovery due to presence of standby.enabled */
 		InRecovery = true;
 	}
 
@@ -5569,7 +5388,7 @@ StartupXLOG(void)
 				 */
 				if (recoveryStopsHere(record, &recoveryApply))
 				{
-					if (recoveryPauseAtTarget)
+					if (pause_at_recovery_target)
 					{
 						SetRecoveryPause(true);
 						recoveryPausesHere();
@@ -5733,7 +5552,7 @@ StartupXLOG(void)
 	 * We don't need the latch anymore. It's not strictly necessary to disown
 	 * it, but let's do it for the sake of tidiness.
 	 */
-	if (StandbyModeRequested)
+	if (ArchiveRecoveryRequested && StandbyModeRequested)
 		DisownLatch(&XLogCtl->recoveryWakeupLatch);
 
 	/*
@@ -5823,17 +5642,17 @@ StartupXLOG(void)
 		 * Create a comment for the history file to explain why and where
 		 * timeline changed.
 		 */
-		if (recoveryTarget == RECOVERY_TARGET_XID)
+		if (recovery_target == RECOVERY_TARGET_XID)
 			snprintf(reason, sizeof(reason),
 					 "%s transaction %u",
 					 recoveryStopAfter ? "after" : "before",
 					 recoveryStopXid);
-		else if (recoveryTarget == RECOVERY_TARGET_TIME)
+		else if (recovery_target == RECOVERY_TARGET_TIME)
 			snprintf(reason, sizeof(reason),
 					 "%s %s\n",
 					 recoveryStopAfter ? "after" : "before",
 					 timestamptz_to_str(recoveryStopTime));
-		else if (recoveryTarget == RECOVERY_TARGET_NAME)
+		else if (recovery_target == RECOVERY_TARGET_NAME)
 			snprintf(reason, sizeof(reason),
 					 "at restore point \"%s\"",
 					 recoveryStopName);
@@ -5992,8 +5811,8 @@ StartupXLOG(void)
 		/*
 		 * And finally, execute the recovery_end_command, if any.
 		 */
-		if (recoveryEndCommand)
-			ExecuteRecoveryCommand(recoveryEndCommand,
+		if (recovery_end_command[0])
+			ExecuteRecoveryCommand(recovery_end_command,
 								   "recovery_end_command",
 								   true);
 	}
@@ -6861,7 +6680,7 @@ CreateCheckPoint(int flags)
 		XLogRecPtr	curInsert;
 
 		INSERT_RECPTR(curInsert, Insert, Insert->curridx);
-		if (curInsert == ControlFile->checkPoint + 
+		if (curInsert == ControlFile->checkPoint +
 			MAXALIGN(SizeOfXLogRecord + sizeof(CheckPoint)) &&
 			ControlFile->checkPoint == ControlFile->checkPointCopy.redo)
 		{
@@ -7509,8 +7328,8 @@ CreateRestartPoint(int flags)
 	/*
 	 * Finally, execute archive_cleanup_command, if any.
 	 */
-	if (XLogCtl->archiveCleanupCommand[0])
-		ExecuteRecoveryCommand(XLogCtl->archiveCleanupCommand,
+	if (archive_cleanup_command[0])
+		ExecuteRecoveryCommand(archive_cleanup_command,
 							   "archive_cleanup_command",
 							   false);
 
@@ -9325,7 +9144,7 @@ XLogPageRead(XLogReaderState *xlogreader, XLogRecPtr targetPagePtr, int reqLen,
 		 * Request a restartpoint if we've replayed too much xlog since the
 		 * last one.
 		 */
-		if (StandbyModeRequested && bgwriterLaunched)
+		if (ArchiveRecoveryRequested && StandbyModeRequested && bgwriterLaunched)
 		{
 			if (XLogCheckpointNeeded(readSegNo))
 			{
@@ -9541,7 +9360,7 @@ WaitForWALToBecomeAvailable(XLogRecPtr RecPtr, bool randAccess,
 					 * that when we later jump backwards to start redo at
 					 * RedoStartLSN, we will have the logs streamed already.
 					 */
-					if (PrimaryConnInfo)
+					if (primary_conninfo[0])
 					{
 						XLogRecPtr ptr;
 						TimeLineID tli;
@@ -9562,7 +9381,7 @@ WaitForWALToBecomeAvailable(XLogRecPtr RecPtr, bool randAccess,
 									 tli, curFileTLI);
 						}
 						curFileTLI = tli;
-						RequestXLogStreaming(curFileTLI, ptr, PrimaryConnInfo);
+						RequestXLogStreaming(curFileTLI, ptr);
 					}
 					/*
 					 * Move to XLOG_FROM_STREAM state in either case. We'll get
@@ -9880,14 +9699,14 @@ CheckForStandbyTrigger(void)
 		return true;
 	}
 
-	if (TriggerFile == NULL)
+	if (!trigger_file[0])
 		return false;
 
-	if (stat(TriggerFile, &stat_buf) == 0)
+	if (stat(trigger_file, &stat_buf) == 0)
 	{
 		ereport(LOG,
-				(errmsg("trigger file found: %s", TriggerFile)));
-		unlink(TriggerFile);
+				(errmsg("trigger file found: %s", trigger_file)));
+		unlink(trigger_file);
 		triggered = true;
 		return true;
 	}
diff --git a/src/backend/access/transam/xlogarchive.c b/src/backend/access/transam/xlogarchive.c
index 0c178c5..21e2eee 100644
--- a/src/backend/access/transam/xlogarchive.c
+++ b/src/backend/access/transam/xlogarchive.c
@@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ RestoreArchivedFile(char *path, const char *xlogfname,
 	TimeLineID	restartTli;
 
 	/* In standby mode, restore_command might not be supplied */
-	if (recoveryRestoreCommand == NULL)
+	if (restore_command == NULL)
 		goto not_available;
 
 	/*
@@ -150,7 +150,7 @@ RestoreArchivedFile(char *path, const char *xlogfname,
 	endp = xlogRestoreCmd + MAXPGPATH - 1;
 	*endp = '\0';
 
-	for (sp = recoveryRestoreCommand; *sp; sp++)
+	for (sp = restore_command; *sp; sp++)
 	{
 		if (*sp == '%')
 		{
diff --git a/src/backend/commands/extension.c b/src/backend/commands/extension.c
index 36df8bd..adea8a0 100644
--- a/src/backend/commands/extension.c
+++ b/src/backend/commands/extension.c
@@ -9,7 +9,7 @@
  * dependent objects can be associated with it.  An extension is created by
  * populating the pg_extension catalog from a "control" file.
  * The extension control file is parsed with the same parser we use for
- * postgresql.conf and recovery.conf.  An extension also has an installation
+ * postgresql.conf.  An extension also has an installation
  * script file, containing SQL commands to create the extension's objects.
  *
  * Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2013, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
diff --git a/src/backend/replication/walreceiver.c b/src/backend/replication/walreceiver.c
index 911a66b..9f8d450 100644
--- a/src/backend/replication/walreceiver.c
+++ b/src/backend/replication/walreceiver.c
@@ -186,7 +186,6 @@ DisableWalRcvImmediateExit(void)
 void
 WalReceiverMain(void)
 {
-	char		conninfo[MAXCONNINFO];
 	XLogRecPtr	startpoint;
 	TimeLineID	startpointTLI;
 	TimeLineID	primaryTLI;
@@ -240,7 +239,6 @@ WalReceiverMain(void)
 	walrcv->walRcvState = WALRCV_STREAMING;
 
 	/* Fetch information required to start streaming */
-	strlcpy(conninfo, (char *) walrcv->conninfo, MAXCONNINFO);
 	startpoint = walrcv->receiveStart;
 	startpointTLI = walrcv->receiveStartTLI;
 
@@ -307,7 +305,7 @@ WalReceiverMain(void)
 
 	/* Establish the connection to the primary for XLOG streaming */
 	EnableWalRcvImmediateExit();
-	walrcv_connect(conninfo);
+	walrcv_connect(primary_conninfo);
 	DisableWalRcvImmediateExit();
 
 	first_stream = true;
@@ -405,8 +403,22 @@ WalReceiverMain(void)
 
 				if (got_SIGHUP)
 				{
+					char    *conninfo = pstrdup(primary_conninfo);
+
 					got_SIGHUP = false;
 					ProcessConfigFile(PGC_SIGHUP);
+
+					/*
+					 * If primary_conninfo has been changed while walreceiver is running,
+					 * shut down walreceiver so that new walreceiver is started and
+					 * it initiates replication with new primary_conninfo.
+					 */
+					if (strcmp(conninfo, primary_conninfo) != 0)
+						ereport(FATAL,
+								(errcode(ERRCODE_ADMIN_SHUTDOWN),
+								 errmsg("terminating walreceiver process because primary_conninfo was changed")));
+					pfree(conninfo);
+
 					XLogWalRcvSendHSFeedback(true);
 				}
 
diff --git a/src/backend/replication/walreceiverfuncs.c b/src/backend/replication/walreceiverfuncs.c
index d414808..d6a5e06 100644
--- a/src/backend/replication/walreceiverfuncs.c
+++ b/src/backend/replication/walreceiverfuncs.c
@@ -219,11 +219,10 @@ ShutdownWalRcv(void)
 /*
  * Request postmaster to start walreceiver.
  *
- * recptr indicates the position where streaming should begin, and conninfo
- * is a libpq connection string to use.
+ * recptr indicates the position where streaming should begin.
  */
 void
-RequestXLogStreaming(TimeLineID tli, XLogRecPtr recptr, const char *conninfo)
+RequestXLogStreaming(TimeLineID tli, XLogRecPtr recptr)
 {
 	/* use volatile pointer to prevent code rearrangement */
 	volatile WalRcvData *walrcv = WalRcv;
@@ -245,11 +244,6 @@ RequestXLogStreaming(TimeLineID tli, XLogRecPtr recptr, const char *conninfo)
 	Assert(walrcv->walRcvState == WALRCV_STOPPED ||
 		   walrcv->walRcvState == WALRCV_WAITING);
 
-	if (conninfo != NULL)
-		strlcpy((char *) walrcv->conninfo, conninfo, MAXCONNINFO);
-	else
-		walrcv->conninfo[0] = '\0';
-
 	if (walrcv->walRcvState == WALRCV_STOPPED)
 	{
 		launch = true;
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/misc/guc.c b/src/backend/utils/misc/guc.c
index 22ba35f..c8cd004 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/misc/guc.c
+++ b/src/backend/utils/misc/guc.c
@@ -30,6 +30,7 @@
 #include "access/transam.h"
 #include "access/twophase.h"
 #include "access/xact.h"
+#include "access/xlog_internal.h"
 #include "catalog/namespace.h"
 #include "commands/async.h"
 #include "commands/prepare.h"
@@ -197,6 +198,14 @@ static bool check_application_name(char **newval, void **extra, GucSource source
 static void assign_application_name(const char *newval, void *extra);
 static const char *show_unix_socket_permissions(void);
 static const char *show_log_file_mode(void);
+static bool check_recovery_target_xid(char **newval, void **extra, GucSource source);
+static void assign_recovery_target_xid(const char *newval, void *extra);
+static bool check_recovery_target_name(char **newval, void **extra, GucSource source);
+static void assign_recovery_target_name(const char *newval, void *extra);
+static bool check_recovery_target_time(char **newval, void **extra, GucSource source);
+static void assign_recovery_target_time(const char *newval, void *extra);
+static bool check_recovery_target_timeline(char **newval, void **extra, GucSource source);
+static void assign_recovery_target_timeline(const char *newval, void *extra);
 
 static char *config_enum_get_options(struct config_enum * record,
 						const char *prefix, const char *suffix,
@@ -469,6 +478,8 @@ static int	wal_block_size;
 static int	wal_segment_size;
 static bool integer_datetimes;
 static int	effective_io_concurrency;
+static char *recovery_target_xid_string;
+static char *recovery_target_time_string;
 
 /* should be static, but commands/variable.c needs to get at this */
 char	   *role_string;
@@ -549,6 +560,10 @@ const char *const config_group_names[] =
 	gettext_noop("Write-Ahead Log / Checkpoints"),
 	/* WAL_ARCHIVING */
 	gettext_noop("Write-Ahead Log / Archiving"),
+	/* WAL_ARCHIVE_RECOVERY */
+	gettext_noop("Write-Ahead Log / Archive Recovery"),
+	/* WAL_RECOVERY_TARGET */
+	gettext_noop("Write-Ahead Log / Recovery Target"),
 	/* REPLICATION */
 	gettext_noop("Replication"),
 	/* REPLICATION_SENDING */
@@ -1392,6 +1407,36 @@ static struct config_bool ConfigureNamesBool[] =
 	},
 
 	{
+		{"recovery_target_inclusive", PGC_SIGHUP, WAL_RECOVERY_TARGET,
+			gettext_noop("Sets whether to include or exclude transaction with recovery target."),
+			NULL
+		},
+		&recovery_target_inclusive,
+		true,
+		NULL, NULL, NULL
+	},
+
+	{
+		{"pause_at_recovery_target", PGC_SIGHUP, WAL_RECOVERY_TARGET,
+			gettext_noop("Sets whether recovery should pause when the recovery target is reached."),
+			NULL
+		},
+		&pause_at_recovery_target,
+		true,
+		NULL, NULL, NULL
+	},
+
+	{
+		{"standby_mode", PGC_POSTMASTER, REPLICATION_STANDBY,
+			gettext_noop("Sets whether to start the server as a standby."),
+			NULL
+		},
+		&StandbyModeRequested,
+		false,
+		NULL, NULL, NULL
+	},
+
+	{
 		{"hot_standby", PGC_POSTMASTER, REPLICATION_STANDBY,
 			gettext_noop("Allows connections and queries during recovery."),
 			NULL
@@ -2571,6 +2616,97 @@ static struct config_string ConfigureNamesString[] =
 	},
 
 	{
+		{"restore_command", PGC_SIGHUP, WAL_ARCHIVE_RECOVERY,
+			gettext_noop("Sets the shell command that will retrieve an archived WAL file."),
+			NULL
+		},
+		&restore_command,
+		"",
+		NULL, NULL, NULL
+	},
+
+	{
+		{"archive_cleanup_command", PGC_SIGHUP, WAL_ARCHIVE_RECOVERY,
+			gettext_noop("Sets the shell command that will be executed at every restartpoint."),
+			NULL
+		},
+		&archive_cleanup_command,
+		"",
+		NULL, NULL, NULL
+	},
+
+	{
+		{"recovery_end_command", PGC_SIGHUP, WAL_ARCHIVE_RECOVERY,
+			gettext_noop("Sets the shell command that will be executed once only at the end of recovery."),
+			NULL
+		},
+		&recovery_end_command,
+		"",
+		NULL, NULL, NULL
+	},
+
+	{
+		{"recovery_target_xid", PGC_SIGHUP, WAL_RECOVERY_TARGET,
+			gettext_noop("Sets the transaction ID up to which recovery will proceed."),
+			NULL
+		},
+		&recovery_target_xid_string,
+		"",
+		check_recovery_target_xid, assign_recovery_target_xid, NULL
+	},
+
+	{
+		{"recovery_target_name", PGC_SIGHUP, WAL_RECOVERY_TARGET,
+			gettext_noop("Sets the named restore point."),
+			NULL
+		},
+		&recovery_target_name,
+		"",
+		check_recovery_target_name, assign_recovery_target_name, NULL
+	},
+
+	{
+		{"recovery_target_time", PGC_SIGHUP, WAL_RECOVERY_TARGET,
+			gettext_noop("Sets the time stamp up to which recovery will proceed."),
+			NULL
+		},
+		&recovery_target_time_string,
+		"",
+		check_recovery_target_time, assign_recovery_target_time, NULL
+	},
+
+	{
+		{"recovery_target_timeline", PGC_POSTMASTER, WAL_RECOVERY_TARGET,
+			gettext_noop("Sets recoverying into a particular timeline."),
+			NULL
+		},
+		&recovery_target_timeline_string,
+		"",
+		check_recovery_target_timeline, assign_recovery_target_timeline, NULL
+	},
+
+	{
+		{"primary_conninfo", PGC_SIGHUP, REPLICATION_STANDBY,
+			gettext_noop("Sets the connection string to be used to connect with the primary."),
+			NULL,
+			GUC_SUPERUSER_ONLY
+		},
+		&primary_conninfo,
+		"",
+		NULL, NULL, NULL
+	},
+
+	{
+		{"trigger_file", PGC_SIGHUP, REPLICATION_STANDBY,
+			gettext_noop("Sets the trigger file whose presence ends recovery in the standby."),
+			NULL
+		},
+		&trigger_file,
+		"",
+		NULL, NULL, NULL
+	},
+
+	{
 		{"client_encoding", PGC_USERSET, CLIENT_CONN_LOCALE,
 			gettext_noop("Sets the client's character set encoding."),
 			NULL,
@@ -8797,4 +8933,158 @@ show_log_file_mode(void)
 	return buf;
 }
 
+static bool
+check_recovery_target_xid(char **newval, void **extra, GucSource source)
+{
+	TransactionId   xid;
+	TransactionId   *myextra;
+
+	if (strcmp(*newval, "") == 0)
+		xid = InvalidTransactionId;
+	else
+	{
+		errno = 0;
+		xid = (TransactionId) strtoul(*newval, NULL, 0);
+		if (errno == EINVAL || errno == ERANGE)
+		{
+			GUC_check_errdetail("recovery_target_xid is not a valid number: \"%s\"",
+								*newval);
+			return false;
+		}
+	}
+
+	myextra = (TransactionId *) guc_malloc(ERROR, sizeof(TransactionId));
+	*myextra = xid;
+	*extra = (void *) myextra;
+
+	return true;
+}
+
+static void
+assign_recovery_target_xid(const char *newval, void *extra)
+{
+	recovery_target_xid = *((TransactionId *) extra);
+
+	if (recovery_target_xid != InvalidTransactionId)
+		recovery_target = RECOVERY_TARGET_XID;
+	else if (recovery_target_name[0])
+		recovery_target = RECOVERY_TARGET_NAME;
+	else if (recovery_target_time != 0)
+		recovery_target = RECOVERY_TARGET_TIME;
+	else
+		recovery_target = RECOVERY_TARGET_UNSET;
+}
+
+static bool
+check_recovery_target_name(char **newval, void **extra, GucSource source)
+{
+	if (strlen(*newval) >= MAXFNAMELEN)
+	{
+		GUC_check_errdetail("\"recovery_target_name\" is too long (maximum %d characters)",
+							MAXFNAMELEN - 1);
+		return false;
+	}
+	return true;
+}
+
+static void
+assign_recovery_target_name(const char *newval, void *extra)
+{
+	if (recovery_target_xid != InvalidTransactionId)
+		recovery_target = RECOVERY_TARGET_XID;
+	else if (newval[0])
+		recovery_target = RECOVERY_TARGET_NAME;
+	else if (recovery_target_time != 0)
+		recovery_target = RECOVERY_TARGET_TIME;
+	else
+		recovery_target = RECOVERY_TARGET_UNSET;
+}
+
+static bool
+check_recovery_target_time(char **newval, void **extra, GucSource source)
+{
+	TimestampTz     time;
+	TimestampTz     *myextra;
+	MemoryContext oldcontext = CurrentMemoryContext;
+
+	PG_TRY();
+	{
+		time = (strcmp(*newval, "") == 0) ?
+			0 :
+			DatumGetTimestampTz(DirectFunctionCall3(timestamptz_in,
+													CStringGetDatum(*newval),
+													ObjectIdGetDatum(InvalidOid),
+													Int32GetDatum(-1)));
+	}
+	PG_CATCH();
+	{
+		ErrorData  *edata;
+
+		/* Save error info */
+		MemoryContextSwitchTo(oldcontext);
+		edata = CopyErrorData();
+		FlushErrorState();
+
+		/* Pass the error message */
+		GUC_check_errdetail("%s", edata->message);
+		FreeErrorData(edata);
+		return false;
+	}
+	PG_END_TRY();
+
+	myextra = (TimestampTz *) guc_malloc(ERROR, sizeof(TimestampTz));
+	*myextra = time;
+	*extra = (void *) myextra;
+
+	return true;
+}
+
+static void
+assign_recovery_target_time(const char *newval, void *extra)
+{
+	recovery_target_time = *((TimestampTz *) extra);
+
+	if (recovery_target_xid != InvalidTransactionId)
+		recovery_target = RECOVERY_TARGET_XID;
+	else if (recovery_target_name[0])
+		recovery_target = RECOVERY_TARGET_NAME;
+	else if (recovery_target_time != 0)
+		recovery_target = RECOVERY_TARGET_TIME;
+	else
+		recovery_target = RECOVERY_TARGET_UNSET;
+}
+
+static bool
+check_recovery_target_timeline(char **newval, void **extra, GucSource source)
+{
+	TimeLineID	tli = 0;
+	TimeLineID	*myextra;
+
+	if (strcmp(*newval, "") == 0 || strcmp(*newval, "latest") == 0)
+		tli = 0;
+	else
+	{
+		errno = 0;
+		tli = (TimeLineID) strtoul(*newval, NULL, 0);
+		if (errno == EINVAL || errno == ERANGE)
+		{
+			GUC_check_errdetail("recovery_target_timeline is not a valid number: \"%s\"",
+								*newval);
+			return false;
+		}
+	}
+
+	myextra = (TimeLineID *) guc_malloc(ERROR, sizeof(TimeLineID));
+	*myextra = tli;
+	*extra = (void *) myextra;
+
+	return true;
+}
+
+static void
+assign_recovery_target_timeline(const char *newval, void *extra)
+{
+	recovery_target_timeline = *((TimeLineID *) extra);
+}
+
 #include "guc-file.c"
diff --git a/src/backend/utils/misc/postgresql.conf.sample b/src/backend/utils/misc/postgresql.conf.sample
index 307b456..d8e2616 100644
--- a/src/backend/utils/misc/postgresql.conf.sample
+++ b/src/backend/utils/misc/postgresql.conf.sample
@@ -198,6 +198,23 @@
 #archive_timeout = 0		# force a logfile segment switch after this
 				# number of seconds; 0 disables
 
+# - Archive Recovery -
+#restore_command = ''		# command to use to restore an archived logfile segment
+				# placeholders: %p = path of file to restore
+				#               %f = file name only
+				# e.g. 'cp /mnt/server/archivedir/%f %p'
+#archive_cleanup_command = ''	# command to execute at every restartpoint
+#recovery_end_command = ''	# command to execute at completion of recovery
+
+# - Recovery Target -
+#recovery_target_xid = ''
+#recovery_target_name = ''		# e.g. 'daily backup 2011-01-26'
+#recovery_target_time = ''		# e.g. '2004-07-14 22:39:00 EST'
+#recovery_target_timeline = ''		# timeline ID or 'latest'
+					# (change requires restart)
+#recovery_target_inclusive = on
+#pause_at_recovery_target = on		# Pause recovery once target is reached
+
 
 #------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 # REPLICATION
@@ -240,6 +257,11 @@
 #wal_receiver_timeout = 60s		# time that receiver waits for
 					# communication from master
 					# in milliseconds; 0 disables
+#standby_mode = off			# "on" starts the server as a standby
+					# (change requires restart)
+#primary_conninfo = ''			# connection string to connect to the master
+					# e.g. 'host=localhost port=5432'
+#trigger_file = ''			# trigger file to promote the standby
 
 
 #------------------------------------------------------------------------------
diff --git a/src/bin/pg_basebackup/pg_basebackup.c b/src/bin/pg_basebackup/pg_basebackup.c
index eacb592..9bd8a99 100644
--- a/src/bin/pg_basebackup/pg_basebackup.c
+++ b/src/bin/pg_basebackup/pg_basebackup.c
@@ -43,7 +43,7 @@ int			compresslevel = 0;
 bool		includewal = false;
 bool		streamwal = false;
 bool		fastcheckpoint = false;
-bool		writerecoveryconf = false;
+bool		writestandby = false;
 int			standby_message_timeout = 10 * 1000;		/* 10 sec = default */
 
 /* Progress counters */
@@ -68,9 +68,6 @@ static int	has_xlogendptr = 0;
 static volatile LONG has_xlogendptr = 0;
 #endif
 
-/* Contents of recovery.conf to be generated */
-static PQExpBuffer recoveryconfcontents = NULL;
-
 /* Function headers */
 static void usage(void);
 static void verify_dir_is_empty_or_create(char *dirname);
@@ -78,8 +75,7 @@ static void progress_report(int tablespacenum, const char *filename);
 
 static void ReceiveTarFile(PGconn *conn, PGresult *res, int rownum);
 static void ReceiveAndUnpackTarFile(PGconn *conn, PGresult *res, int rownum);
-static void GenerateRecoveryConf(PGconn *conn);
-static void WriteRecoveryConf(void);
+static void WriteStandbyEnabled(void);
 static void BaseBackup(void);
 
 static bool reached_end_position(XLogRecPtr segendpos, uint32 timeline,
@@ -110,8 +106,8 @@ usage(void)
 	printf(_("\nOptions controlling the output:\n"));
 	printf(_("  -D, --pgdata=DIRECTORY receive base backup into directory\n"));
 	printf(_("  -F, --format=p|t       output format (plain (default), tar)\n"));
-	printf(_("  -R, --write-recovery-conf\n"
-			 "                         write recovery.conf after backup\n"));
+	printf(_("  -R, --write-standby-enable\n"
+			 "                         write standby.enabled after backup\n"));
 	printf(_("  -x, --xlog             include required WAL files in backup (fetch mode)\n"));
 	printf(_("  -X, --xlog-method=fetch|stream\n"
 			 "                         include required WAL files with specified method\n"));
@@ -667,7 +663,7 @@ ReceiveTarFile(PGconn *conn, PGresult *res, int rownum)
 		{
 			/*
 			 * End of chunk. If requested, and this is the base tablespace,
-			 * write recovery.conf into the tarfile. When done, close the file
+			 * write standby.enabled into the tarfile. When done, close the file
 			 * (but not stdout).
 			 *
 			 * Also, write two completely empty blocks at the end of the tar
@@ -677,22 +673,16 @@ ReceiveTarFile(PGconn *conn, PGresult *res, int rownum)
 
 			MemSet(zerobuf, 0, sizeof(zerobuf));
 
-			if (basetablespace && writerecoveryconf)
+			if (basetablespace && writestandby)
 			{
 				char		header[512];
-				int			padding;
 
-				tarCreateHeader(header, "recovery.conf", NULL,
-								recoveryconfcontents->len,
+				tarCreateHeader(header, "standby.enabled", NULL,
+								0,
 								0600, 04000, 02000,
 								time(NULL));
 
-				padding = ((recoveryconfcontents->len + 511) & ~511) - recoveryconfcontents->len;
-
 				WRITE_TAR_DATA(header, sizeof(header));
-				WRITE_TAR_DATA(recoveryconfcontents->data, recoveryconfcontents->len);
-				if (padding)
-					WRITE_TAR_DATA(zerobuf, padding);
 			}
 
 			/* 2 * 512 bytes empty data at end of file */
@@ -733,11 +723,11 @@ ReceiveTarFile(PGconn *conn, PGresult *res, int rownum)
 			disconnect_and_exit(1);
 		}
 
-		if (!writerecoveryconf || !basetablespace)
+		if (!writestandby || !basetablespace)
 		{
 			/*
-			 * When not writing recovery.conf, or when not working on the base
-			 * tablespace, we never have to look for an existing recovery.conf
+			 * When not writing standby.enabled, or when not working on the base
+			 * tablespace, we never have to look for an existing standby.enabled
 			 * file in the stream.
 			 */
 			WRITE_TAR_DATA(copybuf, r);
@@ -745,7 +735,7 @@ ReceiveTarFile(PGconn *conn, PGresult *res, int rownum)
 		else
 		{
 			/*
-			 * Look for a recovery.conf in the existing tar stream. If it's
+			 * Look for a standby.enabled in the existing tar stream. If it's
 			 * there, we must skip it so we can later overwrite it with our
 			 * own version of the file.
 			 *
@@ -791,12 +781,12 @@ ReceiveTarFile(PGconn *conn, PGresult *res, int rownum)
 						 * We have the complete header structure in tarhdr,
 						 * look at the file metadata: - the subsequent file
 						 * contents have to be skipped if the filename is
-						 * recovery.conf - find out the size of the file
+						 * standby.enabled - find out the size of the file
 						 * padded to the next multiple of 512
 						 */
 						int			padding;
 
-						skip_file = (strcmp(&tarhdr[0], "recovery.conf") == 0);
+						skip_file = (strcmp(&tarhdr[0], "standby.enabled") == 0);
 
 						sscanf(&tarhdr[124], "%11o", (unsigned int *) &filesz);
 
@@ -1102,102 +1092,21 @@ ReceiveAndUnpackTarFile(PGconn *conn, PGresult *res, int rownum)
 	if (copybuf != NULL)
 		PQfreemem(copybuf);
 
-	if (basetablespace && writerecoveryconf)
-		WriteRecoveryConf();
+	if (basetablespace && writestandby)
+		WriteStandbyEnabled();
 }
 
-/*
- * Escape single quotes used in connection parameters
- */
-static char *
-escape_quotes(const char *src)
-{
-	char	   *result = escape_single_quotes_ascii(src);
-
-	if (!result)
-	{
-		fprintf(stderr, _("%s: out of memory\n"), progname);
-		exit(1);
-	}
-	return result;
-}
 
 /*
- * Create a recovery.conf file in memory using a PQExpBuffer
+ * Write a standby.enabled file into the directory specified in basedir.
  */
 static void
-GenerateRecoveryConf(PGconn *conn)
-{
-	PQconninfoOption *connOptions;
-	PQconninfoOption *option;
-
-	recoveryconfcontents = createPQExpBuffer();
-	if (!recoveryconfcontents)
-	{
-		fprintf(stderr, _("%s: out of memory\n"), progname);
-		disconnect_and_exit(1);
-	}
-
-	connOptions = PQconninfo(conn);
-	if (connOptions == NULL)
-	{
-		fprintf(stderr, _("%s: out of memory\n"), progname);
-		disconnect_and_exit(1);
-	}
-
-	appendPQExpBufferStr(recoveryconfcontents, "standby_mode = 'on'\n");
-	appendPQExpBufferStr(recoveryconfcontents, "primary_conninfo = '");
-
-	for (option = connOptions; option && option->keyword; option++)
-	{
-		char	   *escaped;
-
-		/*
-		 * Do not emit this setting if: - the setting is "replication",
-		 * "dbname" or "fallback_application_name", since these would be
-		 * overridden by the libpqwalreceiver module anyway. - not set or
-		 * empty.
-		 */
-		if (strcmp(option->keyword, "replication") == 0 ||
-			strcmp(option->keyword, "dbname") == 0 ||
-			strcmp(option->keyword, "fallback_application_name") == 0 ||
-			(option->val == NULL) ||
-			(option->val != NULL && option->val[0] == '\0'))
-			continue;
-
-		/*
-		 * Write "keyword='value'" pieces, the value string is escaped if
-		 * necessary and doubled single quotes around the value string.
-		 */
-		escaped = escape_quotes(option->val);
-
-		appendPQExpBuffer(recoveryconfcontents, "%s=''%s'' ", option->keyword, escaped);
-
-		free(escaped);
-	}
-
-	appendPQExpBufferStr(recoveryconfcontents, "'\n");
-	if (PQExpBufferBroken(recoveryconfcontents))
-	{
-		fprintf(stderr, _("%s: out of memory\n"), progname);
-		disconnect_and_exit(1);
-	}
-
-	PQconninfoFree(connOptions);
-}
-
-
-/*
- * Write a recovery.conf file into the directory specified in basedir,
- * with the contents already collected in memory.
- */
-static void
-WriteRecoveryConf(void)
+WriteStandbyEnabled(void)
 {
 	char		filename[MAXPGPATH];
 	FILE	   *cf;
 
-	sprintf(filename, "%s/recovery.conf", basedir);
+	sprintf(filename, "%s/standby.enabled", basedir);
 
 	cf = fopen(filename, "w");
 	if (cf == NULL)
@@ -1206,14 +1115,6 @@ WriteRecoveryConf(void)
 		disconnect_and_exit(1);
 	}
 
-	if (fwrite(recoveryconfcontents->data, recoveryconfcontents->len, 1, cf) != 1)
-	{
-		fprintf(stderr,
-				_("%s: could not write to file \"%s\": %s\n"),
-				progname, filename, strerror(errno));
-		disconnect_and_exit(1);
-	}
-
 	fclose(cf);
 }
 
@@ -1239,12 +1140,6 @@ BaseBackup(void)
 		exit(1);
 
 	/*
-	 * Build contents of recovery.conf if requested
-	 */
-	if (writerecoveryconf)
-		GenerateRecoveryConf(conn);
-
-	/*
 	 * Run IDENTIFY_SYSTEM so we can get the timeline
 	 */
 	res = PQexec(conn, "IDENTIFY_SYSTEM");
@@ -1512,9 +1407,6 @@ BaseBackup(void)
 #endif
 	}
 
-	/* Free the recovery.conf contents */
-	destroyPQExpBuffer(recoveryconfcontents);
-
 	/*
 	 * End of copy data. Final result is already checked inside the loop.
 	 */
@@ -1535,7 +1427,7 @@ main(int argc, char **argv)
 		{"pgdata", required_argument, NULL, 'D'},
 		{"format", required_argument, NULL, 'F'},
 		{"checkpoint", required_argument, NULL, 'c'},
-		{"write-recovery-conf", no_argument, NULL, 'R'},
+		{"write-standby-enable", no_argument, NULL, 'R'},
 		{"xlog", no_argument, NULL, 'x'},
 		{"xlog-method", required_argument, NULL, 'X'},
 		{"gzip", no_argument, NULL, 'z'},
@@ -1596,7 +1488,7 @@ main(int argc, char **argv)
 				}
 				break;
 			case 'R':
-				writerecoveryconf = true;
+				writestandby = true;
 				break;
 			case 'x':
 				if (includewal)
diff --git a/src/bin/pg_ctl/pg_ctl.c b/src/bin/pg_ctl/pg_ctl.c
index 537d173..c49c847 100644
--- a/src/bin/pg_ctl/pg_ctl.c
+++ b/src/bin/pg_ctl/pg_ctl.c
@@ -889,7 +889,7 @@ do_stop(void)
 		/*
 		 * If backup_label exists, an online backup is running. Warn the user
 		 * that smart shutdown will wait for it to finish. However, if
-		 * recovery.conf is also present, we're recovering from an online
+		 * standby.enabled is also present, we're recovering from an online
 		 * backup instead of performing one.
 		 */
 		if (shutdown_mode == SMART_MODE &&
@@ -977,7 +977,7 @@ do_restart(void)
 		/*
 		 * If backup_label exists, an online backup is running. Warn the user
 		 * that smart shutdown will wait for it to finish. However, if
-		 * recovery.conf is also present, we're recovering from an online
+		 * standby.enabled is also present, we're recovering from an online
 		 * backup instead of performing one.
 		 */
 		if (shutdown_mode == SMART_MODE &&
@@ -1088,7 +1088,7 @@ do_promote(void)
 		exit(1);
 	}
 
-	/* If recovery.conf doesn't exist, the server is not in standby mode */
+	/* If standby.enabled doesn't exist, the server is not in standby mode */
 	if (stat(recovery_file, &statbuf) != 0)
 	{
 		write_stderr(_("%s: cannot promote server; "
@@ -2244,7 +2244,7 @@ main(int argc, char **argv)
 		snprintf(postopts_file, MAXPGPATH, "%s/postmaster.opts", pg_data);
 		snprintf(pid_file, MAXPGPATH, "%s/postmaster.pid", pg_data);
 		snprintf(backup_file, MAXPGPATH, "%s/backup_label", pg_data);
-		snprintf(recovery_file, MAXPGPATH, "%s/recovery.conf", pg_data);
+		snprintf(recovery_file, MAXPGPATH, "%s/standby.enabled", pg_data);
 	}
 
 	switch (ctl_command)
diff --git a/src/include/access/xlog.h b/src/include/access/xlog.h
index f8f06c1..7e9ad4e 100644
--- a/src/include/access/xlog.h
+++ b/src/include/access/xlog.h
@@ -190,6 +190,20 @@ extern char *XLogArchiveCommand;
 extern bool EnableHotStandby;
 extern bool fullPageWrites;
 extern bool log_checkpoints;
+extern char *restore_command;
+extern char *archive_cleanup_command;
+extern char *recovery_end_command;
+extern bool	StandbyModeRequested;
+extern char *primary_conninfo;
+extern char *trigger_file;
+extern RecoveryTargetType recovery_target;
+extern TransactionId recovery_target_xid;
+extern TimestampTz recovery_target_time;
+extern char *recovery_target_name;
+extern bool recovery_target_inclusive;
+extern bool pause_at_recovery_target;
+extern char *recovery_target_timeline_string;
+extern TimeLineID recovery_target_timeline;
 
 /* WAL levels */
 typedef enum WalLevel
diff --git a/src/include/replication/walreceiver.h b/src/include/replication/walreceiver.h
index 72878f8..d51d86f 100644
--- a/src/include/replication/walreceiver.h
+++ b/src/include/replication/walreceiver.h
@@ -149,7 +149,7 @@ extern void WalRcvShmemInit(void);
 extern void ShutdownWalRcv(void);
 extern bool WalRcvStreaming(void);
 extern bool WalRcvRunning(void);
-extern void RequestXLogStreaming(TimeLineID tli, XLogRecPtr recptr, const char *conninfo);
+extern void RequestXLogStreaming(TimeLineID tli, XLogRecPtr recptr);
 extern XLogRecPtr GetWalRcvWriteRecPtr(XLogRecPtr *latestChunkStart, TimeLineID *receiveTLI);
 extern int	GetReplicationApplyDelay(void);
 extern int	GetReplicationTransferLatency(void);
diff --git a/src/include/utils/guc_tables.h b/src/include/utils/guc_tables.h
index 7360ce3..a2d3281 100644
--- a/src/include/utils/guc_tables.h
+++ b/src/include/utils/guc_tables.h
@@ -68,6 +68,8 @@ enum config_group
 	WAL_SETTINGS,
 	WAL_CHECKPOINTS,
 	WAL_ARCHIVING,
+	WAL_ARCHIVE_RECOVERY,
+	WAL_RECOVERY_TARGET,
 	REPLICATION,
 	REPLICATION_SENDING,
 	REPLICATION_MASTER,